Cream of the Crop 12/Cream of the Crop 12 (Part II)/Cream of the Crop 12 (Part II).iso/OS2/TCOS2100.ZIP/TCMDOS2.INF

OS/2 Help File | 1996-03-05 | 402.6 KB | 12,928 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. About Take Command for OS/2 Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                      Take Command for OS/2 1.0 Help System

                Text by Hardin Brothers, Tom Rawson, and Rex Conn

Program and Text Copyright 1988 - 1996, JP Software Inc., All Rights Reserved.

Take Command is a registered trademark of JP Software Inc.  OS/2 is a
registered trademark of IBM Corporation.  Other product and company names are
trademarks of their respective owners.

[1.0.056 - 2/96]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Using the Take Command for OS/2 Help System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This online help system for Take Command for OS/2 covers all Take Command
features and internal commands.  It includes reference information to assist
you in using Take Command and developing batch files, and includes most of the
details which are included in the printed Take Command for OS/2 manuals.

If you type part or all of a command on the line and then press F1, the help
system will provide "context-sensitive" help by using the first word on the
line as a help topic.  If it's a valid topic, you will see help for that topic
automatically; if not, you will see the list of all help topics and you can
pick the one you want.

You can use this feature to obtain help on any topic -- not just on commands.
For example, if you enter the command HELP _DISK you will see help for the
_DISK internal variable.

If you type the name of any internal command at the prompt, followed by a slash
and a question mark [/?] like this:

        copy /?

then you will see help for the command in a "quick-reference" style.  Output
from a /? display may be redirected with > or >>.

The /? option may not work correctly if you have used an alias to redefine how
an internal command operates.  To view the /? help for such a command you must
add an asterisk to the beginning of the command to disable alias processing.
For example, if you have defined this alias:

        alias copy *copy /r

then the command COPY /? will be translated to COPY /R /?, which will not work
properly (because the /? does not appear immediately after the command name).
However, if you use *COPY /?, the alias will be ignored and the /? will work as
you intended.

The Take Command for OS/2 help system uses OS/2's VIEW.EXE to display this help
text. Once you've started the help system with HELP or F1, you can use VIEW's
standard keystrokes to navigate.  For more information, click on the Help menu
at the top of the VIEW window.

Configuring the Help System

For the help system to work properly you must place the files TCMDOS2.INF (this
help text) and TCMDOS2H.MSG (the "quick-help" text) in the proper directories.
See File Locations for additional details.

You can select which help "books" are displayed when you press the F1 key or
enter the HELP command.  A help book is a single .INF file.  This help text is
in the file TCMDOS2.INF.

By default, Take Command for OS/2 opens only its own help.  You can change the
default books opened for the Take Command for OS/2 help system with the
HelpBook directive in TCMDOS2.INI. For example, to load both the Take Command
for OS/2 help and the OS/2 Command Reference when you press F1 or enter the
HELP command:

        HelpBook = TCMDOS2+CMDREF

(For this statement to work the CMDREF.INF file must be available in a
directory listed in your BOOKSHELF path in CONFIG.SYS.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Take Command Internal Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The best way to learn about commands is to experiment with them.  The lists
below categorize the available commands by topic and will help you find the
ones that you need.

System configuration:

    CHCP         CLS          COLOR        DATE
    FREE         HISTORY      KEYS         KEYBD
    LOG          MEMORY       PROMPT       REBOOT
    SETDOS       TIME         VER          VERIFY
    VOL

File and directory management:

    ATTRIB       COPY         DEL          DESCRIBE
    FFIND        LIST         MOVE         REN
    SELECT       TYPE

Subdirectory management:

    CD           CDD          DIR          DIRS
    MD           POPD         PUSHD        RD

Input and output:

    DRAWBOX      DRAWHLINE    DRAWVLINE    ECHO
    ECHOS        INKEY        INPUT        SCREEN
    SCRPUT       TEXT         VSCRPUT

Commands primarily for use in or with batch files and aliases (some work only
in batch files; see the individual commands for details):

    ALIAS        BEEP         CALL         CANCEL
    DELAY        DO           ENDLOCAL     FOR
    GLOBAL       GOSUB        GOTO         IF
    IFF          KEYSTACK     LOADBTM      MSGBOX
    ON           PAUSE        QUERYBOX     QUIT
    REM          RETURN       SETLOCAL     SHIFT
    UNALIAS

Environment and path commands:

    DPATH        ESET         PATH         SET
    UNSET

Other commands:

    ?            ACTIVATE     DETACH       EXCEPT
    EXIT         HELP         START        SHRALIAS
    TEE          TIMER        WINDOW       Y
    TITLE        WINDOW       Y


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. ? - List internal commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a list of internal commands or prompt for a command.

 Format:     ? ["prompt text" command]

 Usage:

 ? by itself displays a list of internal commands .

 If you have disabled a command with SETDOS /I, it will not appear in the list.

 If you add prompt text and a command, ? will display the prompt followed by
 "(Y/N)?" and wait for the user's response.  If the user presses "Y" or "y",
 the command will be executed.  If the user presses "N" or "n", the command
 will be ignored.

          [c:\] ?"Load the network"  call netstart.btm


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. ACTIVATE - Activate or change window state ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Activate a window, change its state, or change its title.

 Format:     ACTIVATE "window" [MAX | MIN | RESTORE | CLOSE | "title"]

             window :  Current title of window to work with.
             title : New title for window.

 See also:  START, TITLE, and WINDOW.

 Usage:

 Both the current name of the window and the new name, if any, must be enclosed
 in double quotes.  The quotes will not appear as part of the title bar text.

 If no options are used, the window named in the command will become the active
 window and be able to receive keystrokes and mouse commands.

 The MAX option expands the window to its maximum size, the MIN option reduces
 the window to an icon, and the RESTORE option returns the window to its
 default size and location on the desktop.  The CLOSE option closes the window
 and ends the session running in the window.

 This example renames and maximizes the window called "Take Command":

          [c:\] activate "Take Command" max "Take Command is Great!"

 You can use wildcards, including extended wildcards, in the window parameter.
 This is useful when you only know part of the current window title.  For
 example, if you are using the OS/2 EPM editor to edit the file TCMD.DOC, the
 session might have a title like "EPM - TCMD.DOC".  To activate this window
 without knowing the full title, use a command like this:

          [c:\] activate "EPM*"

 When this command is executed, ACTIVATE will select the first window whose
 name begins with "EPM", regardless of the rest of the title.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. ALIAS - Create or display aliases ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Create new command names that execute one or more commands or
             redefine default options for existing commands; assign commands to
             keystrokes; load or display the list of defined alias names.

 Format:     ALIAS [/P /R file...] [name [=][value ]]

             file :  One or more files to read for alias definitions.
             name :  Name for an alias, or for the key to execute the alias.
             value :  Text to be substituted for the alias name.

             /P(ause)                 /R(ead alias file)

 See also:  UNALIAS.

 Usage:

 The ALIAS command lets you create new command names or redefine internal
 commands.  It also lets you assign one or more commands to a single keystroke.
 An alias is often used to execute a complex series of commands with a few
 keystrokes or to create "in memory batch files" that run much faster than
 disk-based batch files.

 For example, if you would rather type D instead of DIR /W, you would use the
 command:

          [c:\] alias d = dir /w

 Now when you type a single d as a command, it will be translated into a DIR /W
 command.

 If you define aliases for commonly used application programs, you can often
 remove the directories they're stored in from the PATH. For example, if you
 use Quattro Pro and had the C:\QPRO directory in your path, you could define
 the following alias:

          [c:\] alias qpro = c:\qpro\q.exe

 With this alias defined, you can probably remove C:\QPRO from your path.
 Quattro Pro will now load much faster than it would if Take Command had to
 search the PATH for it.  In addition, the PATH can be shorter, which will
 speed up searches for other programs.

 If you apply this technique for each application program, you can often reduce
 your PATH to just two or three directories containing utility programs, and
 significantly reduce the time it takes to load most software on your system.
 Before removing a directory from the PATH, you will need to define aliases for
 all the executable programs you commonly use which are stored in that
 directory.

 Aliases are stored in memory, and are not saved automatically when you turn
 off your computer or end your current session.  See below for information on
 saving and reloading your aliases.

 Multiple Commands and Special Characters in Aliases

 An alias can represent more than one command.  For example:

          [c:\] alias letters = `cd \letters & text`

 creates a new command called LETTERS.  The command first uses CD to change to
 a subdirectory called \LETTERS and then runs a program called TEXT.  The
 ampersand [&] is the command separator and indicates that the two commands are
 distinct and should be executed sequentially.

 Aliases make extensive use of the command separator, and the parameter
 character, and may also use the escape character.  These characters differ
 between 4OS2 and Take Command.  In the text and examples below, we use the
 Take Command characters.  If you want to use the same aliases under different
 command processors, see 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility.

 When you type alias commands at the command line or in a batch file, you must
 use back quotes [`] around the definition if it contains multiple commands,
 parameters (discussed below), environment variables, redirection, or piping.
 The back quotes prevent premature expansion of these arguments.  You may use
 back quotes around other definitions, but they are not required. (You do not
 need back quotes when your aliases are loaded from an ALIAS /R file; see below
 for details.) The examples above and below include back quotes only when they
 are required.

 Nested Aliases

 Aliases may invoke internal commands, external commands, or other aliases.
 (However, an alias may not invoke itself, except in special cases where an IF
 or IFF command is used to prevent an infinite loop.) The two aliases below
 demonstrate alias nesting (one alias invoking another).  The first line
 defines an alias which runs a program called WP.EXE that is in the E:\WP60\
 subdirectory.  The second alias changes directories with the PUSHD command,
 runs the WP alias, and then returns to the original directory with the POPD
 command:

          [c:\] alias wp = e:\wp60\wp.exe
          [c:\] alias w = `pushd c:\wp & wp & popd`

 The second alias above could have included the full path and name of the
 WP.EXE program instead of calling the WP alias. However, writing two aliases
 makes the second one easier to read and understand, and makes the first alias
 available for independent use.  If you rename the WP.EXE program or move it to
 a new directory, only the first alias needs to be changed.

 Temporarily Disabling Aliases

 If you put an asterisk [*] immediately before a command in the value of an
 alias definition (the part after the equal sign), it tells Take Command not to
 attempt to interpret that command as another (nested) alias.  An asterisk used
 this way must be preceded by a space or the command separator and followed
 immediately by an internal or external command name.

 By using an asterisk, you can redefine the default options for any internal
 command.  For example, suppose that you always want to use the DIR command
 with the /2 (two column) and /P (pause at the end of each page) options:

          [c:\] alias dir = *dir /2/p

 If you didn't include the asterisk, the second DIR on the line would be the
 name of the alias itself, and Take Command would repeatedly re- invoke the DIR
 alias, rather than running the DIR command.  This would cause an "Alias loop"
 or "Command line too long" error.

 An asterisk also helps you keep the names of internal commands from
 conflicting with the names of external programs.  For example, suppose you
 have a program called LIST.COM.  Normally, the internal LIST command will run
 anytime you type LIST.  But two simple aliases will give you access to both
 the LIST.COM program and the LIST command:

          [c:\] alias list = c:\util\list.com
          [c:\] alias display = *list

 The first line above defines LIST as an alias for the LIST.COM program.  If
 you stopped there, the external program would run every time you typed LIST
 and you would not have easy access to the internal LIST command.  The second
 line renames the internal LIST command as DISPLAY.  The asterisk is needed in
 the second command to indicate that the following word means the internal
 command LIST, not the LIST alias which runs your external program.

 You can also use an asterisk before a command that you enter at the command
 line or in a batch file.  If you do, that command won't be interpreted as an
 alias.  This can be useful when you want to be sure you are running the true,
 original command and not an alias with the same name, or temporarily defeat
 the purpose of an alias which changes the meaning or behavior of a command.

 Partial Alias Names

 You can also use an asterisk in the name of an alias.  When you do, the
 characters following the asterisk are optional when you invoke the alias
 command.  (Use of an asterisk in the alias name is unrelated to the use of an
 asterisk in the alias value discussed above.)  For example, with this alias:

          [c:\] alias wher*eis = dir /sp

 the new command, WHEREIS, can be invoked as WHER, WHERE, WHEREI, or WHEREIS.
 Now if you type:

          [c:\] where myfile.txt

 The WHEREIS alias will be expanded to the command:

          dir /sp myfile.txt

 Keystroke Aliases

 If you want to assign an alias to a keystroke, use the key name on the left
 side of the equal sign, preceded by an at sign [@]. For example, to assign the
 command DIR /W to the F4 key, type

          [c:\] alias @F4 = dir /w

 See Keys and Key Names for a complete listing of key names and a description
 of the key name format. You can not use Alt key names (e.g. Alt-D) for
 keystroke aliases because these names are used by OS/2 for "accelerator"
 (shortcut) keys for menu items.

 When you define keystroke aliases, the assignments will only be in effect at
 the command line, not inside application programs.  Be careful not to assign
 aliases to keys that are already used at the command line (like F1 for Help).
 The command-line meanings take precedence and the keystroke alias will never
 be invoked.  If you want to use one of the command-line keys for an alias
 instead of its normal meaning, you must first disable its regular use with the
 NormalKey or NormalEditKey directive in your .INI file.

 If you define a keystroke alias with a single at sign as shown above, then,
 when you press the F4 key, the value of the alias (DIR /W above) will be
 placed on the command line for you.  You can type additional parameters if you
 wish and then press Enter to execute the command.  With this particular alias,
 you can define the files that you want to display after pressing F4 and before
 pressing Enter to execute the command.

 If you want the keystroke alias to take action automatically without waiting
 for you to edit the command line or press Enter, you can begin the definition
 with two at signs [@@]. Take Command will execute the alias "silently,"
 without displaying its text on the command line. For example, this command
 will assign an alias to the F6 key that uses the CDD command to take you back
 to the previous default directory:

          [c:\] alias @@f6 = cdd -

 You can also define a keystroke alias by using "@" or "@@" plus a scan code
 for one of the permissible keys (see the Key Code Tables for a list of scan
 codes).  In most cases it will be easier to use key names.  Scan codes should
 only be used with unusual keyboards where a key name is not available for the
 key you are using.

 Displaying Aliases

 If you want to see a list of all current ALIAS commands, type:

          [c:\] alias

 You can also view the definition of a single alias.  If you want to see the
 definition of the alias LIST, you can type:

          [c:\] alias list

 Saving and Reloading Your Aliases

 You can save your aliases to a file called ALIAS.LST this way:

          [c:\] alias > alias.lst

 You can then reload all the alias definitions in the file the next time you
 boot up with the command:

          [c:\] alias /r alias.lst

 This is much faster than defining each alias individually in a batch file.  If
 you keep your alias definitions in a separate file which you load when your
 system starts, you can edit them with a text editor, reload the edited file
 with ALIAS /R, and know that the same alias list will be loaded the next time
 you boot your computer.

 When you define aliases in a file that will be read with the ALIAS /R command,
 you do not need back quotes around the value, even if back quotes would
 normally be required when defining the same alias at the command line or in a
 batch file.

 To remove an alias, use the UNALIAS command.

 Alias Parameters

 Aliases can use command-line arguments or parameters like those in batch
 files.  The command-line arguments are numbered from %0 to %127.  %0 contains
 the alias name.  It is up to the alias to determine the meaning of the other
 parameters. You can use quotation marks to pass spaces, tabs, commas, and
 other special characters in an alias parameter; see Argument Quoting for
 details.

 Parameters that are referred to in an alias, but which are missing on the
 command line, appear as empty strings inside the alias.  For example, if you
 put two parameters on the command line, any reference in the alias to %3 or
 any higher-numbered parameter will be interpreted as an empty string.

 The parameter %n$ has a special meaning.  Take Command interprets it to mean
 "the entire command line, from argument n to the end."  If n is not specified,
 it has a default value of 1, so %$means "the entire command line after the
 alias name."  The special parameter %# contains the number of command-line
 arguments.

 For example, the following alias will change directories, perform a command,
 and return to the original directory:

          [c:\] alias in = `pushd %1 & %2$ & popd`

 When this alias is invoked as:

          [c:\] in c:\comm mycomm /xmodem /2400

 the first parameter, %1, has the value c:\comm.  %2 is mycomm,  3 is /xmodem,
 and %4 is /2400. The command line expands into these three separate commands:

          pushd c:\comm
          mycomm /xmodem /2400
          popd

 This next example uses the IFF command to redefine the defaults for SET.  It
 should be entered on one line:

          [c:\] alias set = `iff %# == 0 then & *set /p & else & *set %$ &
  endiff`

 This modifies the SET command so that if SET is entered with no arguments, it
 is replaced by SET /P (pause after displaying each page), but if SET is
 followed by an argument, it behaves normally. Note the use of asterisks (*set)
 to prevent alias loops.

 If an alias uses parameters, command-line arguments will be deleted up to and
 including the highest referenced argument.  For example, if an alias refers
 only to %1 and %4, then the first and fourth arguments will be used, the
 second and third arguments will be discarded, and any additional arguments
 beyond the fourth will be appended to the expanded command (after the value
 portion of the alias).  If an alias uses no parameters, all of the command-
 line arguments will be appended to the expanded command.

 Aliases also have full access to all variables in the environment, internal
 variables, and variable functions.  For example, you can create a simple
 command-line calculator this way (enter this on one line):

          [c:\] alias calc = `echo The answer is: %@eval[%$]`

 Now, if you enter:

          [c:\] calc 5 * 6

 the alias will display:

          The answer is: 30

 Local and Global Aliases

 The aliases can be stored in either a "local" or "global" list.

 With a local alias list, any changes made to the aliases will only affect the
 current copy of Take Command.  They will not be visible in other shells or
 other sessions.

 With a global alias list, all copies of Take Command will share the same alias
 list, and any changes made to the aliases in one copy will affect all other
 copies.  This is the default.

 You can control the type of alias list with the LocalAliases directive in the
 .INI file, and with the /L and /LA options of the START command.

 Whenever you start a secondary shell which uses a local alias list, it
 inherits a copy of the aliases from the previous shell. However, any changes
 to the alias made in the secondary shell will affect only that shell.  If you
 want changes made in a secondary shell to affect the previous shell, use a
 global alias list in both shells.

 Retaining Global Aliases with SHRALIAS

 If you select a global alias list you can share the aliases among all copies
 of Take Command running in any session.  When you close all Take Command
 sessions, the memory for the global alias list is released, and a new, empty
 alias list is created the next time you start Take Command.

 If you want the aliases to be retained in memory even when no Take Command
 session is running, see the SHRALIAS command, which retains the global alias,
 command history, and directory history lists.

 SHRALIAS retains the alias list in memory, but cannot preserve it when OS/2
 itself is shut down.  To save your aliases when restarting OS/2, you must
 store them in a file and reload them after the system restarts.  For details
 on how to do so, see Saving and Reloading Your Aliases (above).

 The UNKNOWN_CMD Alias

 If you create an alias with the name UNKNOWN_CMD, it will be executed any time
 Take Command would normally issue an "Unknown command" error message.  This
 allows you to define your own handler for unknown commands.  When the
 UNKNOWN_CMD alias is executed, the command line which generated the error is
 passed to the alias for possible processing.

 Use caution when you create the UNKNOWN_CMD alias.  If the alias contains an
 unknown command, it will be called repeatedly and Take Command will lock up in
 an infinite loop.

 Options:

    /P      (Pause) This option is only effective when ALIAS is used to display
            existing definitions.  It pauses the display after each page and
            waits for a keystroke before continuing (see Page and File
            Prompts).

    /R      (Read file) This option loads an alias list from a file. The format
            of the file is the same as that of the ALIAS display:

                                name=value

            where name is the name of the alias and value is its value.  You
            can use an equal sign [=] or space to separate the name and value.
            Back quotes are not required around the value.  You can add
            comments to the file by starting each comment line with a colon
            [:].  You can load multiple files with one ALIAS /R command by
            placing the names on the command line, separated by spaces:

                                [c:\] alias /r alias1.lst alias2.lst

            Each definition in an ALIAS /R file can be up to 2047 characters
            long. The definitions can span multiple lines in the file if each
            line, except the last, is terminated with an escape character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. ATTRIB - Change file attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Change or view file and subdirectory attributes.

 Format:     ATTRIB [/A:[[-]rhsda] /D /P /Q /S] [+|-[AHRS]] files ...

             files :  A file, directory, or list of files or directories on
             which to operate.

             /A(ttribute select)         /Q(uiet)
             /D(irectories)              /S(ubdirectories)
             /P(ause)

             Attribute flags:

              +A     Set the archive attribute
              -A     Clear the archive attribute
              +H     Set the hidden attribute
              -H     Clear the hidden attribute
              +R     Set the read-only attribute
              -R     Clear the read-only attribute
              +S     Set the system attribute
              -S     Clear the system attribute

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 Every file and subdirectory has 4 attributes that can be turned on (set) or
 turned off (cleared):  Archive, Hidden, Read-only, and System.

 The ATTRIB command lets you set or clear attributes for any file, group of
 files, or subdirectory.  You can view file attributes by entering ATTRIB
 without specifying new attributes (i.e., without the [+|-[AHRS]] part of the
 format), or with the DIR /T command.

 For example, you can set the read-only and hidden attributes for the file
 MEMO:

          [c:\] attrib +rh memo

 Attribute options apply to the file(s) that follow the options on the ATTRIB
 command line.  The example below shows how to set different attributes on
 different files with a single command.  It sets the archive attribute for all
 .TXT files, then sets the system attribute and clears the archive attribute
 for TEST.COM:

          [c:\] attrib +a *.txt +s -a test.com

 Your operating system also supports "D" (subdirectory) and "V" (volume label)
 attributes.  These attributes cannot be altered with ATTRIB; they are designed
 to be controlled only by the operating system itself.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select):  Select only those files that have the
            specified attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with
            a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.
            The colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., /A), ATTRIB will select
            all files and subdirectories including hidden and system files.  If
            attributes are combined, all the specified attributes must match
            for a file to be selected.  For example, /A:RHS will select only
            those files with all three attributes set.

    /D      (Directories) If you use the /D option, ATTRIB will modify the
            attributes of subdirectories in addition to files (yes, you can
            have a hidden subdirectory):

                                [c:\] attrib /d +h c:\mydir

            In addition, the /D option will keep ATTRIB from appending "\*.*"
            to the end of a directory name and modifying the attributes of all
            the files in the subdirectory.

            If you use a directory name instead of a file name, and omit /D,
            ATTRIB will append "\*.*" to the end of the name and act on all
            files in that directory, rather than acting on the directory
            itself.

    /P      (Pause) Wait for a key to be pressed after each screen page before
            continuing the display.  Your options at the prompt are explained
            in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /Q      (Quiet) This option turns off ATTRIB's normal screen output. It is
            most useful in batch files.

    /S      (Subdirectories) If you use the /S option, the ATTRIB command will
            be applied to all matching files in the current or named directory
            and all of its subdirectories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. BEEP - Beep the speaker ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Beep the speaker or play simple music.

 Format:     BEEP [frequency duration ...]

             frequency :  The beep frequency in Hertz (cycles per second).
             duration :  The beep length in 1/18th second intervals.

 Usage:

 BEEP generates a sound through your computer's speaker.  It is normally used
 in batch files to signal that an operation has been completed, or that the
 computer needs attention.

 Because BEEP allows you to specify the frequency and duration of the sound,
 you can also use it to play simple music or to create different kinds of
 signals for the user.

 You can include as many frequency and duration pairs as you wish. No sound
 will be generated for frequencies less than 20 Hz, allowing you to insert
 short delays.  The default value for frequency is 440 Hz; the default value
 for duration is 2.

 This batch file fragment runs a program called DEMO, then plays a few notes
 and waits for you to press a key:

          demo
          beep 440 4  600 2  1040 6
          pause Finished with the demo - hit a key

  The following table gives the frequency values for a five octave range
 (middle C is 262 Hz):

          ΓòöΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòù
          Γòæ C      Γöé  131  Γöé  262  Γöé  523  Γöé  1046  Γöé  2093 Γòæ
          Γòæ C#/Db  Γöé  139  Γöé  277  Γöé  554  Γöé  1108  Γöé  2217 Γòæ
          Γòæ D      Γöé  147  Γöé  294  Γöé  587  Γöé  1175  Γöé  2349 Γòæ
          Γòæ D#/Eb  Γöé  156  Γöé  311  Γöé  622  Γöé  1244  Γöé  2489 Γòæ
          Γòæ E      Γöé  165  Γöé  330  Γöé  659  Γöé  1318  Γöé  2637 Γòæ
          Γòæ F      Γöé  175  Γöé  349  Γöé  698  Γöé  1397  Γöé  2794 Γòæ
          Γòæ F#/Gb  Γöé  185  Γöé  370  Γöé  740  Γöé  1480  Γöé  2960 Γòæ
          Γòæ G      Γöé  196  Γöé  392  Γöé  784  Γöé  1568  Γöé  3136 Γòæ
          Γòæ G#/Ab  Γöé  208  Γöé  415  Γöé  831  Γöé  1662  Γöé  3322 Γòæ
          Γòæ A      Γöé  220  Γöé  440  Γöé  880  Γöé  1760  Γöé  3520 Γòæ
          Γòæ A#/Bb  Γöé  233  Γöé  466  Γöé  932  Γöé  1866  Γöé  3729 Γòæ
          Γòæ B      Γöé  248  Γöé  494  Γöé  988  Γöé  1973  Γöé  3951 Γòæ
          ΓòÜΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòºΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòºΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòºΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòºΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòºΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓò¥


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. CALL - Execute one batch file from another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Execute one batch file from within another.

 Format:     CALL file

             file :  The batch file to execute.

 See also:  CANCEL and QUIT.

 Usage:

 CALL allows batch files to call other batch files (batch file nesting).  The
 calling batch file is suspended while the called (second) batch file runs.
 When the second batch file finishes, the original batch file resumes execution
 at the next command.  If you execute a batch file from inside another batch
 file without using CALL, the first batch file is terminated before the second
 one starts.

 Take Command supports batch file nesting up to ten levels deep.

 The current ECHO state is inherited by a called batch file.

 A called batch file will return to the calling file after processing the last
 line in the called file, or when a QUIT command is executed.  A called batch
 file should always return in this way, or terminate all batch files with
 CANCEL.  Restarting (or CALLing) the original batch file from within a called
 file will prevent Take Command from detecting that you've left the second
 file, and it may cause an infinite loop or a stack overflow.

 CALL returns an exit code which matches the batch file return code. You can
 test this exit code with the %_? or %? environment variable, and use it with
 conditional commands (&& and ||).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. CANCEL - End all batch files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Terminate batch file processing.

 Format:     CANCEL [value ]

             value :  The exit code from 0 to 255 to return to Take Command.

 See also:  CALL and QUIT.

 Usage:

 The CANCEL command ends all batch file processing, regardless of the batch
 file nesting level.  Use QUIT to end a nested batch file and return to the
 previous batch file.

 You can CANCEL at any point in a batch file.  If CANCEL is used from within an
 alias it will end execution of both the alias and any batch file(s) which are
 running at the time.

 The following batch file fragment compares an input line to "end" and
 terminates all batch file processing if it matches:

          input Enter your choice:  %%option
          if "%option" == "end" cancel

 If you specify a value, CANCEL will set the ERRORLEVEL or exit code to that
 value (see the IF command, and the %? variable).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. CD - Change directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display or change the current directory.

 Format:     CD [ path | - ]
                or
             CHDIR [ path | - ]

             path :  The directory to change to, including an optional drive
             name.

 See also:  CDD, MD, PUSHD, RD, and CDPATH.

 Usage:

 CD and CHDIR are synonyms.  You can use either one.

 CD lets you navigate through the disk subdirectory structure by changing the
 current working directory.  If you enter CD and a directory name, the named
 directory becomes the new current directory.  For example, to change to the
 subdirectory C:\FINANCE\MYFILES:

          [c:\] cd \finance\myfiles
          [c:\finance\myfiles]

 Every disk drive on the system has its own current directory. Specifying both
 a drive and a directory in the CD command will change the current directory on
 the specified drive, but will not change the default drive.  For example, to
 change the default directory on drive A:

          [c:\] cd a:\utility
          [c:\]

 Notice that this command does not change to drive A:.  Use the CDD command to
 change the current drive and directory at the same time.

 You can change to the parent directory with CD ..; you can also go up one
 additional directory level with each additional [.]. For example, CD .... will
 go up three levels in the directory tree (see Extended Parent Directory
 Names).  You can move to a sibling directory -- one that branches from the
 same parent directory as the current subdirectory -- with a command like CD
 ..\newdir.

 If you enter CD with no argument or with only a disk drive name, it will
 display the current directory on the default or named drive.

 CD saves the current directory before changing to a new directory. You can
 switch back to the previous directory by entering CD -. (There must be a space
 between the CD command and the hyphen.)  You can switch back and forth between
 two directories by repeatedly entering CD -.  The saved directory is the same
 for both the CD and CDD commands.  Drive changes and automatic directory
 changes also modify the saved directory, so you can use CD - to return to a
 directory that you exited with an automatic directory change.

 Directory changes made with CD are recorded for display in the directory
 history window.

 CD never changes the default drive.  If you change directories on one drive,
 switch to another drive, and then enter CD -, the directory will be restored
 on the first drive but the current drive will not be changed.

 If CD can't change directly to the specified directory, it will look for the
 CDPATH variable; see CDPATH for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9. CDD - Change drive and directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Change the current disk drive and directory.

 Format:     CDD [ path | - ]

             path :  The name of the directory (or drive and directory) to
             change to.

 See also:  CD, MD, PUSHD, RD, and CDPATH.

 Usage:

 CDD is similar to the CD command, except that it also changes the default disk
 drive if one is specified.  CDD will change to the directory and drive you
 name.  To change from the root directory on drive A to the subdirectory C:\WP:

          [a:\] cdd c:\wp
          [c:\wp]

 You can change to the parent directory with CDD ..; you can also go up one
 additional directory level with each additional [.]. For example, CDD ....
 will go up three levels in the directory tree.

 CDD saves the current drive and directory before changing to a new directory.
 You can switch back to the previous drive and directory by entering CDD -.
 (There must be a space between the CDD command and the hyphen.)  You can
 switch back and forth between two drives and directories by repeatedly
 entering CDD -.  The saved directory is the same for both the CD and CDD
 commands.  Drive changes and automatic directory changes also modify the saved
 directory, so you can use CDD - to return to a directory that you exited with
 a drive change or an automatic directory change.

 Directory changes made with CDD are recorded for display in the directory
 history window.

 If CDD can't change directly to the specified directory, it will look for the
 CDPATH variable; see CDPATH for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.10. CHCP - Change the current code page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display or change the current system code page.

 Format:     CHCP [n ]

             n :  A system code page number.

 Usage:

 Code page switching allows you to select different character sets for language
 support.

 If you enter CHCP without a number, the current active code page is displayed,
 along with a list of all active code pages :

          [c:\] chcp
          Active code page: 437
          Prepared code pages:  273 274 277 278 280 282 284 285 297 437 500
          850 860 863 865 932 942 852 857 861 870 871 1026 1004

 If you enter CHCP plus a code page number, the system code page is changed.
 For example, to set the code page to multilingual:

          [c:\] chcp 850

 CHCP accepts one of the prepared system code pages.  An error message is
 displayed if a code page is selected that has not been prepared for the
 system.

 See your OS/2 documentation for more information on CHCP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.11. CLS - Clear the screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Clear the video display and move the cursor to the upper left
             corner; optionally change the default display colors.

 Format:     CLS [/C] [[BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg ]

             fg :  The new foreground color
             bg :  The new background color

             /C  Clear scrollback buffer

 Usage:

 CLS can be used to clear the screen without changing colors, or to clear the
 screen and change the screen colors simultaneously. These two examples show
 how to clear the screen to the default colors, and to bright white letters on
 a blue background:

          [c:\] cls
          [c:\] cls bright white on blue

 CLS is often used in batch files to clear the screen before displaying text.

 See Colors and Color Names for details about colors.

 Option:

    /C      (Clear buffer)  Clears the entire SCROLLBACK, not just the visible
            portion of the Take Command screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.12. COLOR - Change display colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Change the default display colors.

 Format:     COLOR [BRIght] fg ON [ BRIght] bg

             fg :  The new foreground color
             bg :  The new background color

 See also:  CLS, and Colors and Color Names for details about using colors.

 Usage:

 COLOR is normally used in batch files before displaying text. For example, to
 set screen colors to bright white on blue, you can use this command:

          [c:\] color bright white on blue


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.13. COPY - Copy files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Copy data between disks, directories, files, or physical hardware
             devices (such as your printer or serial port).

 Format:     COPY [/A:[[-]rhsda] /C /H /M /N /P /Q /R /S /T /U /V] source [+]
             ... [/A /B] destination [/A /B]

             source :  A file or list of files or a device to copy from.
             destination :  A file, directory, or device to copy to.

             /A(SCII)                    /P(rompt)
             /A:(ttribute select)        /Q(uiet)
             /B(inary)                   /R(eplace)
             /C(hanged)                  /S(ubdirectories)
             /H(idden)                   /T(otals)
             /M(odified)                 /U(pdate)
             /N(othing)                  /V(erify)

 See also:  ATTRIB, MOVE, and REN.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.
 Date, time, or size ranges anywhere on the line apply to all source files.

 Usage:

 The COPY command accepts all traditional syntax and options and adds several
 new features.

 The simplest use of COPY is to make a copy of a file, like this example which
 makes a copy of a file called FILE1.ABC:

          [c:\] copy file1.abc file2.def

 You can also copy a file to another drive and/or directory.  The following
 command copies FILE1 to the \MYDIR directory on drive E:

          [c:\] copy file1 e:\mydir

 You can copy several files at once by using wildcards:

          [c:\] copy *.txt e:\mydir

 You can also list several source files in one command.  The following command
 copies 3 files from the current directory to the \MYDIR directory on drive E:

          [c:\] copy file1 file2 file3 e:\mydir

 The way COPY interprets your command line depends on how many arguments (file,
 directory, or device names) are on the line, and whether the arguments are
 separated with [+] signs or spaces.

 If there is only one argument on the line, COPY assumes it is the source, and
 uses the current drive and directory as the destination.  For example, the
 following command copies all the .DAT files on drive A to the current
 directory on drive C:

          [c:\] copy a:*.dat

 If there are two or more arguments on the line and [+] signs are not used,
 then COPY assumes that the last argument is the destination and copies all
 source files to this new location.  If the destinationis a drive, directory,
 or device name then the source files are copied individually to the new
 location.  If the destination is a file name, the first source file is copied
 to the destination, and any additional source files are then appended to the
 new destination file.

 For example, the first of these commands copies the .DAT files from the
 current directory on drive A individually to C:\MYDIR (which must already
 exist as a directory); the second appends all the .DAT files together into one
 large file called C:\DATA (assuming C:\DATA is not a directory):

          [c:\] copy a:*.dat c:\mydir\
          [c:\] copy a:*.dat c:\data

 When you copy to a directory, if you add a backslash [\] to the end of the
 name as shown in the first example above, COPY will display an error message
 if the name does not refer to an existing directory.  You can use this feature
 to keep COPY from treating a mistyped destination directory name as a file
 name and attempting to append all your source files to a destination file,
 when you really meant to copy them individually to a destination directory.

 A plus [+] tells COPY to append two or more files to a single+destination
 file.  If you list several source files separated with [+] and don't specify a
 destination, COPY will use the name of the first source file as the
 destination, and append each subsequent file to the first file.  In this case
 the destination file will always be created in the current directory, even if
 the first source file is in another directory or on another drive.

 For example, the following command will append the contents of C:\MEMO2 and
 C:\MEMO3 to C:\MEMO1 and leave the combined contents in the file named
 C:\MEMO1:

          [c:\] copy memo1+memo2+memo3

 To append the same three files but store the result in BIGMEMO:

          [c:\] copy memo1+memo2+memo3 bigmemo

 To append C:\MEM\MEMO2 and C:\MEM\MEMO3 to D:\DATA\MEMO1, and leave the result
 in C:\MEM\MEMO1:

          [c:\mem] copy d:\data\memo1+memo2+memo3

 You cannot append files to a device (such as a printer); if you try to do so,
 COPY will ignore the [+] signs and copy the files individually. If you attempt
 to append several+source files to a destination directory or disk, COPY will
 append the files and place the copy in the new location with the same name as
 the first source file.

 If your destination has wildcards in it, COPY will attempt to match them with
 the source names.  For example, this command copies the .DAT files from drive
 A to C:\MYDIR and gives the new copies the extension .DX:

          [c:\] copy a:*.dat c:\mydir\*.dx

 This feature can give you unexpected results if you use it with multiple
 source file names.  For example, suppose that drive A contains XYZ.DAT and
 XYZ.TXT.  The command

          [c:\] copy a:\*.dat a:\*.txt c:\mydir\*.dx

 will copy A:XYZ.DAT to C:\MYDIR\XYZ.DX.  Then it will copy A:XYZ.TXT to
 C:\MYDIR\XYZ.DX, overwriting the first file it copied.

 COPY also understands include lists, so you can specify several different
 kinds of files in the same command. This command copies the .TXT, .DOC, and
 .BAT files from the E:\MYDIR directory to the root directory of drive A:

          [c:\] copy e:\mydir\*.txt;*.doc;*.bat a:\

 You can use date, time, and size ranges  to further define the files that you
 want to copy.  This example copies every file in the E:\MYDIR directory, which
 was created or modified yesterday, and which is also 10,000 bytes or smaller
 in size, to the root directory of drive A:

          [c:\] copy /[d-1] /[s0,10000] e:\mydir\*.* a:\

 COPY maintains the hidden and system attributes of files, but not the
 read-only attribute.  The destination file will always have the archive
 attribute set.

 If you COPY files with long filenames to a volume which does not support them,
 Take Command will display an error message.

 Options:

    The /A(SCII) and /B(inary) options apply to the preceding filename and to
    all subsequent filenames on the command line until the file name preceding
    the next /A or /B, if any. The other options (/A:, /C, /H, /M, /N, /P, /Q,
    /R, /S, /T, /U, /V) apply to all filenames on the command line, no matter
    where you put them.  For example, either of the following commands could be
    used to copy a font file to the printer in binary mode:

                [c:\] copy /b myfont.dat prn
                [c:\] copy myfont.dat /b prn

    Some options do not make sense in certain contexts, in which case COPY will
    ignore them.  For example, you cannot prompt before replacing an existing
    file when the destination is a device such as the printer -- there's no
    such thing as an "existing file" on the printer.  If you use conflicting
    output options, like /Q and /P, COPY will take a "conservative" approach
    and give priority to the option which generates more prompts or more
    information.

    /A      (ASCII) If you use /A with a source filename, the file will be
            copied up to, but not including, the first Ctrl-Z (Control-Z or
            ASCII 26) character in the file.  If you use /A with a destination
            filename, a Ctrl-Z will be added to the end of the file (some
            application programs use the Ctrl-Z to mark the end of a file). /A
            is the default when appending files, or when the destination is a
            device like NUL or PRN, rather than a disk file.

    /A      (Attribute select):  Select only those files that have the
            specified attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with
            a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.
            The colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., COPY /A:), COPY will
            select all files and subdirectories including hidden and system
            files (this is equivalent to COPY /H).  If attributes are combined,
            all the specified attributes must match for a file to be selected.
            For example, /A:RHS will select only those files with all three
            attributes set.

    /B      (Binary) If you use /B with a source filename, the entire file is
            copied; Ctrl-Z characters in the file do not affect the copy
            operation.  Using /B with a destination filename prevents addition
            of a Ctrl-Z to the end of the destination file. /B is the default
            for normal file copies.

    /C      (Changed files) Copy files only if the destination file exists and
            is older than the source (see also /U).  This option is useful for
            updating the files in one directory from those in another without
            copying any newly created files.

    /H      (Hidden) Copy all matching files including those with the hidden
            and/or system attribute set.

    /M      (Modified) Copy only those files with the archive attribute set,
            i.e., those which have been modified since the last backup.  The
            archive attribute will not be cleared after copying.

    /N      (Nothing) Do everything except actually perform the copy. This
            option is useful for testing what the result of a complex COPY
            command will be.

    /P      (Prompt) Ask the user to confirm each source file.  Your options at
            the prompt are explained in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /Q      (Quiet) Don't display filenames or the total number of files
            copied.  This option is most often used in batch files.  See also
            /T.

    /R      (Replace) Prompt the user before overwriting an existing file.
            Your options at the prompt are explained in detail under Page and
            File Prompts.

    /S      (Subdirectories) Copy the subdirectory tree starting with the files
            in the source directory plus each subdirectory below that.  The
            destination must be a directory; if it doesn't exist, COPY will
            attempt to create it.  COPY will also attempt to create needed
            subdirectories on the tree below the destination, including empty
            source directories.  If you attempt to use COPY /S to copy a
            subdirectory tree into part of itself, COPY will display an error
            message and exit.

    /T      (Totals) Turns off the display of filenames, like /Q, but does
            display the total number of files copied.

    /U      (Update) Copy each source file only if it is newer than a matching
            destination file or if a matching destination file does not exist
            (see also /C). This option is useful for keeping one directory
            matched with another with a minimum of copying.

    /V      (Verify) Verify each disk write.  This is the same as executing the
            VERIFY ON command, but is only active during the COPY. /V does not
            read back the file and compare its contents with what was written;
            it only verifies that the data written to disk is physically
            readable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14. DATE - Set the date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display and optionally change the system date.

 Format:     DATE [mm -dd -yy ]

             mm :  The month (1 - 12).
             dd :  The day (1 - 31).
             yy :  The year (80 - 99 = 1980 - 1999, or a 4- digit year).

 See also:  TIME.

 Usage:

 If you simply type DATE without any parameters, you will see the current
 system date and time, and be prompted for a new date. Press Enter if you don't
 wish to change the date.  If you type a new date, it will become the current
 system date, which is included in the directory entry for each file as it is
 created or altered:

          [c:\] date
          Wed  Jan 3, 1996  9:30:06
          Enter new date (mm-dd-yy):

 You can also enter a new system date by typing the DATE command plus the new
 date on the command line:

          [c:\] date 4-1-96

 You can use hyphens, slashes, or periods to separate the month, day, and year
 entries.  A full 4-digit year can be entered if you wish.

 DATE adjusts the format it expects depending on your country settings. When
 entering the date, use the correct format for the country setting currently in
 effect on your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.15. DEL - Delete files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Erase one file, a group of files, or entire subdirectories.

 Format:     DEL [/A:[[-]rhsda] /F /N /P /Q /S /T /X /Y /Z] file...
                or
             ERASE [/A:[[-]rhsda] /F /N /P /Q /S /T /X /Y /Z] file...

             file :  The file, subdirectory, or list of files or subdirectories
             to erase.

             /A:(ttribute select)            /S(ubdirectories)
             /F(orce delete)                 /T(otal)
             /N(othing)                      /X (remove empty subdirectories)
             /P(rompt)                       /Y(es to all prompts)
             /Q(uiet)                        /Z(ap hidden and read-only files)

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 DEL and ERASE are synonyms; you can use either one.

 Use the DEL and ERASE commands with caution; the files and subdirectories that
 you erase may be impossible to recover without specialized utilities and a lot
 of work.

 To erase a single file, simply enter the file name:

          [c:\] del letters.txt

 You can also erase multiple files in a single command.  For example, to erase
 all the files in the current directory with a .BAK or .PRN extension:

          [c:\] del *.bak *.prn

 If you enter a subdirectory name, or a filename composed only of wildcards (*
 and/or ?), DEL asks for confirmation (Y or N) unless you specified the /Y
 option.  If you respond with a Y, DEL will delete all the files in that
 subdirectory (hidden, system, and read-only files are only deleted if you use
 the /Z option).

 DEL displays the amount of disk space recovered, unless the /Q option is used
 (see below).  It does so by comparing the amount of free disk space before and
 after the DEL command is executed.  This amount may be incorrect if you are
 using a deletion tracking system which stores deleted files in a hidden
 directory, or if another program performs a file operation while the DEL
 command is executing.

 Remember that DEL removes file descriptions along with files.  Most deletion
 tracking systems will not be able to save or recover a file's description,
 even if they can save or recover the data in a file.

 DEL returns a non-zero exit code if no files are deleted, or if another error
 occurs.  You can test this exit code with the %_? environment variable, and
 use it with conditional commands (&& and ||).

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select):  Select only those files that have the
            specified attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with
            a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.
            The colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., DEL /A), DEL will delete
            all files and subdirectories including hidden and system files.  If
            attributes are combined, all the specified attributes must match
            for a file to be selected for deletion.  For example, /A:RHS will
            select only those files with all three attributes set.

    /N      (Nothing) Do everything except actually delete the file(s).  This
            is useful for testing what the result of a DEL would be.

    /P      (Prompt) Prompt the user to confirm each erasure.  Your options at
            the prompt are explained in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /Q      (Quiet) Don't display filenames as they are deleted, or the number
            of files deleted or bytes freed.  See also /T.

    /S      (Subdirectories) Delete the specified files in this directory and
            all of its subdirectories.  This is like a GLOBAL DEL, and can be
            used to delete all the files in a subdirectory tree or even a whole
            disk. It should be used with caution!

    /T      (Total) Don't display filenames as they are deleted, but display
            the total number of files deleted plus the amount of free disk
            space recovered.

    /X      (Remove empty subdirectories) Remove empty subdirectories after
            deleting (only useful when used with /S).

    /Y      (Yes) The reverse of /P -- it assumes a Y response to everything,
            including deleting an entire subdirectory tree. Take Command
            normally prompts before deleting files when the name consists only
            of wildcards or a subdirectory name (see above); /Y overrides this
            protection, and should be used with extreme caution!

    /Z      (Zap) Delete read-only, hidden, and system files as well as normal
            files.  Files with the read-only, hidden, or system attribute set
            are normally protected from deletion; /Z overrides this protection,
            and should be used with caution.  Because EXCEPT works by hiding
            files, /Z will override an EXCEPT command.

            For example, to delete the entire subdirectory tree starting with
            C:\UTIL, including hidden and read-only files, without prompting
            (use this command with CAUTION!):

                                [c:\] del /sxyz c:\util\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.16. DELAY - Pause for a specified time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Pause for a specified length of time.

 Format:     DELAY [seconds ]

             seconds :  The number of seconds to delay.

 Usage:

 DELAY is useful in batch file loops while waiting for something to occur.  To
 wait for 10 seconds:

          delay 10

 A simple loop could make a tone with the BEEP command to get the operator's
 attention and then DELAY for a few seconds while waiting for the user to
 respond.

 For delays shorter than one second, use the BEEP command with an inaudible
 frequency (below 20 Hz).

 You can cancel a delay by pressing Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.17. DESCRIBE - Create file description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Create, modify, or delete file and subdirectory descriptions.

 Format:     DESCRIBE [/A:[[-]rhsda]] file ["description" ] ...

             file :  The file or files to operate on.
             "description" :  The description to attach to the file.

             /A:(ttribute select)

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 DESCRIBE adds descriptions to files and subdirectories. The descriptions are
 displayed by DIR in single-column mode and by SELECT. Descriptions let you
 identify your files in much more meaningful ways than you can in an
 eight-character filename.

 You enter a description on the command line by typing the DESCRIBE command,
 the filename, and the description in quotation marks, like this:

          [c:\] describe memo.txt "Memo to Bob about party"

 If you don't put a description on the command line, DESCRIBE will prompt you
 for it:

          [c:\] describe memo.txt

  Describe "memo.txt" : Memo to Bob about party

 If you use wildcards or multiple filenames with the DESCRIBE command and don't
 include the description text, you will be prompted to enter a description for
 each file.  If you do include the description on the command line, all
 matching files will be given the same description.

 Each description can be up to 511 characters long.  You can change this limit
 with the DescriptionMax directive in TCMDOS2.INI.  DESCRIBE can edit
 descriptions longer than DescriptionMax, but will not allow you to lengthen
 the existing text.

 The descriptions are stored in each directory in a hidden file called
 DESCRIPT.ION.  Use the ATTRIB command to remove the hidden attribute from this
 file if you need to copy or delete it.  (DESCRIPT.ION is always created as a
 hidden file, but will not be re-hidden by Take Command if you remove the
 hidden attribute.)  You can change the description file name with the
 INI_DescriptionName directive in the TCMDOS2.INI file or the SETDOS command,
 and retrieve it with the _DNAME internal variable.

 The description file is modified appropriately whenever you perform an
 internal command which affects it (such as COPY, MOVE, DEL, or RENAME), but
 not if you use an external program (such as XCOPY or a visual shell).

 On drives which support long filenames you will not see file descriptions in a
 normal DIR display, because of the potential length of each filename. To view
 the descriptions, use DIR /Z to display the directory in FAT format.  See the
 DIR command for more details.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select):  Select only those files that have the
            specified attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with
            a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.
            The colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., /A), DESCRIBE will select
            all files and subdirectories including hidden and system files.  If
            attributes are combined, all the specified attributes must match
            for a file to be selected.  For example, /A:RHS will select only
            those files with all three attributes set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.18. DETACH - Start a program in "detached" mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Start an OS/2 program in "detached" mode.

 Format:     DETACH command

             command :  The name of a command to execute, including an optional
             drive and path specification.

 See also:  START.

 Usage:

 When you start a program with DETACH, that program normally cannot use the
 keyboard, mouse, or video display.  It is "detached" from the normal means of
 user input and output.  However, you can redirect the program's standard I/O
 to other devices if necessary, using redirection symbols.

 The command can be an internal command, external command, alias, or batch
 file.  If it is not an external command, Take Command will detach a copy of
 itself to execute the command.

 For example, the following command will detach a copy of Take Command to run
 the batch file XYZ.BTM:

          [c:\] detach xyz.btm

 Once the program has started, Take Command returns to the prompt immediately.
 It does not wait for a detached program to finish.

 Due to limitations in the way OS/2 starts detached processes, Take Command
 cannot perform a true detach operation like that available from a
 character-mode command processor such as 4OS2 or CMD.EXE.  Instead, it starts
 the program in an invisible window.  If you require a true detached process
 you must use a character-mode command processor to start it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.19. DIR - Display directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display information about files and subdirectories.

 Format:     DIR [/1 /2 /4 /A[[:][-]rhsda] /B /D /E /F /H /I"text" /J /K /L /M
             /N /O[[:][-]adeginrsu] /P /R /S /T[:acw] /U /V /W /Z] [file...]

             file :  The file, directory, or list of files or directories to
             display.

             /1 (one column)                 /L(ower case)
             /2 (two columns)                /M (suppress footer)
             /4 (four columns)               /N(ew format)
             /A(ttribute select)             /O(rder)
             /B(are)                         /P(ause)
             /D(isable color coding)         /R (disable wRap)
             /E (use upper case)             /S(ubdirectories)
             /F(ull path)                    /T (aTtribute) or (Time)
             /H(ide dots)                    /U (sUmmary information)
             /I (match descriptions)         /V(ertical sort)
             /J(ustify names)                /W(ide)
             /K (suppress header)            /Z (use FAT format)

 See also:  ATTRIB, DESCRIBE, SELECT, and SETDOS.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 DIR can be used to display information about files from one or more of your
 disk directories, in a wide range of formats.  Depending on the options
 chosen, you can display the file name, attributes, and size; the time and date
 of the last change to the file; and the file description. You can also display
 information in 1, 2, 4, or 5 columns, sort the files several different ways,
 use color to distinguish file types, and pause after each full screen.

 The various DIR displays are controlled through options or switches. The best
 way to learn how to use the many options available with the DIR command is to
 experiment.  You will soon know which options you want to use regularly.  You
 can select those options permanently by using the ALIAS command.

 On drives which support long file names, DIR will use the standard long name
 display format with the filename at the right-hand side of the display. File
 descriptions are not displayed in this format.  To switch to the more
 traditional "FAT" (short name) format, and display the file descriptions, use
 the /Z switch.

 You may want to mix several options.  For example, to display all the files in
 the current directory, in 2 columns, sorted vertically (down one column then
 down the next), and with a pause at the end of each page:

          [c:\] dir /2/p/v

 To set up this format as the default, using an alias:

          [c:\] alias dir=*dir /2/p/v

 This example displays all the files on all directories of drive C, including
 hidden and system files, pausing after each page:

          [c:\] dir /s/a/p c:\

 DIR allows wildcard characters (* and ?) in the filename.  If you don't
 specify a filename, DIR defaults to *.* (display all non- hidden files and
 subdirectories in the current directory).  To display all of the .WKS files in
 the current directory:

          [c:\] dir *.wks

 With the /I option, DIR can select files to display based on their
 descriptions. DIR will display a file if its description matches the text
 after the /I switch.  The search is not case sensitive. You can use wildcards
 and extended wildcards as part of the text.  For example, to display any file
 described as a "Test File" you can use this command:

          [c:\] dir /i"test file"

 If you want to display files that include the words "test file" anywhere in
 their descriptions, use extended wild cards like this:

          [c:\] dir /i"*test file*"

 If you link two or more filenames together with spaces, DIR will display all
 of the files that match the first name and then all of the files that match
 the second name. You may use a different drive and path for each filename.
 This example lists all of the .WKS and then all of the .WK1 files in the
 current directory:

          [c:\] dir *.wks *.wk1

 Filenames are normally displayed in lower case for FAT drives, and in the case
 in which they are stored on the disk for HPFS drives.  You can override these
 defaults and force filenames to display in upper case with /E, or in lower
 case with /L.

 If you use an include list to link multiple filenames, DIR will display the
 matching filenames in a single listing.  Only the first filename in an include
 list can have a path; the other files must be in the same path.  This example
 displays the same files as the previous example, but the .WKS and .WK1 files
 are intermixed:

          [c:\] dir *.wks;*.wk1

 You can display the file and subdirectory names in color by setting the
 COLORDIR environment variable or using the ColorDir directive in your .INI
 file.  See Color-Coded Directories for details.

 If you are using color-coded directories and attempt to redirect the output of
 DIR to a character device, such as a serial port or the printer,
 non-color-coded file names will be displayed on the device but color-coded
 names may still be displayed on the screen. This will not occur if the output
 of DIR is redirected to a disk file.  To prevent this problem, use the /D
 switch to disable color coding when redirecting the output of DIR to a
 character device.

 When displaying file descriptions, DIR will wrap long lines to fit on the
 screen.  DIR displays a maximum of 40 characters of text in each line of a
 description, unless your screen width allows a wider display.  If you disable
 description wrapping with the /R switch, the description is truncated at the
 right edge of the screen, and a right arrow is added at the end of the line to
 alert you to the existence of additional description text.

 If you attempt to redirect the output of DIR to a character device, such as a
 serial port or the printer, long descriptions will be wrapped at the screen
 width in the redirected output.  If this is not what you want, use /R to
 disable wrapping.

 When sorting file names and extensions, Take Command normally assumes that
 sequences of digits should be sorted numerically (for example, the file DRAW2
 would come before DRAW03 because 2 is numerically smaller than 03), rather
 than strictly alphabetically (where DRAW2 would come second because "2" is
 after "0" in alphanumeric order). You can defeat this behavior and force a
 strict alphabetic sort with the /O:a option.

 If you have selected a specific country code for your system, DIR will display
 the date in the format for that country.  The default date format is U.S.
 (mm-dd-yy).  The separator character in the file time will also be affected by
 the country code.  If a file's date and time is set to exactly zero, it will
 be displayed as blank.

 DIR can handle directories of any size, limited only by available memory.
 Memory requirements for DIR are generally not a concern under Take Command,
 because of the virtual memory available under this operating system.

 Options on the command line apply only to the filenames which follow the
 option, and options at the end of the line apply to the preceding filename
 only.  This allows you to specify different options for different groups of
 files, yet retains compatibility with the traditional DIR command when a
 single filename is specified.

 Options:

    /1      Single column display - display the filename, size, date, time, and
            (if the drive does not support long filenames) the description.

    /2      Two column display -- display the filename, size, date, and time.
            If you use /2 (or /4) on a drive which supports long filenames, DIR
            will only display the file names.  Also, the number of columns may
            be reduced to one for names too long to fit on half the screen.
            Due to these restrictions, /2 is normally most useful on drives
            which support long filenames when used with /Z to force the display
            to FAT format.

    /4      Four column display -- display the filename and size, in K (
            kilobytes) or M (megabytes).  The note under /2 above regarding
            drives which support long filenames applies to /4 as well.

    /A      (Attribute select):  Select only those files that have the
            specified attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with
            a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.
            The colon [:] after /A is optional.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., DIR /A), DIR will display
            all files and subdirectories including hidden and system files.  If
            attributes are combined, all the specified attributes must match
            for a file to be included in the listing.  For example, /A:RHS will
            display only those files with all three attributes set.

    /B      (Bare)  Suppress the header and summary lines, and display file or
            subdirectory names only, in a single column. This option is most
            useful when you want to redirect a list of names to a file or
            another program.  If you use /B with /S, DIR will show the full
            path of each file instead of simply its name and extension.

    /D      (Disable color coding)  Temporarily disable directory color coding.
            May be required when color-coded directories are used and DIR
            output is redirected to a character device like the printer (e.g.,
            PRN or LPT1) or serial port (e.g., COM1 or COM2).  /D is not
            required when DIR output is redirected to a file.

    /E      Display filenames in upper case; also see SETDOS /U and the
            UpperCase directive in TCMDOS2.INI.

    /F      (Full path)  Display each filename with its drive letter and path
            in a single column, without other information.

    /H      (Hide dots)  Suppress the display of the "." and ".." directories.

    /I      Display filenames by matching text in their descriptions. The text
            can include wild cards and extended wildcards.  The search text
            must be enclosed in quotation marks. /I may be used to select files
            even if descriptions are not displayed (for example, if /2 is
            used).  However, /I will be ignored if /C or /O:c is used.

    /J      (Justify names)  Justify (align) filename extensions and display
            them in the traditional format.

    /K      Suppress the header (disk and directory name) display.

    /L      (Lower case)  Display file and directory names in lower case; also
            see SETDOS /U and the UpperCase directive in TCMDOS2.INI.

    /M      Suppress the footer (file and byte count totals) display.

    /N      (New format) Use the long filename display format, even if the
            files are stored on a volume which does not support long filenames.
            See also /Z.

    /O      (Order) Set the sorting order.  You may use any combination of the
            following sorting options; if multiple options are used, the
            listing will be sorted with the first sort option as the primary
            key, the next as the secondary key, and so on:

                     -  Reverse the sort order for the next option
                     a  Sort in ASCII order, not numerically, when there are
                     digits in the name
                     d  Sort by date and time (oldest first); for HPFS drives
                     also see /T
                     e  Sort by extension
                     g  Group subdirectories first, then files
                     i  Sort by file description (ignored if /C or /O:c is
                     used)
                     n  Sort by filename (this is the default)
                     r  Reverse the sort order for all options
                     s  Sort by size
                     u  Unsorted

    /P      (Pause)  Wait for a key to be pressed after each screen page before
            continuing the display.  Your options at the prompt are explained
            in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /R      (disable wRap)  Forces long descriptions to be displayed on a
            single line, rather than wrapped onto two or more lines.  Use /R
            when output is redirected to a character device, such as a serial
            port or the printer; or when you want descriptions truncated,
            rather than wrapped, in the on-screen display.

    /S      (Subdirectories)  Display file information from the current
            directory and all of its subdirectories.  DIR will only display
            headers and summaries for those directories which contain files
            that match the filename(s) and attributes (if /A is used) that you
            specify on the command line.

    /T      (aTtribute display)  Display the filenames, attributes, and
            descriptions.  The descriptions will be wrapped onto the next line,
            if necessary, unless you also use the /R (truncate) option.  If you
            use both /T and /R, descriptions are truncated after 34 characters
            on an 80-column display.  The attributes are displayed in the
            format RHSA, with the following meanings:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         A  Archive

            If you wish to add another option after /T, you must start the next
            option with a forward slash.  If you don 't, Take Command will
            interpret the /T as the /T:acw time display switch (see below) and
            the following character as a valid or invalid time selector.  For
            example:

                                [c:\] dir /tz       incorrect, will display error
                                [c:\] dir /t/z      correct

    /T:acw  (Time display)  Specify which of the date and time fields on a
            drive which supports long filenames should be displayed and used
            for sorting:

                         a  Last access time
                         c  Creation time
                         w  Last write time (default)

    /U      (sUmmary information)  Only display the number of files, the total
            file size, and the total amount of disk space used.

    /V      (Vertical sort)  Display the filenames sorted vertically rather
            than horizontally (use with the /2, /4 or /W options).

    /W      (Wide)  Display filenames only, horizontally across the screen (5
            columns on an 80-character wide display).

    /Z      Display the directory in FAT format.  Long filenames will be
            truncated to 12 characters.  If the name is longer than 12
            characters, it will be followed by a right arrow to show that one
            or more characters have been truncated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.20. DIRS - Display the directory stack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display the current directory stack.

 Format:     DIRS

 Usage:

 The PUSHD command adds the current default drive and directory to the
 directory stack, a list that Take Command maintains in memory.  The POPD
 command removes the top entry of the directory stack and makes that drive and
 directory the new default.  The DIRS command displays the contents of the
 directory stack, with the most recent entries on top (i.e., the next POPD will
 retrieve the first entry that DIRS displays).

 The directory stack holds 255 characters, enough for 10 to 20 typical drive
 and directory entries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.21. DO - Loop in batch files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DO

 Purpose:    Create loops in batch files.

 Format:     DO [n | FOREVER]
                or
             DO varname = start TO end [BY n ]
                or
             DO [WHILE | UNTIL] condition
                ...
             [ITERATE]
             [LEAVE]
                ...
             ENDDO

             n, start, end :  An integer between 0 and 2,147,483,647 inclusive,
             or an internal variable or variable function that evaluates to
             such a value.
             varname :  The environment variable that will hold the loop
             counter.
             condition :  A test to determine if the loop should be executed.

 Usage:

 DO can only be used in batch files.  It cannot be used in aliases.

 DO can be used to create 3 different kinds of loops.  The first, introduced by
 DO n, is a counted loop.  The batch file lines between DO and ENDDO are
 repeated n times.  You can also specify "forever" for n if you wish to create
 an endless loop. For example:

          do 5
          beep
          enddo

 The second type of loop is similar to a "for loop" in programming languages
 like BASIC.  DO creates an environment variable, varname, and sets it equal to
 the value start (if varname already exists in the environment, it will be
 overwritten).  DO then begins the loop process by comparing the value of
 varname with the value of end.  If varname is less than or equal to end, DO
 executes the batch file lines up to the ENDDO.  Next, DO adds 1 to the value
 of varname, or adds the value n if BY n is specified, and repeats the compare
 and execute process until varname is greater than end. This example displays
 the even numbers from 2 through 20:

          do i = 2 to 20 by 2
          echo %i
          enddo

 DO can also count down, rather than up.  If n is negative, varname will
 decrease by n with each loop, and the loop will stop when varname is less than
 end. For example, to display the even numbers from 2 through 20 in reverse
 order, replace the first line of the example above with:

          do i = 20 to 2 by -2

 The third type of loop is called a "while loop" or "until loop." DO evaluates
 the condition, which can be any of the tests supported by the IF command, and
 executes the lines between DO and ENDDO as long as the condition is true.  The
 loop ends when the condition becomes false.

 WHILE tests the condition at the start of the loop; UNTIL tests it at the end.
 If you use WHILE, the loop may never be executed (if the condition is false at
 the start of the loop); if you use UNTIL, the loop will always be executed at
 least once.

 Two special commands, ITERATE and LEAVE, can only be used inside a DO / ENDDO
 loop.  ITERATE ignores the remaining lines inside the loop and returns to the
 beginning of loop for another iteration (unless DO determines that the loop is
 finished).  LEAVE exits from the current DO loop and continues with the line
 following ENDDO. Both ITERATE and LEAVE are most often used in an IF or IFF
 command:

          do while "%var" != "%val1"
          ...
          if "%var" == "%val2" leave
          enddo

 You can nest DO loops up to 15 levels deep.

 The DO and ENDDO commands must be on separate lines, and cannot be placed
 within a command group, or on the same line as other commands (this is the
 reason DO cannot be used in aliases).  However, commands within the DO loop
 can use command groups or the command separator in the normal way.

 For example, the following command will not work properly, because the DO and
 ENDDO are inside a command group and are not on separate lines:

          if "%a" == "%b" (do i = 1 to 10 & echo %i & enddo)

 However this batch file fragment uses multiple commands and command grouping
 within the DO, and will work properly:

          do i = 1 to 10
          ...
          if "%x1" == "%x2" (echo Done! & leave)
          ...
          enddo

 You can exit from all DO / ENDDO loops by using GOTO to a line past the last
 ENDDO.  However, be sure to read the cautionary notes about GOTO and DO under
 the GOTO command before using a GOTO inside any DO loop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.22. DPATH - Set data search path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Specify the subdirectories which applications will search to find
             files that are not in the current directory.

 Format:     DPATH [directory [;directory... ]]

             directory :  The full name of a directory to include in the DPATH
             (data path) setting.

 See also:  PATH, SET, and ESET.

 Usage:

 When most OS/2 applications try to open a data file, they look for the file in
 the current directory first.  If they fail to find the file there, they search
 each of the directories in the DPATH setting in the order that they are
 included.  Internal commands like TYPE do not search the DPATH directories for
 files.

 For example, the following DPATH command directs applications to look for
 files in this order:  the current directory, the INIT directory on C, and the
 CONFIG directory on D:

          [c:\] dpath c:\init;d:\config

 The listing of directories to be searched can be set or viewed with DPATH. The
 list is stored as an environment string with the variable name DPATH, and can
 also be set or viewed with the SET command and edited with the ESET command.

 Directory names in the DPATH must be separated with semicolons [;].  Take
 Command will not shift directory names in the DPATH to upper case as it does
 with those in the PATH setting.  If you want the names in the DPATH to be in
 upper case you must enter them that way.

 If you enter DPATH with no parameters, Take Command displays the current DPATH
 search list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.23. DRAWBOX - Draw a box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Draw a box on the screen.

 Format:     DRAWBOX ulrow ulcol lrrow lrcol style [BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg
             [FILL [BRIght] bgfill] [ZOOm] [SHAdow]

             ulrow:  Row for upper left corner
             ulcol:  Column for upper left corner
             lrrow:  Row for lower right corner
             lrcol:  Column for lower right corner
             style:  Box drawing style:
              0  No lines (box is drawn with blanks)
              1  Single line
              2  Double line
              3  Single line on top and bottom, double on sides
              4  Double line on top and bottom, single on sides
             fg:  Foreground character color
             bg:  Background character color
             bgfill:  Background fill color (for the inside of the box)

 See also:  DRAWHLINE and DRAWVLINE.

 Usage:

 DRAWBOX is useful for creating attractive screen displays in batch files.

 For example, to draw a box around the entire screen with bright white lines on
 a blue background:

          drawbox 0 0 24 79 1 bri whi on blu fill blu

 See Colors and Color Names for details about colors.

 If you use ZOOM, the box appears to grow in steps to its final size. The speed
 of the zoom operation depends on the speed of your video system.

 If you use SHADOW, a drop shadow is created by changing the characters in the
 row under the box and the 2 columns to the right of the box to normal
 intensity text with a black background (this will make characters displayed in
 black disappear entirely).

 The row and column values are zero-based, so on a standard 25 line by 80
 column display, valid rows are 0 - 24 and valid columns are 0 - 79.

 DRAWBOX checks for valid row and column values, and displays a "Usage" error
 message if any values are out of range.

 Unlike DRAWHLINE and DRAWVLINE, DRAWBOX does not automatically connect boxes
 to existing lines on the screen with the proper connector characters.  If you
 want to draw lines inside a box and have the proper connectors drawn
 automatically, draw the box first, then use DRAWHLINE and DRAWVLINE to draw
 the lines.

 DRAWBOX uses the standard line and box drawing characters in the U.S. English
 extended ASCII character set.  These characters are included in the English
 language versions of standard monospaced fonts typically available under OS/2
 (e.g. Courier, System Monospaced, or System VIO).  However, if your system is
 configured for a different font, character set (code page), or country, or you
 have replaced or modified the OS/2 default fonts, the box may not appear on
 your screen as you expect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.24. DRAWHLINE - Draw horizontal line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Draw a vertical line on the screen.

 Format:     DRAWHLINE row column len style [BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg

             row:  Starting row
             column:  Starting column
             len:  Length of line
             style:  Line drawing style:
              1  Single line
              2  Double line
             fg:  Foreground character color
             bg:  Background character color

 See also:  DRAWBOX and DRAWVLINE.

 Usage:

 DRAWHLINE is useful for creating attractive screen displays in batch files.
 It detects other lines and boxes on the display, and creates the appropriate
 connector characters when possible (not all types of lines can be connected
 with the available characters).

 For example, the following command draws a double line along the top row of
 the display with green characters on a blue background:

          drawhline 0 0 80 2 green on blue

 The row and column values are zero-based, so on a standard 25 line by 80
 column display, valid rows are 0 - 24 and valid columns are 0 - 79.  DRAWHLINE
 checks for a valid row and column, and displays a "Usage" error message if
 either value is out of range.

 See Colors and Color Names for details about colors.

 DRAWHLINE uses the standard line and box drawing characters in the U.S.
 English extended ASCII character set.  These characters are included in the
 English language versions of standard monospaced fonts typically available
 under OS/2 (e.g. Courier, System Monospaced, or System VIO).  However, if your
 system is configured for a different font, character set (code page), or
 country, or you have replaced or modified the OS/2 default fonts, the line may
 not appear on your screen as you expect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.25. DRAWVLINE - Draw a vertical line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Draw a vertical line on the screen.

 Format:     DRAWVLINE row column len style [BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg

             row:  Starting row
             column:  Starting column
             len:  Length of line
             style:  Line drawing style:
              1  Single line
              2  Double line
             fg:  Foreground character color
             bg:  Background character color

 See also:  DRAWBOX and DRAWHLINE.

 Usage:

 DRAWVLINE is useful for creating attractive screen displays in batch files.
 It detects other lines and boxes on the display, and creates the appropriate
 connector characters when possible (not all types of lines can be connected
 with the available characters).

 For example, to draw a double width line along the left margin of the display
 with bright red characters on a black background:

          drawvline 0 0 25 2 bright red on black

 The row and column values are zero-based, so on a standard 25 line by 80
 column display, valid rows are 0 - 24 and valid columns are 0 - 79.  DRAWVLINE
 checks for a valid row and column, and displays a "Usage" error message if
 either value is out of range.

 See Colors and Color Names for details about colors.

 DRAWVLINE uses the standard line and box drawing characters in the U.S.
 English extended ASCII character set.  These characters are included in the
 English language versions of standard monospaced fonts typically available
 under OS/2 (e.g. Courier, System Monospaced, or System VIO).  However, if your
 system is configured for a different font, character set (code page), or
 country, or you have replaced or modified the OS/2 default fonts, the line may
 not appear on your screen as you expect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.26. ECHO - Display a message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a message, enable or disable batch file or command-line
             echoing, or display the echo status.

 Format:     ECHO [ON | OFF | message ]

             message :  Text to display.

 See also:  ECHOS, SCREEN, SCRPUT, SETDOS and TEXT.

 Usage:

 Take Command has a separate echo capability for batch files and for the
 command line.  The command-line ECHO state is independent of the batch file
 ECHO state; changing ECHO in a batch file has no effect on the display at the
 command prompt, and vice versa.

 To see the current echo state, use the ECHO command with no arguments. This
 displays either the batch file or command-line echo state, depending on where
 the ECHO command is performed.

 In a batch file, if you turn ECHO on, each line of the file is displayed
 before it is executed.  If you turn ECHO off, each line is executed without
 being displayed.  ECHO can also be used in a batch file to display a message
 on the screen.  Regardless of the ECHO state, a batch file line that begins
 with the [@] character will not be displayed.  To turn off batch file echoing,
 without displaying the ECHO command, use this line:

          @echo off

 ECHO commands in a batch file will send messages to the screen while the batch
 file executes, even if ECHO is set OFF.  For example, this line will display a
 message in a batch file:

          echo Processing your print files...

 If you want to echo a blank line from within a batch file, enter:

          echo.

 You cannot use the command separator character [&], or the redirection symbols
 [| > <] in an ECHO message, unless you enclose them in quotes (see Argument
 Quoting) or precede them with the escape character .

 ECHO defaults to ON in batch files.  The current ECHO state is inherited by
 called batch files.  You can change the default setting to ECHO OFF with the
 SETDOS /V0 command or the BatchEcho directive in the .INI file.

 If you turn the command-line ECHO on, each command will be displayed before it
 is executed.  This will let you see the command line after expansion of all
 aliases and variables.  The command- line ECHO is most useful when you are
 learning how to use advanced features.  This example will turn command-line
 echoing on:

          [c:\] echo on

 ECHO defaults to OFF at the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.27. ECHOS - Display a message with no CR/LF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a message without a trailing carriage return and line
             feed.

 Format:     ECHOS message

 See also:  ECHO, SCREEN, SCRPUT, TEXT, and VSCRPUT.

 Usage:

 ECHOS is useful for text output when you don't want to add a carriage return /
 linefeed pair at the end of the line.  For example, you can use ECHOS when you
 need to redirect control sequences to your printer; this example sends the
 sequence Esc P to the printer on LPT1:

          [c:\] echos ^eP > lpt1:

 You cannot use the command separator character [&] or the redirection symbols
 [| > <] in an ECHOS message, unless you enclose them in quotes (see Argument
 Quoting) or precede them with the escape character .

 ECHOS does not translate or modify the message text.  For example, carriage
 return characters are not translated to CR/LF pairs. ECHOS sends only the
 characters you enter (after escape character and back quote processing).  The
 only character you cannot put into an ECHOS message is the NUL character
 (ASCII 0).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.28. ENDLOCAL - Restore saved environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Restore the saved disk drive, directory, environment, and alias
             list.

 Format:     ENDLOCAL

 See also:  SETLOCAL.

 Usage:

 The SETLOCAL command in a batch file saves the current disk drive, default
 directory, all environment variables, and the alias list. ENDLOCAL restores
 everything that was saved by the previous SETLOCAL command.

 SETLOCAL and ENDLOCAL can only be used in batch files, not in aliases or from
 the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.29. ESET - Edit variable or alias ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Edit environment variables and aliases.

 Format:     ESET [/A] variable name...

             variable name :  The name of an environment variable or alias to
             edit.

             /A(lias)

 See also:  ALIAS, UNALIAS, SET, and UNSET.

 Usage:

 ESET allows you to edit environment variables and aliases using line editing
 commands (see Command-Line Editing).

 For example, to edit the executable file search path:

          [c:\] eset path

 To create and then edit an alias:

          [c:\] alias d = dir /d/j/p
          [c:\] eset d

 ESET will search for environment variables first and then aliases. If you have
 an environment variable and an alias with the same name, ESET will edit the
 environment variable and ignore the alias unless you use the /A option.

 Environment variable and alias names are normally limited to 80 characters,
 and their contents to 1,023 characters.  However, if you use special
 techniques to create a longer environment variable, ESET will edit it provided
 the variable contains no more than 2,047 characters of text.

 If you have enabled global aliases (see ALIAS), any changes made to an alias
 with ESET will immediately affect all other copies of Take Command which are
 using the same alias list.

 Option:

    /A      (Alias) Edit the named alias even if an environment variable of the
            same name exists.  If you have an alias and an environment variable
            with the same name, you must use this switch to be able to edit the
            alias.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.30. EXCEPT - Exclude files from command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Perform a command on all available files except those specified.

 Format:     EXCEPT (file ) command

             file :  The file or files to exclude from the command.
             command :  The command to execute, including all appropriate
             arguments and switches.

 See also:  ATTRIB.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.
 Date, time, or size ranges must appear immediately after the EXCEPT keyword.

 Usage:

 EXCEPT provides a means of executing a command on a group of files and/or
 subdirectories, and excluding a subgroup from the operation. The command can
 be an internal command or alias, an external command, or a batch file.

 You may use wildcards to specify the files to exclude from the command.  The
 first example erases all the files in the current directory except those
 beginning with MEMO, and those whose extension is .WKS.  The second example
 copies all the files and subdirectories on drive C to drive D except those in
 C:\MSC and C:\DOS, using the COPY command:

          [c:\] except (memo*.* *.wks) erase *.*
          [c:\] except (c:\msc c:\dos) copy c:\*.* d:\ /s

 Date, time, and size ranges can be used immediately after the word EXCEPT to
 further qualify which files should be excluded from the command.  If the
 command is an internal command that supports ranges, an independent range can
 also be used in the command itself.

 EXCEPT prevents operations on the specified file(s) by setting the hidden
 attribute, performing the command, and then clearing the hidden attribute.  If
 the command is aborted in an unusual way, you may need to use the ATTRIB
 command to remove the hidden attribute from the file(s).

 Caution:  EXCEPT will not work with programs or commands that ignore the
 hidden attribute or which work explicitly with hidden files, including DEL /Z,
 and the /H (process hidden files) switch available in some Take Command file
 processing commands.

 You can use command grouping to execute multiple commands with a single
 EXCEPT.  For example, the following command copies all files in the current
 directory whose extensions begin with .DA, except the .DAT files, to the
 D:\SAVE directory, then changes the first two characters of the extension of
 the copied files to .SA:

          [c:\data] except (*.dat) (copy *.da* d:\save & ren *.da* *.sa*)

 If you use filename completion (see Filename Completion) to enter the
 filenames inside the parentheses, type a space after the open parenthesis
 before entering a partial filename or pressing Tab.  Otherwise, the
 command-line editor will treat the open parenthesis as the first character of
 the filename to be completed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.31. EXIT - Exit Take Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Return from Take Command.

 Format:     EXIT [value ]

             value :  The exit code to return (0 - 255).

 Usage:

 EXIT terminates the current copy of Take Command.

 To close the session, or to return to the application that started Take
 Command, type:

          [c:\] exit

 If you specify a value, EXIT will return that value to the program that
 started Take Command.  For example:

          [c:\] exit 255

 The value is a number you can use to inform the program of some result, such
 as the success or failure of a batch file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.32. FFIND - Search for files or text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Search for files by name or contents.

 Format:     FFIND [/A:[[-]rhsda] /B /C /D[list] /E /K /L /M
             /O[[:][-]acdeginrsu] /P /S /T"xx" /V /X["xx xx ..."] file...

             list :  A list of disk drive letters (without colons).
             file :  The file, directory, or list of files or directories to
             display.

             /A(ttribute select)             /M (no footers)
             /B(are)                         /O(rder)
             /C(ase sensitive)               /P(ause)
             /D(rive)                        /S(ubdirectories)
             /E (upper case display)         /T(ext search string)
             /K (no headers)                 /V(erbose)
             /L(ine numbers)                 /X (hex display/search string)

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 FFIND is a flexible search command that looks for files based on their names
 and their contents. Depending on the options you choose, FFIND can display
 filenames, matching text, or a combination of both in a variety of formats.

 If you want to search for files by name, FFIND works much like the DIR
 command.  For example, to generate a list of all the .BTM files in the current
 directory, you could use the command

          [c:\] ffind *.btm

 The output from this command is a list of full pathnames, followed by the
 number of files found.

 If you want to limit the output to a list of *.BTM files which contain the
 string color, you could use this command instead:

          [c:\] ffind /t"color" *.btm

 The output from this version of FFIND is a list of files that contain the
 string color along with the first line in each file that contains that string.
 By default, FFIND uses a case-insensitive search, so the command above will
 include files that contain COLOR, Color, color, or any other combination of
 upper-case and lower-case letters.

 You can use Take Command's extended wildcards in the search string to increase
 the flexibility of FFIND's search.  For example, the following command will
 find .TXT files which contain either the string June or July.  It will also
 find Juny and Jule.  The /C option makes the search case-sensitive:

          [c:\] ffind /c/t"Ju[nl][ey]" *.txt

 At times, you may need to search for data that cannot be represented by ASCII
 characters.  You can use FFIND's /X option to represent the search string in
 hexadecimal format.  With the /X option, the search must be represented by
 pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by spaces (41 63 65 is the hex code for
 "Ace"):

          [c:\] ffind /b"41 63 65" *.txt

 You can use FFIND's other options to further specify the files for which you
 are searching and to modify the way in which the output is displayed.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select) Select only those files that have the specified
            attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with a hyphen
            [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.  The
            colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., FFIND /A: ...), FFIND
            will select all files and subdirectories including hidden and
            system files.  If attributes are combined, all the specified
            attributes must match for a file to be selected. For example,
            /A:RHS will select only those files with all three attributes set.

    /B      (Bare) Display file names only and omit the text that matches the
            search.  This option is only useful in combination with /T or /X,
            which normally force FFIND to display file names and matching text.

    /C      (Case sensitive) Perform a case-sensitive search.  This option is
            only valid with /T, which defaults to a case-insensitive search.
            It is not needed with a /X hexadecimal search, which is always
            case-sensitive.

    /D      (Drive)  Search all files on one or more drives.  If you use /D
            without a list of drives, FFIND will search the drives specified in
            the list of files.  If no drive letters are listed, FFIND will
            search the default drive.  You can include a list of drives or a
            range of drives to search as part of the /D option.  For example,
            to search drives C:, D:, E:, and G:, you can use either of these
            commands:

                                [c:\] ffind /dcdeg ...
                                [c:\] ffind /dc-eg ...

    /E      Display filenames in the traditional upper case; also see SETDOS /U
            and the UpperCase directive in TCMDOS2.INI.

    /K      (No headers) Suppress the display of the header or filename for
            each matching text line.

    /L      (Line numbers) Include the line number for each text line
            displayed.

    /M      (No footers) Suppress the footer (the number of files and number of
            matches) at the end of FFIND's display.

    /O      (Order) Set the sorting order.  You may use any combination of the
            following sorting options; if multiple options are used, the
            listing will be sorted with the first sort option as the primary
            key, the next as the secondary key, and so on:

                         -  Reverse the sort order for the next option
                         a  Sort in ASCII order, not numerically, when there
                         are digits in the name
                         d  Sort by date and time (oldest first); for HPFS
                         drives also see /T
                         e  Sort by extension
                         g  Group subdirectories first, then files
                         i  Sort by file description (ignored if /C or /O:c is
                         used)
                         n  Sort by filename (this is the default)
                         r  Reverse the sort order for all options
                         s  Sort by size
                         u  Unsorted

    /P      (Pause) Wait for a key to be pressed after each screen page before
            continuing the display.  Your options at the prompt are explained
            in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /S      (Subdirectories) Display matches from the current directory and all
            of its subdirectories.

    /T      (Text search) Specify the text search string.  /T must be followed
            by a text string in double quotes (e.g., /t"color").  FFIND will
            perform a case-insensitive search unless you also use the /C
            option.  For a hexadecimal search and/or hexadecimal display of the
            location where the search string is found, see /X.  You can specify
            a search string with either /T or /X, but not both.

    /V      (Verbose) Show every matching line.  FFIND's default behavior is to
            show only the first matching line then and then go on to the next
            file.  This option is only valid with /T or /X.

    /X      (Hexadecimal display / search) Specify hexadecimal display and an
            optional hexadecimal search string.

            If /X is followed by one or more pairs of hexadecimal digits in
            quotes (e.g., /x"44 63 65"), FFIND will search for that exact
            sequence of characters or data bytes without regard to the meaning
            of those bytes as text.  If those bytes are found, the offset is
            displayed (also in hexadecimal).  A search of this type will always
            be case-sensitive.

            If /X is not followed by a hexadecimal search string it must be
            used in conjunction with /T, and will change the output format to
            display hexadecimal offsets rather than actual text lines when the
            search string is found.  For example, this command uses /T to
            display the first line in each BTM file containing the word hello:

                                [c:\] ffind /t"hello" *.btm
                                ---- c:\test.btm:
                                echo hello

                                1 line in 1 file

            If you use the same command with /X, the hexadecimal offset is
            displayed instead of the text:

                                [c:\] ffind /t"hello" /x *.btm
                                ---- c:\test.btm:
                                Offset: 1A

                                1 line in 1 file

            You can specify a search string with either /T or /X, but not both.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.33. FOR - Repeat a command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Repeat a command for several values of a variable.

 Format:     FOR [/A:[[-]rhsda] /H] %var IN ([@]set ) [DO] command ...

             %var :  The variable to be used in the command ("FOR variable").
             set :  A set of values for the variable.
             command :  A command or group of commands to be executed for each
             value of the variable.

             /A(ttribute select)
             /H(ide dots)

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.
 Date, time, or size ranges must appear immediately after the FOR keyword.

 Usage:

 FOR begins by creating a set.  It then executes a command for every member of
 the set.  The command can be an internal command, an alias, an external
 command, or a batch file.

 Normally, the set is a list of files specified with wildcards.  For example,
 if you use this line in a batch file:

          for %x in (*.txt) do list %x

 then LIST will be executed once for each file in the current directory with
 the extension .TXT.  The FOR variable %x is set equal to each of the file
 names in turn, then the LIST command is executed for each file. (You could do
 the same thing more easily with a simple LIST *.TXT.  We used FOR here so you
 could get a feel for how it operates, using a simple example.)

 The set can include multiple files or an include list, like this:

          for %x in (d:\*.txt;*.doc;*.asc) do type %x

 If the set includes filenames, the file list can be further refined by using
 date, time, and size ranges.  The range must be placed immediately after the
 word FOR.  The range will be ignored if no wildcards are used inside the
 parentheses.  For example, this set is made up of all of the *.TXT files that
 were created or updated on October 4, 1994:

          for /[d10-4-94,+0] %x in (*.txt) do ...

 If the command is an internal command that supports ranges, an independent
 range can also be used in the command itself.

 The set can also be made up of text instead of file names.  For example, to
 display the free space on drives C:, D:, and E:, you could use:

          for %drive in (c d e) do free %drive:

 When the set is made up of text or several separate file names (not an include
 list), the elements must be separated by spaces, tabs, commas, or the switch
 character (normally a slash [/]).

 You can also set the FOR variable equal to each line in a file by placing an
 [@] in front of the file name.  If you have a file called DRIVES.TXT that
 contains a list of drives on your computer, one drive name per line (with a
 ":" after each drive letter), you can print the free space on each drive this
 way:

          for %d in (@drives.txt) do free %d > prn

 Because the [@] is also a valid filename character, FOR first checks to see if
 the file exists with the [@] in its name (i.e., a file named @DRIVES.TXT ).
 If so, the filename is treated as a normal argument.  If it doesn't exist, FOR
 uses the filename (without the [@]) as the file from which to retrieve text.

 You can use either % or %% in front of the variable name. Either form will
 work, whether the FOR command is typed from the command line or is part of an
 alias or batch file (some of the traditional command processors require a
 single % if FOR is used at the command line, but use %% if it is used in a
 batch file).  The variable name can be up to 80 characters long.  The word DO
 is optional.

 If you use a single-character FOR variable name, that name is given priority
 over any environment variable which starts with the same letter, in order to
 maintain compatibility with the traditional FOR command.  For example, the
 following command tries to add a: and b: to the end of the PATH, but will not
 work as intended:

          [c:\] for %p in (a: b:) do path %path;%p

 The "%p" in "%path" will be interpreted as the FOR variable %p followed by the
 text "ath", which is not what was intended.  To get around this, use a
 different letter or a longer name for the FOR variable, or use square brackets
 around the variable name (see Environment).

 The following example uses FOR with variable functions to delete the .BAK
 files for which a corresponding .TXT file exists in the current directory:

          [c:\docs] for %file in (*.txt) do del %@name[%file].bak

 You can use command grouping to execute multiple commands for each element in
 the list.  For example, the following command copies each .WKQ file in the
 current directory to the D:\WKSAVE directory, then changes the extension of
 each file in the current directory to .SAV.  This should be entered on one
 line:

          [c:\text] for %file in (*.wkq) do (copy %file d:\wksave\ & ren %file
  *.sav)

 In a batch file you can use GOSUB to execute a subroutine for every element in
 the set.  Within the subroutine, the FOR variable can be used just like any
 environment variable.  This is a convenient way to execute a complex sequence
 of commands for every element in the set without CALLing another batch file.

 One unusual use of FOR is to execute a collection of batch files or other
 commands with the same parameter.  For example, you might want to have three
 batch files all operate on the same data file. The FOR command could look like
 this:

          [c:\] for %cmd in (filetest fileform fileprnt) do %cmd datafile

 This line will expand to three separate commands:

          filetest datafile
          fileform datafile
          fileprnt datafile

 The variable that FOR uses (the %CMD in the example above) is created in the
 environment and then erased when the FOR command is done. However, for
 compatibility with CMD.EXE, single-character FOR variables do not overwrite
 existing environment variables with the same name.  As a result, when using a
 multi-character variable name you must be careful not to use the name of one
 of your environment variables as a FOR variable.  For example, a command that
 begins

          [c:\] for %path in ...

 will write over your current path setting and then erase the path variable
 completely.

 FOR statements can be nested.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select) Select only those files that have the specified
            attribute(s) set.  /A will be used only when processing wildcard
            file names in the set.  It will be ignored for filenames without
            wildcards or other items in the set.  Preceding the attribute
            character with a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that
            attribute set.  The colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes
            are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed (e.g., FOR /A: ...), FOR will process
            all files including hidden and system files.  If attributes are
            combined, all the specified attributes must match for a file to be
            included.  For example, /A:RHS will include only those files with
            all three attributes set.

            For example, to process only those files with the archive attribute
            set:

                                for /a:a %f in (*.*) echo %f needs a backup!

    /H      (Hide dots) Suppress the assignment of the "." and ".." directories
            to "var".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.34. FREE - Display total and free disk space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display the total disk space, total bytes used, and total bytes
             free on the specified (or default) drive(s).

 Format:     FREE [drive: ... ]

             drive :  One or more drives to include in the report.

 See also:  MEMORY.

 Usage:

 FREE provides the same disk information as the external command CHKDSK, but
 without the wait, since it does not check the integrity of the file and
 directory structure of the disk.

 A colon [:] is required after each drive letter. This example displays the
 status of drives A and C:

          [c:\] free a: c:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.35. GLOBAL - Execute command in all subdirectories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Execute a command in the current directory and its subdirectories.

 Format:     GLOBAL [/H /I /P /Q] command

             command :  The command to execute, including arguments and
             switches.

             /H(idden directories)
             /P(rompt)
             /I(gnore exit codes)
             /Q(uiet)

 Usage:

 GLOBAL performs the command first in the current directory and then in every
 subdirectory under the current directory.  The command can be an internal
 command, an alias, an external command, or a batch file.

 This example copies the files in every directory on drive A to the directory
 C:\TEMP:

          [a:\] global copy *.* c:\temp

 If you use the /P option, GLOBAL will prompt for each subdirectory before
 performing the command.  You can use this option if you want to perform the
 command in most, but not all subdirectories of the current directory.

 You can use command grouping to execute multiple commands in each
 subdirectory.  For example, the following command copies each .TXT file in the
 current directory and all of its subdirectories to drive A.  It then changes
 the extension of each of the copied files to .SAV:

          [c:\] global (copy *.txt a: & ren *.txt *.sav)

 Options:

    /H      (Hidden directories) Forces GLOBAL to look for hidden directories.
            If you don't use this switch, hidden directories are ignored.

    /I      (Ignore exit codes) If this option is not specified, GLOBAL will
            terminate if the command returns a non- zero exit code.  Use /I if
            you want command to continue in additional subdirectories even if
            it returns an error in a previous subdirectory.  Even if you use
            /I, GLOBAL will halt execution in response to Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break.

    /P      (Prompt) Forces GLOBAL to prompt with each directory name before it
            performs the command.  Your options at the prompt are explained in
            detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /Q      (Quiet) Do not display the directory names as each directory is
            processed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.36. GOSUB - Call subroutine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Execute a subroutine in the current batch file.

 Format:     GOSUB label

             label :  The batch file label at the beginning of the subroutine.

 See also:  CALL, GOTO and RETURN.

 Usage:

 GOSUB can only be used in batch files.

 Take Command allows subroutines in batch files.  A subroutine must start with
 a label (a colon [:] followed by a one-word label name) which appears on a
 line by itself.  Case differences are ignored when matching labels.  The
 subroutine must end with a RETURN statement.

 The subroutine is invoked with a GOSUB command from another part of the batch
 file.  After the RETURN, processing will continue with the command following
 the GOSUB command.  For example, the following batch file fragment calls a
 subroutine which displays the directory and returns:

          echo Calling a subroutine
          gosub subr1
          echo Returned from the subroutine
          quit
          :subr1
          dir /a/w
          return

 GOSUB begins its search for the label on the next line of the batch file
 (after the GOSUB command).  If the label is not found between the current
 position and the end of the file, GOSUB will restart the search at the
 beginning of the file.  If the label still is not found, the batch file is
 terminated with the error message "Label not found."

 GOSUB saves the IFF state, so IFF statements inside a subroutine won't
 interfere with IFF statements in the part of the batch file from which the
 subroutine was called.

 Subroutines can be nested.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.37. GOTO - Branch within batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Branch to a specified line inside the current batch file.

 Format:     GOTO [/I] label

             label :  The batch file label to branch to.

             /I(FF and DO continue)

 See also:  GOSUB.

 Usage:

 GOTO can only be used in batch files.

 After a GOTO command in a batch file, the next line to be executed will be the
 one immediately after the label.  The label must begin with a colon [:] and
 appear on a line by itself. The colon is required on the line where the label
 is defined, but is not required in the GOTO command itself.  Case differences
 are ignored when matching labels.

 This batch file fragment checks for the existence of the file CONFIG.SYS.  If
 the file exists, the batch file jumps to C_EXISTS and copies all the files
 from the current directory to the root directory on A:.  Otherwise, it prints
 an error message and exits.

          if exist config.os2 goto C_EXISTS
          echo CONFIG.SYS doesn't exist - exiting.
          quit
          :C_EXISTS
          copy *.* a:\

 GOTO begins its search for the label on the next line of the batch file (after
 the GOTO command).  If the label is not found between the current position and
 the end of the file, GOTO will restart the search at the beginning of the
 file.  If the label still is not found, the batch file is terminated with the
 error message "Label not found."

 To avoid errors in the processing of nested statements and loops, GOTO cancels
 all active IFF statements and DO / ENDDO loops unless you use /I.  This means
 that a normal GOTO (without /I) may not branch to any label that is between an
 IFF and the corresponding ENDIFF or between a DO and the corresponding ENDDO.

 Options:

    /I      (IFF and DO continue) Prevents GOTO from canceling IFF statements
            and DO loops.  Use this option only if you are absolutely certain
            that your GOTO command is branching entirely within any current IFF
            statement and any active DO / ENDDO block.  Using /I under any
            other conditions will cause an error later in your batch file.

            You cannot branch into another IFF statement, another DO loop, or a
            different IFF or DO nesting level, whether you use the /I option or
            not.  If you do, you will eventually receive an "unknown command"
            error (or execution of the UNKNOWN_CMD alias) on a subsequent
            ENDDO, ELSE, ELSEIFF, or ENDIFF statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.38. HELP - Call online help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display help for internal commands, and optionally for external
             commands.

 Format:     HELP [topic ]

             topic :  A help topic or internal command.

 Usage:

 Online help is available for Take Command.  The Take Command help system uses
 the OS/2 help facility.

 If you type the command HELP by itself (or press F1 when the command line is
 empty), the table of contents is displayed.  If you type HELP plus a topic
 name, that topic is displayed.  For example,

          help copy

 displays information about the COPY command and its options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.39. HISTORY - Manage command history list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display, add to, clear, or read the history list.

 Format:     HISTORY [/A command /F /P /R filename ]

             /A(dd)
             /P(ause)
             /F(ree)
             /R(ead)

 See also:  LOG.

 Usage:

 Take Command keeps a list of the commands you have entered on the command
 line.  See Command History and Recall for additional details.

 The HISTORY command lets you view and manipulate the command history list
 directly.  If no parameters are entered, HISTORY will display the current
 command history list:

          [c:\] history

 With the options explained below, you can clear the list, add new commands to
 the list without executing them, save the list in a file, or read a new list
 from a file.

 The number of commands saved in the history list depends on the length of each
 command line.  The history list size can be specified at startup from 256 to
 32767 characters (see the History directive).  The default size is 1024
 characters.

 Your history list can be stored either locally (a separate history list for
 each copy of Take Command) or globally (all copies of Take Command share the
 same list).  For full details see the discussion of local and global history
 lists under Command History and Recall.

 You can use the HISTORY command as an aid in writing batch files by
 redirecting the HISTORY output to a file and then editing the file
 appropriately.  However, it is easier to use the LOG /H command for this
 purpose.

 You can disable the history list or specify a minimum command-line length to
 save with the HistMin directive in the .INI file.

 Options:

    /A      (Add) Add a command to the history list.  This performs the same
            function as the Ctrl-K key at the command line (see Command History
            and Recall ).

    /F      (Free) Erase all entries in the command history list.

    /P      (Prompt) Wait for a key after displaying each page of the list.
            Your options at the prompt are explained in detail under Page and
            File Prompts.

    /R      (Read) Read the command history from the specified file and append
            it to the history list currently held in memory.  Each line in the
            file must fit within the command-line length limit).

            You can save the history list by redirecting the output of HISTORY
            to a file.  This example saves the command history to a file called
            HISTFILE and reads it back again immediately.  If you leave out the
            HISTORY /F command on the second line, the contents of the file
            will be appended to the current history list instead of replacing
            it:

                                [c:\] history > histfile
                                [c:\] history /f
                                [c:\] history /r histfile

            If you need to save your history at the end of each day's work, you
            might use commands like this in your TCSTART or other startup
            files:

                                if exist c:\histfile history /r c:\histfile
                                alias shut*down `history > c:\histfile`

            This restores the previous history list if it exists, then defines
            an alias which will save the history before shutting off the
            system.

            If you are creating a HISTORY /R file by hand, and need to create
            an entry that spans multiple lines in the file, you can do so by
            terminating each line, except the last, with an escape character.
            However, you cannot use this method to exceed the command-line
            length limit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.40. IF - Test condition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Execute a command if a condition or set of conditions is true.

 Format:     IF [NOT] condition [.AND. | .OR. | .XOR. [NOT] condition ...]
             command

             condition :  A test to determine if the command should be
             executed.
             command :  The command to execute if the condition is true.

 See also:  IFF.

 Usage:

 IF is normally used only in aliases and batch files.  It is always followed by
 one or more conditions and then a command. First, the conditions are
 evaluated.  If they are true, the command is executed. Otherwise, the command
 is ignored. If you add a NOT before a condition, the command is executed only
 when the  condition is false.

 You can link conditions with .AND., .OR., or .XOR., and you can nest IF
 statements.  The conditions can test strings, numbers, the existence of a file
 or subdirectory, the exit code returned by the preceding external command, and
 the existence of alias names and internal commands.

 The command can be an alias, an internal command, an external command, or a
 batch file.  The entire IF statement, including all conditions and the
 command, must fit on one line.

 You can use command grouping to execute multiple commands if the condition is
 true. For example, the following command tests if any .TXT files exist.  If
 they do, they are copied to drive A: and their extensions are changed to .TXO:

          if exist *.txt (copy *.txt a: & ren *.txt *.txo)

 (Note that the IFF command provides a more structured method of executing
 multiple commands if a condition or set of conditions is true.)

 Conditions

 The following conditional tests are available in both the IF and IFF commands.
 They fit into two categories:  string and numeric tests, and status tests.
 The tests can use environment variables, internal variables and variable
 functions, file names, literal text, and numeric values as their arguments.

 Spaces are required on either side of the test condition in all cases, except
 == which will work with or without spaces around it.

 String and Numeric Tests

 Six test conditions can be used to test character strings. The same conditions
 are available for both numeric and normal text strings (see below for
 details).  In each case you enter the test as:

          string1 operator string2

 The operator defines the type of test (equal, greater than or equal, and so
 on).  The operators are:

        EQ or ==        string1 equal to string2
        NE or !=        string1 not equal to string2
        LT              string1 less than string2
        LE              string1 less than or equal to string2
        GE              string1 greater than or equal to string2
        GT              string1 greater than string2

 Status Tests

 These conditions test the system or command processor status. You can use
 internal variables and variable functions to test many other parts of the
 system status.

        ERRORLEVEL [operator] n
            This test retrieves the exit code of the preceding external
            program.  By convention, programs return an exit code of 0 when
            they are successful and a number between 1 and 255 to indicate an
            error.  The condition can be any of the operators listed above (EQ,
            !=, GT, etc.).  If no operator is specified, the default is GE.
            The comparison is done numerically.

            Not all programs return an explicit exit code.  For programs which
            do not, the behavior of ERRORLEVEL is undefined.

        EXIST filename
            If the file exists, the condition is true. You can use wildcards in
            the filename, in which case the condition is true if any file
            matching the wildcard name exists.

        ISALIAS aliasname
            If the name is defined as an alias, the condition is true.

        ISDIR path
            If the subdirectory exists, the condition is true.

        ISINTERNAL command
            If the specified command is an active internal command, the
            condition is true.  Commands can be activated and deactivated with
            the SETDOS /I command.

        ISLABEL label
            If the specified batch file label exists, the condition is true.

        ISWINDOW "title"
            If the window with the title exists, the condition is true.  Double
            quotes must be used around the title.  If you need to check whether
            a window exists and you only know part of the title, use wildcards
            to specify the window title.  For example, to test for a window
            whose title begins with "Take Command", use a command like this:

                                  if iswindow "Take Command*" ...


 Combining Tests

 You can negate the result of any test with NOT, and combine tests of any type
 with .AND., .OR., and .XOR.  Test conditions are always scanned from left to
 right -- there is no implied order of precedence, as there is in some
 programming languages.

 When two tests are combined with .AND., the result is true if both individual
 tests are true.  When two tests are combined with .OR., the result is true if
 either (or both) individual tests are true.  When two tests are combined with
 .XOR., the result is true only if one of the tests is true and the other is
 false.

 Using the IF Tests

 When IF compares two character strings, it will use either a numeric
 comparison or a string comparison.  A numeric comparison treats the strings as
 numeric values and tests them arithmetically.  A string comparison treats the
 strings as text.

 The difference between numeric and string comparisons is best explained by
 looking at the way two values are tested.  For example, consider comparing the
 values 2 and 19.  Numerically, 2 is smaller, but as a string it is "larger"
 because its first digit is larger than the first digit of 19.  So the first of
 these condition s will be true, and the second will be false:

          if 2 lt 19 ...
          if "2" lt "19" ...

 IF determines which kind of test to do by examining the first character of
 each string.  If both strings begin with a numeric character (a digit, sign,
 or decimal point), a numeric comparison is used.  If either value does not
 begin with a numeric character, a string comparison is used.  To force a
 string comparison when both values are or may be numeric, use double quotes
 around the values you are testing, as shown above.  Because the double quote
 is not a numeric character, it forces IF to do a string comparison.

 Case differences are ignored in string comparisons.  If two strings begin with
 the same text but one is shorter, the shorter string is considered to be "less
 than" the longer one.  For example, "a" is less than "abc", and "hello_there"
 is greater than "hello".

 When you compare text strings, you should always enclose the arguments in
 double quotes in order to avoid syntax errors which may occur if one of the
 argument values is empty.

 Numeric comparisons work with both integer and decimal values.  The values to
 be compared must contain only numeric digits, decimal points, and an optional
 sign ( or+-).  Decimal numbers are limited to a maximum of 16 digits to the
 left of the decimal point and 8 digits to the right.

 Internal variables and variable functions are very powerful when combined with
 string and numeric comparisons.  They allow you to test the state of your
 system, the characteristics of a file, date and time information, or the
 result of a calculation.  You may want to review the variables and variable
 functions when determining the best way to set up an IF test.

 This batch file fragment tests for a string value:

          input "Enter your selection : " %%cmd
          if "%cmd" == "WP" goto wordproc
          if "%cmd" NE "GRAPHICS" goto badentry

 This example calls GO.BTM if the first two characters in the file MYFILE are
 "GO" (enter this example on one line):

          if "%@instr[0,2,%@line[myfile,0]]"=="GO" call go.btm

 This batch file fragment tests for the existence of A:\JAN.DOC before copying
 it to drive C.

          if exist a:\jan.doc copy a:\jan.doc c:\

 This example tests the exit code of the previous program and stops all batch
 file processing if an error occurred:

          if errorlevel==0 goto success
          echo "External Error -- Batch File Ends!"
          cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.41. IFF - IFF / THEN / ELSE conditional test ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Perform IF / THEN / ELSE conditional execution of commands.

 Format:     IFF [NOT] condition [.AND. | .OR. | .XOR. [NOT] condition ...]
             THEN & commands
             [ELSEIFF condition THEN & commands ] ...
             [ELSE & commands ]
             & ENDIFF

             condition :  A test to determine if the command(s) should be
             executed.
             commands :  One or more commands to execute if the condition(s) is
             true.  If you use multiple commands, they must be separated by
             command separators or be placed on separate lines of a batch file.

 See also:  IF.

 Usage:

 IFF is similar to the IF command, except that it can perform one set of
 commands when a condition or set of conditions is true and different commands
 when the conditions are false.

 IFF can execute multiple commands when the conditions are true or false; IF
 normally executes only one command.  IFF imposes no limit on the number of
 commands and is generally a "cleaner" and more structured command than IF.

 IFF is always followed by one or more conditions.  If they are true, the
 commands that follow the word THEN are executed. Additional conditions can be
 tested with ELSEIFF.  If none of these conditions are true, the commands that
 follow the word ELSE are executed.  In both cases, after the selected commands
 are executed, processing continues after the word ENDIFF.

 If you add a NOT before the condition, the THEN commands are executed only
 when the condition is false and the ELSE commands are executed only when the
 condition is true.

 The commands may be separated by command separators, or may be on separate
 lines of a batch file.  You should include a command separator or a line break
 after a THEN, before an ELSEIFF, and before and after an ELSE.

 You can link conditions with .AND., .OR., or .XOR., and you can nest IFF
 statements up to 15 levels deep.  The conditions can test strings or numbers,
 the existence of a file or subdirectory, the errorlevel returned from the
 preceding external command, and the existence of alias names and internal
 commands.

 See the IF command for a list of the possible conditions.

 The commands can include any internal command, alias, external command, or
 batch file.

 The alias in this example checks to see if the argument is a subdirectory.  If
 so, the alias deletes the subdirectory's files and removes it (enter this on
 one line):

          [c:\] alias prune `iff isdir %1 then & del /sxz %1 & else & echo Not a
  directory! & endiff`

 Be sure to read the cautionary notes about GOTO and IFF under the GOTO command
 before using a GOTO inside an IFF statement.

 If you want to use a pipe to send information from a previous command to a
 command inside an IFF, use command grouping around the IFF command. For
 example:

          type myfile.txt | (iff %_batch ne 0 then & list /s & endiff)

 If you do not use command grouping, piping will work only to the first command
 after the IFF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.42. INKEY - Input a character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Get a single keystroke from the user and store it in an
             environment variable.

 Format:     INKEY [/C /D /K"keys" /P /Wn /X] [prompt ] %%varname

             prompt :  Optional text that is displayed as a prompt.
             varname :  The variable that will hold the user's keystroke.

             /C(lear buffer)
             /D(igits only)
             /K(valid keystrokes)
             /P(assword)
             /W(ait)
             /X (no carriage return)

 See also:  INPUT.

 Usage:

 INKEY optionally displays a prompt.  Then it waits for a specified time or
 indefinitely for a keystroke, and places the keystroke into an environment
 variable.  It is normally used in batch files and aliases to get a menu choice
 or other single-key input.  Along with the INPUT command, INKEY allows great
 flexibility in reading input from within a batch file or alias.

 If prompt text is included in an INKEY command, it is displayed while INKEY
 waits for input.

 The following batch file fragment prompts for a character and stores it in the
 variable NUM:

          inkey Enter a number from 1 to 9:  %%num

 INKEY reads standard input for the keystroke, so it will accept keystrokes
 from a redirected file. You can supply a list of valid keystrokes with the /K
 option.

 Standard keystrokes with ASCII values between 1 and 255 are stored directly in
 the environment variable.  Extended keystrokes (for example, function keys and
 cursor keys) are stored as a string in decimal format, with a leading @ (for
 example, the F1 key is @59). The Enter key is stored as an extended keystroke,
 with the code @28.  See the Key Code Tables for a list of extended key codes.

 If you press Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break while INKEY is waiting for a key, execution
 of an alias will be terminated, and execution of a batch file will be
 suspended while you are asked whether to cancel the batch job.  In a batch
 file you can handle Ctrl-C and Ctrl-Break yourself with the ON BREAK command.

 Options:

    /C      (Clear buffer) Clears the keyboard buffer before INKEY accepts
            keystrokes.  If you use this option, INKEY will ignore any
            keystrokes which you type, either accidentally or intentionally,
            before INKEY is ready to accept input.

    /D      (Digits only):  Prevents INKEY from accepting any keystroke except
            a digit from 0 to 9.

    /K["keys"]Specify the permissible keystrokes.  The list of valid keystrokes
            should be enclosed in double quotes.  For alphabetic keys the
            validity test is not case sensitive.  You can specify extended keys
            by enclosing their names in square brackets (within the quotes),
            for example:

                                inkey /k"ab[Alt-F10]" Enter A, B, Alt-F10 %%var

            See Keys and Key Names for a complete listing of the key names you
            can use within the square brackets, and a description of the key
            name format.

            If an invalid keystroke is entered, Take Command will echo the
            keystroke if possible, beep, move the cursor back one character,
            and wait for another keystroke.

    /P      (Password) Prevents INKEY from echoing the character.

    /W      (Wait) Time-out period, in seconds, to wait for a response. If no
            keystroke is entered by the end of the time-out period, INKEY
            returns with the variable unchanged. You can specify /W0 to return
            immediately if there are no keys waiting in the keyboard buffer.

            For example, the following batch file fragment waits up to 10
            seconds for a character, then tests to see if a "Y" was entered:

                                set net=N
                                inkey /K"YN" /w10 Load network (Y/N)?  %%net
                                iff "%net" == "Y" then
                                rem Commands to load the network go here
                                endiff

    /X      (No carriage return) Prevents INKEY from adding a carriage return
            and line feed after the user's entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.43. INPUT - Input a string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Get a string from the keyboard and save it in an environment
             variable.

 Format:     INPUT [/C /D /E /Ln /N /P /Wn /X] [prompt ] %%varname

             prompt :  Optional text that is displayed as a prompt.
             varname :  The variable that will hold the user's input.

             /C(lear buffer)                 /N(o colors)
             /D(igits only)                  /P(assword)
             /E(dit)                         /W(ait)
             /L(ength)                       /X (no carriage return)

 See also:  INKEY.

 Usage:

 INPUT optionally displays a prompt.  Then it waits for a specified time or
 indefinitely for your entry.  It places any characters you type into an
 environment variable.  INPUT is normally used in batch files and aliases to
 get multi-key input.  Along with the INKEY command, INPUT allows great
 flexibility in reading user input from within a batch file or alias.

 If prompt text is included in an INPUT command, it is displayed while INPUT
 waits for input.  Standard command-line editing keys may be used to edit the
 input string as it is entered.  If you use the /P password option, INPUT will
 echo asterisks instead of the keys you type.

 All characters entered up to, but not including, the carriage return are
 stored in the variable.

 The following batch file fragment prompts for a string and stores it in the
 variable FNAME:

          input Enter the file name:  %%fname

 INPUT reads standard input, so it will accept text from a re-directed file.

 If you press Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break while INPUT is waiting for input, execution
 of an alias will be terminated, and execution of a batch file will be
 suspended while you are asked whether to cancel the batch job.  In a batch
 file you can handle Ctrl-C and Ctrl-Break yourself with the ON BREAK command.

 Options:

    /C      (Clear buffer) Clears the keyboard buffer before INPUT accepts
            keystrokes.  If you use this option, INPUT will ignore any
            keystrokes which you type, either accidentally or intentionally,
            before INPUT is ready.

    /D      (Digits only): Prevents INPUT from accepting any keystrokes except
            digits from 0 to 9.

    /E      (Edit) Allows you to edit an existing value.  If there is no
            existing value for varname, INPUT proceeds as if /E had not been
            used, and allows you to enter a new value.

    /Ln     (Length) Sets the maximum number of characters which INPUT will
            accept to "n".  If you attempt to enter more than this number of
            characters, INPUT will beep and prevent further input (you will
            still be able to edit the characters typed before the limit was
            reached).

    /N      (No color) Disables the display colors set by InputColor in the
            TCMDOS2.INI file.  With this option, INPUT will use the default
            display colors instead.

    /P      (Password) Tells INPUT to echo asterisks, instead of the characters
            you type.

    /W      (Wait) Time-out period, in seconds, to wait for a response. If no
            keystroke is entered by the end of the time-out period, INPUT
            returns with the variable unchanged. If you enter a key before the
            time-out period, INPUT will wait indefinitely for the remainder of
            the line.  You can specify /W0 to return immediately if there are
            no keys waiting in the keyboard buffer.

    /X      (No carriage return) Prevents INPUT from adding a carriage return
            and line feed after the user's entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.44. KEYBD - Set keyboard toggles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Set the state of the keyboard toggles:  Caps Lock, Num Lock, and
             Scroll Lock.

 Format:     KEYBD [/Cn /Nn /Sn]

             n :  0 to turn off the toggle, or 1 to turn on the toggle.
             /C(aps lock)
             /S(croll lock)
             /N(um lock)

 Usage:

 Most keyboards have 3 toggle keys, the Caps Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock.
 The toggle key status is usually displayed by three lights at the top right
 corner of the keyboard.

 This command lets you turn any toggle key on or off.  It is most useful in
 batch files and aliases if you want the keys set a particular way before
 collecting input from the user.

 For example, to turn off the Num Lock and Caps Lock keys, you can use this
 command:

          [c:\] keybd /c0 /n0

 If you use the KEYBD command with no switches, it will display the present
 state of the toggle keys.

 Options:

    /C      (Caps lock) Turn the Caps Lock key on or off.

    /N      (Num lock) Turn the Num Lock key on or off.

    /S      (Scroll lock) Turn the Scroll Lock key on or off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.45. KEYS - Enable/disable history list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Enable, disable, or display the history list.

 Format:     KEYS [ON | OFF | LIST]

 See also:  HISTORY.

 Usage:

 This command is provided for compatibility with KEYS command in CMD.EXE, which
 controls the history list in OS/2. The same functions are available by setting
 the HistMin directive in the .INI file, and by using the HISTORY command.

 The history list collects the commands you type for later recall, editing, and
 viewing.  You can view the contents of the list through the history list
 window or by typing any of the following commands:

          [c:\] history
          [c:\] history /p
          [c:\] keys list

 The first command displays the entire history list.  The second displays the
 entire list and pauses at the end of each full screen. The third command
 produces the same output as the first, except that each line is numbered.

 You can disable the collection and storage of commands in the history list by
 typing:

          [c:\] keys off

 You can turn the history back on with the command:

          [c:\] keys on

 If you issue the KEYS command without any parameters, Take Command will show
 you the current status of the history list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.46. KEYSTACK - Feed keystrokes to programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Feed keystrokes to a program or command automatically.


 Format:     KEYSTACK [/Wn] ["abc"] [keyname] [!] ...

             "abc":  Literal characters to be placed in the Keystack.
             keyname:  Name for a key to be placed in the Keystack.
             !  Signal to clear the Keystack and the keyboard buffer.

             /W(ait)

 Usage:

 KEYSTACK takes a series of keystrokes and feeds them to a program or command
 as if they were typed at the keyboard.  When the program has used all of the
 keystrokes sent by KEYSTACK, it will begin to read the keyboard for input, as
 it normally would.

 Characters entered within double quotes ("abc") will be stored "as is" in the
 buffer.  The only items allowed outside double quotes are key names and the !
 and /W options.

 See Keys and key names for a complete listing of key names and a description
 of the key name format.

 An exclamation mark [!] will clear all pending keystrokes in the KEYSTACK
 buffer.

 For example, to start a word processor called Word and select the second item
 on the second menu n the menu bar, you could use the command:

          [d:\doc] keystack F10 Right Down "1" ^ word

 This places the keystrokes for F10 (change to the menu bar), right arrow (move
 to the File menu), down arrow (display the file menu), and "1" (open the most
 recently used file) into the buffer, then runs Word.  When Word starts it
 receives these keystrokes and performs the appropriate actions.

 You can store a maximum of 255 characters in the KEYSTACK buffer. Each time
 the KEYSTACK command is executed, it will clear any remaining keystrokes
 stored by a previous KEYSTACK command.

 KEYSTACK only works with OS/2 Presentation Manager applications.  Due to
 limitations in the way OS/2 passes characters to applications, KEYSTACK cannot
 reliably transmit keystrokes to DOS, OS/2 character-mode, or Windows programs.

 KEYSTACK will send the keystrokes to the current active window.  If you want
 to send keystrokes to another program (rather than have them function with
 Take Command itself), you must start the program or ACTIVATE its window so it
 can receive the keystrokes.  You can do this before or after executing the
 KEYSTACK command.  The most reliable sequence is usually to activate the
 program's window first, then place the keystrokes in the buffer; this helps
 ensure that another application does not receive the keystrokes inadvertently.
 (To do this in a batch file you must start the program with the START command
 .  If you start it directly -- without using START -- the batch file will wait
 for the application to complete before continuing and running the KEYSTACK
 command, and the keystrokes will be placed in the buffer too late.)

 You may need to experiment with your programs and insert delays (see the /W
 option) to find the window activation and keystroke sequence that works for a
 particular program.

 Options:

    /W      (Wait):  Delay the next keystroke in the KEYSTACK buffer by a
            specified number of clock "ticks".  A clock tick is approximately
            1/18 second.  The number of clock ticks to delay should be placed
            immediately after the W, and must be between 1 and 65535 ( 65535
            ticks is about 1 hour).  You can use the /W option as many times as
            desired and at any point in the string of keystrokes except within
            double quotes.  Some programs may need the delays provided by /W in
            order to receive keystrokes properly from KEYSTACK. The only way to
            determine what delay is needed is to experiment.  For example, to
            start the program CADX and send it an F7, a delay of one second,
            and a carriage return:

                                [c:\] keystack F7 /W18 Enter & cadx


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.47. LIST - Display file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a file, with forward and backward paging and scrolling.

 Format:     LIST [/A:[[-]rhsda] /H /S /W /X] file...

             file :  A file or list of files to display.

             /A:(ttribute select)        /W(rap)
             /H(igh bit off)             /X (heX display mode)
             /S(tandard input)

 See also:  TYPE.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 LIST provides a much faster and more flexible way to view a file than TYPE,
 without the overhead of loading and using a text editor.

 LIST is most often used for displaying ASCII text files.  Most other files
 contain non-alphabetic characters and may be unreadable, except in hex mode.

 For example, to display a file called MEMO.DOC :

          [c:\] list memo.doc

 If the file argument is a directory name, LIST will display all files in the
 directory.

 LIST uses the scroll bars or the cursor pad to scroll through the file. You
 can select the LIST commands either with the mouse (on the toolbar and
 scrollbars) or from the keyboard.  LIST recognizes the following keys and
 toolbar buttons (button names are shown in parentheses):

        Space               Display the next page of the file (same as PgDn).
        Home                Display the first page of the file.
        End                 Display the last page of the file.
        Esc (Cont)          Exit the current file.
        Ctrl-C (Quit)       Quit LIST.
                           Scroll up one line.
                           Scroll down one line.
                           Scroll left 8 columns.
                           Scroll right 8 columns.
        Ctrl               Scroll left 40 columns.
        Ctrl               Scroll right 40 columns.
        F1                  Display online help
        B (Back)            Go back one file to the previous file in the
                            current group of files.
        F (Find)            Prompt and search for a string.
        G (Goto)            Go to a specific line, or, in hex mode, to a
                            specific hexadecimal offset.
        H (High)            Toggle the "strip high bit" (/H) option.
        I (Info)            Display information on the current file (the full
                            name, size, date, and time).
        N (Next)            Find next matching string.
        O (Open)            Open a different file
        P (Print)           Print the entire file, or the selected text.
        W (Wrap)            Toggle the "line wrap" (/W) option.
        X (heX)             Toggle the hex-mode display (/X) option.

 Text searches performed with F and N are not case sensitive.  However, if the
 display is currently in hexadecimal mode and you press F, you will be prompted
 for whether you want to search in hexadecimal as well.  If you answer Y, you
 should then enter the search string as a sequence of 2-digit hexadecimal
 numbers separated by spaces, for example 41 63 65 (these are the ASCII values
 for the string "Ace").  Hexadecimal searches are case sensitive, and search
 for exactly the string you enter.

 You can further increase the power of LIST 's text searches by using Take
 Commands extended wildcards in the search string.  If you want to disable
 wildcard searches (perhaps to search for text that includes wildcard
 characters) start the search string with a single backquote character.  A
 trailing backquote at the end of the search string is optional.

 LIST saves the search string used by F and N, so you can LIST multiple files
 and search for the same string simply by pressing N in each file, or repeat
 your search the next time you use LIST.

 LIST normally allows long lines in the file to extend past the right edge of
 the screen.  You can use the horizontal scrolling keys (see above) to view
 text that extends beyond the screen width.  If you use the W command or /W
 switch to wrap the display, each line is wrapped when it reaches the right
 edge of the screen, and the horizontal scrolling keys are disabled.

 You can use G to go to a specific line or hexadecimal offset.  When prompted
 for a line number you can enter a negative number to go backward a specified
 number of lines from the current position (there is no corresponding option to
 go forward a certain number of lines).  When you use this option the number of
 lines moved will only correspond to the line count in the LIST status bar if
 the display is not wrapped.

 If you print the file which LIST is displaying, the print format will match
 the display format.  If you have switched to hexadecimal or wrapped mode, that
 mode will be used for the printed output as well.  If you print in wrapped
 mode, long lines will be wrapped at the width of the display.  If you print in
 normal display mode without line wrap, long lines will be wrapped or truncated
 by the printer, not by LIST.  If you have selected some text in the LIST
 window when you select Print, the Selection checkbox in the print dialog is
 automatically marked.  If you leave it marked, Take Command prints only the
 selected text.  If you remove the check mark, the entire file is printed.

 To copy text from the LIST window to the OS/2 clipboard, first use the mouse
 to highlight the text, then press Ctrl-Ins, or use the Copy command on the
 Edit menu.  You can also mark the text using mouse button 2; in this case the
 text will be copied to the clipboard immediately when you release the mouse
 button.

 Most of the LIST keystrokes can be reassigned with key mapping directives in
 the .INI file .

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select):  Select only those files that have the
            specified attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with
            a hyphen [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.
            The colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                           R  Read-only
                           H  Hidden
                           S  System
                           D  Subdirectory
                           A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., LIST /A), LIST will
            select all files and subdirectories including hidden and system
            files.  If attributes are combined, all the specified attributes
            must match for a file to be selected.  For example, /A:RHS will
            select only those files with all three attributes set.

    /H      (High bit off) Strip the high bit from each character before
            displaying.  This is useful when displaying files created by some
            word processors that turn on the high bit for formatting purposes.
            You can toggle this option on and off from within LIST with the H
            key.

    /S      (Standard input) Read from standard input rather than a file.  This
            allows you to redirect command output and view it with LIST.  For
            example, to use LIST to display the output of DIR:

                                [c:\] dir | list /s

    /W      (Wrap) Wrap the text at the right edge of the screen. This option
            is useful when displaying files that don't have a carriage return
            at the end of each line.  The horizontal scrolling keys do not work
            when the display is wrapped.  You can toggle this option on and off
            from within LIST with the W key.

    /X      (hex mode):  Display the file in hexadecimal (hex) mode. This
            option is useful when displaying executable files and other files
            that contain non-text characters.  Each byte of the file is shown
            as a pair of hex characters.  The corresponding text is displayed
            to the right of each line of hexadecimal data.  You can toggle this
            mode on and off from within LIST with the X key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.48. LOADBTM - Switch batch file mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Switch a batch file to or from BTM mode.

 Format:     LOADBTM [ON | OFF]

 Usage:

 Take Command recognizes two kinds of batch files: .CMD and .BTM. Batch files
 executing in BTM mode run two to five times faster than in CMD mode.  Batch
 files automatically start in the mode indicated by their extension.

 The LOADBTM command turns BTM mode on and off.  It can be used to switch modes
 in either a  .CMD or .BTM file. If you use LOADBTM with no argument, it will
 display the current batch mode: LOADBTM ON or LOADBTM OFF.

 LOADBTM can only be used within a batch file.  It is most often used to
 convert a .CMD file to BTM mode without changing its extension.

 Using LOADBTM to repeatedly switch modes within a batch file is not efficient.
 In most cases the speed gained by running some parts of the file in BTM mode
 will be more than offset by the speed lost through repeated loading of the
 file each time BTM mode is invoked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.49. LOG - Log commands to file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Save a log of commands to a disk file.

 Format:     LOG [/H /W file ] [ON | OFF | text ]

             file :  The name of the file to hold the log.
             text :  An optional message that will be added to the log.

             /H(istory log)
             /W(rite to)

 See also:  HISTORY.

 Usage:

 LOG keeps a record of all internal and external commands you use. Each entry
 includes the current system date and time, along with the actual command after
 any alias or variable expansion.  You can use the log file as a record of your
 daily activities.

 LOG with the /H option keeps a similar record, but it does not record the date
 and time for each command.  In addition, it records commands before aliases
 and variables are expanded.

 By default, LOG writes to the file TCOS2LOG in the root directory of the boot
 drive.  The default file name for LOG /H is TCOS2HLOG.

 Entering LOG or LOG /H with no parameters displays the log status (ON or OFF)
 and the name of the LOG file:

          [c:\] log
          LOG (C:\TCOS2LOG) is OFF

 To enable or disable logging, add the word "ON" or "OFF" after the LOG
 command:

          [c:\] log on

 or

          [c:\] log /h on

 Entering LOG or LOG /H with text writes a message to the log file, even if
 logging  is set OFF.  This allows you to enter headers in the log file:

          [c:\] log "Started work on the database system"

 The LOG file format looks like this (the exact format of the date and time
 will vary depending on your country settings):

          [mm-dd-yy  hh:mm:ss]  command

 The LOG /H output can be used as the basis for writing batch files. Start LOG
 /H, then execute the commands that you want the batch file to execute.  When
 you are finished, turn LOG /H off.  The resulting file can be turned into a
 batch file that performs the same commands with little or no editing.

 You can have both a regular log (with time and date stamping) and a history
 log (without the time stamps) enabled simultaneously.

 Options:

    /H      (History log) This option turns on (or off) the history log, which
            saves commands without the time and date stamp.  For example, to
            turn on history logging and write to the file C:\LOG\HLOG:

                                [c:\] log /h /w c:\log\hlog

    /W      (Write) This switch specifies a different filename for the LOG or
            LOG /H output.  It also automatically performs a LOG ON command.
            For example, to turn logging on and write the log to
            C:\LOG\LOGFILE:

                                [c:\] log /w c:\log\logfile

            Once you select a new file name with the LOG /W or LOG /H/W
            command, LOG will use that file until you issue another LOG /W or
            LOG /H/W command, or until you reboot your computer.  Turning LOG
            or LOG /H off or on does not change the file name.  You can set the
            default log file names when Take Command starts with the LogName
            and HistLogName directives in the .INI file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.50. MD - Create a subdirectory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Create a subdirectory.

 Format:     MD [/S] pathname...
                or
             MKDIR [/S] pathname...

             pathname :  The name of one or more directories to create.

             /S(ubdirectories)

 See also:  RD.

 Usage:

 MD and MKDIR are synonyms.  You can use either one.

 MD creates a subdirectory anywhere in the directory tree.  To create a
 subdirectory from the root, start the pathname with a backslash [\].  For
 example, this command creates a subdirectory called MYDIR in the root
 directory:

          [c:\] md \mydir

 If no path is given, the new subdirectory is created in the current directory.
 This example creates a subdirectory called DIRTWO in the current directory:

          [c:\mydir] md dirtwo

 To create a directory from the parent of the current directory (that is, to
 create a sibling of the current directory), start the pathname with two
 periods and a backslash [..\].

 Option:

    /S(Subdirectories) MD creates one directory at a time unless you use the /S
    option.  If you need to create the directory C:\ONE\TWO\THREE and none of
    the named directories exist, you can use /S to have MD create all of the
    necessary subdirectories for you in a single command:

                [c:\] md /s \one\two\three


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.51. MEMORY - Display memory status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display the amount and status of Take Command and OS/2 memory.

 Format:     MEMORY

 Usage:

 MEMORY lists the total physical and resident RAM, the largest free block in
 RAM, the swap file size, the total and free environment and alias space, and
 the total history space.

 If the OS/2 swap file is not stored in the \OS2\SYSTEM directory of the boot
 drive, you must use the SwapFilePath directive in TCMDOS2.INI or MEMORY will
 not be able to display the swap file size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.52. MOVE - Move files to another directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Move files to a new directory and drive.

 Format:     MOVE  [/A:[[-]rhsda] /C /D /F /H /M /N /P /Q /R /S /T /U /V]
             source... destination

             source :  A file or list of files to move.
             destination :  The new location for the files.

             /A:(ttribute select)            /P(rompt)
             /C(hanged)                      /Q(uiet)
             /D(irectory)                    /R(eplace)
             /F(orce delete)                 /S(ubdirectory tree)
             /H(idden and system)            /T(otal)
             /M(odified files)               /U(pdate)
             /N(othing)                      /V(erify)

 See also:  COPY and RENAME.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.
 Date, time, or size ranges anywhere on the line apply to all source files.

 Usage:

 The MOVE command moves one or more files from one directory to another,
 whether the directories are on the same drive or not.  It has the same effect
 as copying the files to a new location and then deleting the originals.  Like
 COPY and RENAME, MOVE works with single files, multiple files, and sets of
 files specified with an include list.

 The simplest MOVE command moves a single source file to a new location and,
 optionally, gives it a new name.  These two examples both move one file from
 drive C: to the root directory on drive A:

          [c:\] move myfile.dat a:\
          [c:\] move myfile.dat a:\savefile.dat

 In both cases, MYFILE.DAT is removed from drive C: after it has been copied to
 drive A:.  If a file called MYFILE.DAT in the first example, or SAVEFILE.DAT
 in the second example, already existed on drive A:, it would be overwritten.
 (This demonstrates the difference between MOVE and RENAME.  MOVE will move
 files between drives and will overwrite the destination file if it exists;
 RENAME will not.)

 If you MOVE multiple files, the destination must be a directory name.  MOVE
 will move each file into the destination directory with its original name (if
 the target is not a directory, MOVE will display an error message and exit):

          [c:\] move *.wks *.txt c:\finance\myfiles

 You cannot move a file to a character device like the printer, or to itself.

 When you move files to another directory, if you add a backslash [\] to the
 end of the destination name MOVE will display an error message if the name
 does not refer to an existing directory. You can use this feature to keep MOVE
 from treating a mistyped destination directory name as a file name, and
 attempting to move all source files to that name.  The /D option performs the
 same function but will also prompt to see if you want to create the
 destination directory if it doesn't exist.

 Be careful when you use MOVE with the SELECT command.  If you SELECT multiple
 files and the target is not a directory (for example, because of a
 misspelling), MOVE will assume it is a file name.  In this case each file will
 be moved in turn to the target file, overwriting the previous file, and then
 the original will be erased before the next file is moved.  At the end of the
 command, all of the original files will have been erased and only the last
 file will exist as the target file.  You can avoid this problem by using
 square brackets with SELECT instead of parentheses (be sure that you don't
 allow the command line to get too long -- watch the character count in the
 upper left corner while you're selecting files).  MOVE will then receive one
 list of files to move instead of a series of individual filenames, and it will
 detect the error and halt.  You can also add a backslash [\] to the end of the
 destination name to ensure that it is the name of a subdirectory (see above).

 MOVE first attempts to rename the file(s), which is the fastest way to move
 files between subdirectories on the same drive.  If that fails (the
 destination is on a different drive or already exists), MOVE will copy the
 file(s) and then delete the originals.

 If MOVE must physically copy the files and delete the originals, rather than
 renaming them (see above), then some disk space may be freed on the source
 drive.  The free space may be the result of moving the files to another drive,
 or of overwriting a larger destination file with a smaller source file.  MOVE
 displays the amount of disk space recovered unless the /Q option is used (see
 below).  It does so by comparing the amount of free disk space before and
 after the MOVE command is executed.  However, this amount may be incorrect if
 you are using a deletion tracking system which stores deleted files in a
 hidden directory, or if another program performs a file operation while the
 MOVE command is executing.

 When physically copying files, MOVE preserves the hidden, system, and
 read-only attributes of the source files, and sets the archive attribute of
 the destination files.  However, if the files can be renamed, and no copying
 is required, then the source file attributes are not changed.

 If you MOVE files with long filenames to a volume which does not support them,
 Take Command will display an error message.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select) Select only those files that have the specified
            attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with a hyphen
            [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.  The
            colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., MOVE /A: ...), MOVE will
            select all files and subdirectories including hidden and system
            files.  If attributes are combined, all the specified attributes
            must match for a file to be selected. For example, /A:RHS will
            select only those files with all three attributes set.

    /C      (Changed files) Move files only if the destination file exists and
            is older than the source (see also /U).  This option is useful for
            updating the files in one directory from those in another without
            moving any newly-created files.

    /D      (Directory) Requires that the destination be a directory.  If the
            destination does not exist, MOVE will prompt to see if you want to
            create it. If the destination exists as a file, MOVE will fail with
            an "Access denied" error.  Use this option to avoid having MOVE
            accidentally interpret your destination name as a file name when
            it's really a mistyped directory name.

    /F      (Force delete) This option forces deletion of the source file
            without saving it to the DELDIR directory (if DELDIR is not in use,
            /F has no effect).

    /H      (Hidden) Move all files, including hidden and system files.

    /M      (Modified files) Move only files that have the archive bit set. The
            archive bit will remain set after the MOVE; to clear it use ATTRIB.

    /N      (Nothing) Do everything except actually move the file(s). This
            option is most useful for testing what a complex MOVE command will
            do.

    /P      (Prompt) Prompt the user to confirm each move.  Your options at the
            prompt are explained in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /Q      (Quiet) Don't display filenames, the total number of files moved,
            or the amount of disk space recovered, if any.  This option is most
            often used in batch files. See also /T.

    /R      (Replace) Prompt for a Y or N response before overwriting an
            existing destination file.

    /S      (Subdirectories) Move an entire subdirectory tree to another
            location.  MOVE will attempt to create the destination directories
            if they don't exist, and will remove empty subdirectories after the
            move. When /D is used with /S, you will be prompted if the first
            destination directory does not exist, but subdirectories below that
            will be created automatically by MOVE.  If you attempt to use /S to
            move a subdirectory tree into part of itself, MOVE will display an
            error message and halt.

    /T      (Total) Don't display filenames as they are moved, but display the
            total number of files deleted and the amount of free disk space
            recovered, if any.

    /U      (Update) Move each source file only if it is newer than a matching
            destination file or if a matching destination file does not exist
            (also see /C).  This option is useful for moving new or changed
            files from one directory to another.

    /V      (Verify) Verify each disk write.  This is the same as executing the
            VERIFY ON command, but is only active during the MOVE.  /V does not
            read back the file and compare its contents with what was written;
            it only verifies that the data written to disk is physically
            readable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.53. MSGBOX - Display a message box prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a message box and return the user's response.

 Format:     MSGBOX OK | OKCANCEL | YESNO | YESNOCANCEL ["title"] prompt

             title : Text for the title of the message box.
             prompt : Text that will appear inside the message box.

 Usage:

 MSGBOX can display one of 4 kinds of message boxes and wait for the user's
 response.  You can use title and prompt to display any text you wish.  If no
 title is specified, the program name ("Take Command for OS/2") is used as the
 title.  Take Command automatically sizes and locates the box on the screen.

 The message box may have 1, 2, or 3 response buttons.  The command MSGBOX OK
 creates a single-button box; the user must simply acknowledge the prompt text.

 The OKCANCEL and YESNO forms have 2 buttons each.  The YESNOCANCEL form has 3
 buttons.  The button the user chooses is returned in the Take Command variable
 %_?.  Be sure to save the return value in another variable or test it
 immediately; the value of %_? changes with every internal command.

 The following list shows the value returned for each possible selection:

          Yes:    10
          No:     11
          OK:     10
          Cancel: 12

 If there is an error in the MSGBOX command itself, %_? will be set to 1 for a
 syntax error or 2 for any other error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.54. ON - Trap errors in batch files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Execute a command in a batch file when a specific condition
             occurs.

 Format:     ON BREAK [command ]
                or
             ON ERROR [command ]
                or
             ON ERRORMSG [command ]

 Usage:

 ON can only by used in batch files.

 ON sets a "watchdog" that remains in effect for the duration of the current
 batch file.  Whenever a BREAK or ERROR condition occurs after ON has been
 executed, the command is automatically executed.

 ON BREAK will execute its command if the user presses Ctrl- C or Ctrl-Break.

 ON ERROR will execute its command after any command processor or operating
 system error (including critical errors). That is, ON ERROR will detect errors
 such as a disk write error, and Take Command errors such as a COPY command
 that fails to copy any files, or the use of an unacceptable command option.
 The normal error message is not displayed when ON ERROR is used.

 ON ERRORMSG is the same as ON ERROR, but displays the usual error message
 before executing the command.  The additional information about ON ERROR below
 also applies to ON ERRORMSG.

 ON BREAK and ON ERROR are independent of each other.  You can use either one,
 or both, in any batch file.

 Each time ON BREAK or ON ERROR is used, it defines a new command to be
 executed for a break or error, and any old command is discarded.  If you use
 ON BREAK or ON ERROR with no following command, that type of error handling is
 disabled. Error handling is also automatically disabled when the batch file
 exits.

 ON BREAK and ON ERROR only affect the current batch file.  If you CALL another
 batch file, the first batch file's error handling is suspended, and the CALLed
 file must define its own error handling. When control returns to the first
 batch file, its error handling is reactivated.

 The command can be any command that can be used on a batch file line by
 itself.  Frequently, it is a GOTO or GOSUB command.  For example, the
 following fragment traps any user attempt to end the batch file by pressing
 Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break.  It scolds the user for trying to end the batch file and
 then continues displaying the numbers from 1 to 1000:

          on break gosub gotabreak
          do i = 1 to 1000
          echo %i
          enddo
          quit
          :gotabreak
          echo Hey!  Stop that!!
          return

 You can use a command group as the command if you want to execute multiple
 commands, for example:

          on break (echo
          Oops, got a break! & quit)

 ON BREAK and ON ERROR always assume that you want to continue executing the
 batch file.  After the command is executed, control automatically returns to
 the next command in the batch file (the command after the one that was
 interrupted by the break or error).  The only way to avoid continuing the
 batch file after a break or error is for the command to transfer control to
 another point with GOTO, end the batch file with QUIT or CANCEL, or start
 another batch file (without CALLing it).

 When handling an error condition with ON ERROR, you may find it useful to use
 internal variables, particularly %_? and %_SYSERR, to help determine the cause
 of the error.

 Caution:  If a break or error occurs while the command specified in ON BREAK
 or ON ERROR is executing, the command will be restarted. This means you must
 use caution to avoid or handle any possible errors in the commands invoked by
 ON ERROR, since such errors can cause an infinite loop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.55. PATH - Set the executable search path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display or alter the list of directories that Take Command will
             search for executable files, batch files, and files with
             executable extensions that are not in the current directory.

 Format:     PATH [directory [;directory...]]

             directory :  The full name of a directory to include in the path
             setting.

 See also:  ESET and SET.

 Usage:

 When Take Command is asked to execute an external command (a .COM, .EXE, .BTM,
 .BAT, or .CMD file, or an executable extension), it first looks for the file
 in the current directory, and if it hasn't found an executable file, then
 searches each of the directories specified in the PATH setting.

          [c:\] path c:\;c:\dos;c:\util

 The list of directories to search is stored as an environment string, and can
 also be set or viewed with SET, and edited with ESET.

 Directory names in the path must be separated by semicolons [;].  Each
 directory name is shifted to upper case to maintain compatibility with
 programs which can only recognize upper case directory names in the path.  If
 you modify your path with the SET or ESET command, you may include directory
 names in lower case.  These may cause trouble with some programs, which assume
 that all path entries have been shifted to upper case.

 If you enter PATH with no parameters, the current path is displayed:

          [c:\] path
          PATH=C:\;C:\DOS;C:\UTIL

 Entering PATH and a semicolon clears the search path so that only the current
 directory is searched for executable files (this is the default at system
 startup).

 Some applications also use the PATH to search for their data files.

 If you include an explicit file extension on a command name (for example,
 WP.EXE ), the search will find files with that name and extension in the
 current directory and every directory in the path. It will not locate other
 executable files with the same base name.

 If you have an entry in the path which consists of a single period [.], the
 current directory will not be searched first, but instead will be searched
 when Take Command reaches the "." in the path. This allows you to delay the
 search of the current directory for executable files and files with executable
 extensions.  In rare cases, this feature may not be compatible with
 applications which use the path to find their files; if you experience a
 problem, you will have to remove the "." from the path while using any such
 application.

 To create a path longer than the command-line length limit, use PATH
 repeatedly to append additional directories to the path:

          path [first list of directories]
          path %path;[second list of directories]
          ...

 You cannot use this method to extend the path beyond 2042 characters (the
 internal buffer limit, with room for "PATH ").  It is usually more efficient
 to use aliases to load application programs than to create a long PATH.  See
 ALIAS for details.

 If you specify an invalid directory in the path, it will be skipped and the
 search will continue with the next directory in the path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.56. PAUSE - Suspend batch file execution ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Suspend batch file or alias execution.

 Format:     PAUSE [text ]

             text :  The message to be displayed as a user prompt.

 Usage:

 A PAUSE command will suspend execution of a batch file or alias, giving you
 the opportunity to change disks, turn on the printer, etc.

 PAUSE waits for any key to be pressed and then continues execution. You can
 specify the text that PAUSE displays while it waits for a keystroke, or let
 Take Command use the default message:

          Press any key when ready...

 For example, the following batch file fragment prompts the user before erasing
 files:

          pause Press Ctrl-C to abort, any other key to erase all .LST files
          erase *.lst

 If you press Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break while PAUSE is waiting for a key, execution
 of an alias will be terminated, and execution of a batch file will be
 suspended while you are asked whether to cancel the batch job.  In a batch
 file you can handle Ctrl-C and Ctrl-Break yourself with the ON BREAK command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.57. POPD - Restore previous directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Return to the disk drive and directory at the top of the directory
             stack.

 Format:     POPD [*]

 See also:  DIRS and PUSHD.

 Usage:

 Each time you use the PUSHD command, it saves the current disk drive and
 directory on the internal directory stack.  POPD restores the last drive and
 directory that was saved with PUSHD and removes that entry from the stack.
 You can use these commands together to change directories, perform some work,
 and return to the starting drive and directory.

 Directory changes made with POPD are recorded for display in the directory
 history window.

 This example saves and changes the current disk drive and directory with
 PUSHD, and then restores it.  The current directory is shown in the prompt:

          [c:\] pushd d:\database\test
          [d:\database\test] popd
          [c:\]

 You can use the DIRS command to see the complete list of saved drives and
 directories (the directory stack).

 The POPD command followed by an asterisk [*] clears the directory stack
 without changing the current drive and directory.  If the directory on the top
 of the stack is not on the current drive, POPD will switch to the drive and
 directory on the top of the stack without changing the default directory on
 the current drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.58. PROMPT - Change command-line prompt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Change the command-line prompt.

 Format:     PROMPT [text ]

             text :  Text to be used as the new command-line prompt.

 Usage:

 You can change and customize the command-line prompt at any time. The prompt
 can include normal text, and system information such as the current drive and
 directory, the time and date, and the amount of memory available. You can
 create an informal "Hello, Bob!" prompt or an official-looking prompt full of
 impressive information. The prompt text can contain special commands in the
 form $?, where ? is one of the characters listed below:

        b     The vertical bar character [|].
        c     The open parenthesis [(].
        d     Current date, in the format:  Fri  1-05-96 (the month, day, and
              year are formatted according to your current country settings).
        D     Current date, in the format:  Fri  Jan 6, 1996.
        e     The ASCII ESC character (decimal 27).
        f     The close parenthesis [)].
        g     The > character.
        h     Backspace over the previous character.
        i     Ignored, included for compatibility with CMD.EXE.
        l     The < character.
        m     Time in hours and minutes using 24-hour format:  16:07
        M     Time in hours and minutes using the default country format and
              retaining "a" or "p", e.g. 4:07p.
        n     Current drive letter.
        p     Current directory on drive d: (including drive letter), in lower
              case.
        P     Current directory on drive d: (including drive letter), in upper
              case.
        q     The = character.
        r     The numeric exit code of the last external command.
        s     The space character.
        t     Current 24-hour time, in the format hh:mm:ss.
        T     Current 12-hour time, in the format hh:mm:ss[a|p].
        v     Operating system version number, in the format 3.10.
        xd:   Current directory on drive d:, in lower case (uses the actual
              case of the directory name as stored on the disk for HPFS
              drives).
        Xd:   Current directory on drive d:, in upper case.
        z     Current shell nesting level; the primary command processor is
              shell 0.
        $     The $ character.
        _     CR/LF (go to beginning of a new line).

 For example, to set the prompt to the current date and time, with a ">" at the
 end:

          [c:\] prompt $d $t $g
          Fri  Jan 5, 1996 10:29:19 >

 To set the prompt to the current date and time, followed by the current drive
 and directory in upper case on the next line, surrounded by square brackets:

          [c:\] prompt $d $t$_[$P]
          Fri  Jan 5, 1996 10:29:19
          [C:\]

 The Take Command prompt can be set in TCSTART, or in any batch file that runs
 when Take Command starts.  The Take Command default prompt is [$n] (drive name
 in square brackets) on floppy drives, and [$p] (current drive and directory in
 square brackets) on all other drives.

 If you enter PROMPT with no arguments, the prompt will be reset to its default
 value.  The PROMPT command sets the environment variable PROMPT, so to view
 the current prompt setting use the command:

          [c:\] set prompt

 (If the prompt is not set at all, the PROMPT environment variable will not be
 used, in which case the SET command above will give a "Not in environment"
 error.)

 Along with literal text, special characters, and ANSI sequences, you can
 include the text of any environment variable, internal variable, or variable
 function in a prompt.  For example, if you want to include the size of the
 largest free memory block in the command prompt, plus the current drive and
 directory, you could use this command:

          [c:\] prompt (%%@dosmem[K]K) [$p]
          (2488K) [c:\data]

 Notice that the @DOSMEM function is shown with two leading percent signs [%].
 If you used only one percent sign, the @DOSMEM function would be expanded once
 when the PROMPT command was executed, instead of every time the prompt is
 displayed.  As a result, the amount of memory would never change from the
 value it had when you entered the PROMPT command. You can also use back quotes
 to delay expanding the variable function until the prompt is displayed:

          [c:\] prompt `(%@dosmem[K]K) [$p]`


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.59. PUSHD - Save current directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Save the current disk drive and directory, optionally changing to
             a new drive and directory.

 Format:     PUSHD [pathname ]

             pathname :  The name of the new default drive and directory.

 See also:  DIRS, POPD and the CDPATH environment variable.

 Usage:

 PUSHD saves the current drive and directory on a "last in, first out"
 directory stack.  The POPD command returns to the last drive and directory
 that was saved by PUSHD.  You can use these commands together to change
 directories, perform some work, and return to the starting drive and
 directory.  The DIRS command displays the contents of the directory stack.

 To save the current drive and directory, without changing directories, use the
 PUSHD command by itself, with no pathname.

 If a pathname is specified as part of the PUSHD command, the current drive and
 directory are saved and PUSHD changes to the specified drive and directory.
 If the pathname includes a drive letter, PUSHD changes to the specified
 directory on the new drive without changing the current directory on the
 original drive.

 This example saves the current directory and changes to C:\WORDP\MEMOS, then
 returns to the original directory:

          [c:\] pushd \wordp\memos
          [c:\wordp\memos] popd
          [c:\]

 Directory changes made with PUSHD are recorded for display in the directory
 history window.

 The directory stack can hold up to 255 characters, or about 10 to 20 entries
 (depending on the length of the names).  If you exceed this limit, the oldest
 entry is removed before adding a new entry.

 If PUSHD can't change directly to the specified directory, it will look for
 the CDPATH variable; see CDPATH for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.60. QUERYBOX - Popup dialog for input ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a query in a dialog box, and return the string value
             entered.

 Format:     QUERYBOX /E /Ln ["title"] prompt %%var

             title: Text for the title bar of the message box.
             prompt: Text that will appear inside the message box.
             %%var : Variable name where the input will be saved.

             /E (dit existing value)
             /L (maximum length)

 Usage:

 QUERYBOX displays a dialog box with a prompt, an optional title, and a string
 input field.  Then it waits for your entry, and places any characters you type
 into an environment variable.  QUERYBOX is normally used in batch files and
 aliases to get string input.

 QUERYBOX is similar to INPUT, except that it appears as a popup dialog box.

 This example prompts for a string and store it in the variable NAME:

          querybox "File Name" Enter a name:  %%var

 Options:

    /E      (Edit existing value) Allows you to edit an existing value.  If
            there is no existing value for the specified variable, QUERYBOX
            allows you to enter a new value.

    /L      (Length) Sets the maximum number of characters which QUERYBOX will
            accept to "n".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.61. QUIT - Exit batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Terminate the current batch file.

 Format:     QUIT [value ]

             value :  The exit code from 0 to 255 to return to Take Command or
             to the previous batch file.

 See also:  CANCEL.

 Usage:

 QUIT provides a simple way to exit a batch file before reaching the end of the
 file.  If you QUIT a batch file called from another batch file, you will be
 returned to the previous file at the line following the original CALL.

 QUIT only ends the current batch file.  To end all batch file processing, use
 the CANCEL command.

 If you specify a value, QUIT will set the ERRORLEVEL or exit code (see the IF
 command, and the %? variable) to that value.

 You can also use QUIT to terminate an alias.  If you QUIT an alias while
 inside a batch file, QUIT will end both the alias and the batch file and
 return you to the command prompt or to the calling batch file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.62. RD - Remove subdirectory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Remove one or more subdirectories.

 Format:     RD pathname...
                or
             RMDIR pathname...

             pathname :  The name of one or more subdirectories to remove.

 See also:  MD.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 RD and RMDIR are synonyms.  You can use either one.

 RD removes directories from the directory tree.  For example, to remove the
 subdirectory MEMOS from the subdirectory WP, you can use this command:

          [c:\] rd \wp\memos

 Before using RD, you must delete all files and subdirectories (and their
 files) in the pathname you want to remove.  Remember to remove hidden and
 read-only files as well as normal files (you can use DEL /Z to delete hidden
 and read-only files).

 You cannot use wildcards in the pathname.

 You cannot remove the root directory, the current directory (.), any directory
 above the current directory in the directory tree, or any directory in use by
 another process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.63. REBOOT - Reboot or shutdown the computer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Do a system reboot.

 Format:     REBOOT [/S /V]

             /S(hutdown)
             /V(erify)

 Usage:

 REBOOT will restart your computer.  It normally performs a warm reboot, which
 is comparable to pressing Ctrl-Alt-Delete.  The following example prompts you
 to verify the reboot, then does a warm boot:

          [c:\] reboot /v

 REBOOT defaults to performing a warm boot, with no prompting.

 REBOOT flushes the disk buffers, resets the drives, and waits one second
 before rebooting, to allow disk caching programs to finish writing any cached
 data.  Take Command issues the proper commands to shut down OS/2 before
 rebooting.

 Options:

    /S      (Shutdown) Shut down the system, but do not reboot.  This option is
            equivalent to clicking the "Shutdown" choice on the OS/2 Workplace
            Shell popup menu.

    /V      (Verify) Prompt for confirmation (Y or N) before rebooting or
            taking the action specified by other REBOOT options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.64. REM - Add comment to batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Put a comment in a batch file.

 Format:     REM [comment ]

             comment :  The text to include in the batch file.

 Usage:

 The REM command lets you place a remark or comment in a batch file. Batch file
 comments are useful for documenting the purpose of a batch file and the
 procedures you have used.

 REM must be followed by a space or tab character and then your comment.
 Comment lines can be up to 1023 characters long.  Take Command will normally
 ignore everything on the line after the REM command, including quote
 characters, redirection symbols, and other commands (see below for the
 exception to this rule).

 If ECHO is ON, the comment is displayed.  Otherwise, it is ignored. If ECHO is
 ON and you don't want to display the line, preface the REM command with an at
 sign [@].

 You can use REM to create a zero-byte file if you use a redirection symbol
 immediately after the REM command.  For example, to create the zero-byte file
 C:\FOO:

          [c:\] rem>foo

 (This capability is included for compatibility with traditional command
 processors.  A simpler method for creating a zero-byte file with Take Command
 is to enter >filename as a command, with no actual command before the [>]
 redirection character.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.65. REN - Rename files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Rename files or subdirectories.

 Format:     REN [/A:[[-]rhsda] /N /P /Q /S /T] old_name... new_name
                or
             RENAME [/A:[[-]rhsda] /N /P /Q /S /T] old_name... new_name

             old_name :  Original name of the file(s) or subdirectory.
             new_name :  New name to use, or new path on the same drive.

             /A:(ttribute select)            /Q(uiet)
             /N(othing)                      /S(ubdirectory)
             /P(rompt)                       /T(otal)

 See also:  COPY and MOVE.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 REN and RENAME are synonyms.  You may use either one.

 REN lets you change the name of a file or a subdirectory, or move one or more
 files to a new subdirectory on the same drive.  (If you want to move files to
 a different drive, use MOVE.)

 In its simplest form, you simply give REN the old_name of an existing file or
 subdirectory and then a new_name.  The new_name must not already exist -- you
 can't give two files the same name (unless they are in different directories).
 The first example renames the file MEMO.TXT to MEM.TXT. The second example
 changes the name of the \WORD directory to \WP:

          [c:\] rename memo.txt mem.txt
          [c:\] rename \word \wp

 You can also use REN to rename a group of files that you specify with
 wildcards, as multiple files, or in an include list.  When you do, the
 new_name must use one or more wildcards to show what part of each filename to
 change.  Both of the next two examples change the extensions of multiple files
 to .SAV:

          [c:\] ren config.nt autoexec.nt tcstart.btm *.sav
          [c:\] ren *.txt *.sav

 REN can move files to a different subdirectory on the same drive. When it is
 used for this purpose, REN requires one or more filenames for the old_name and
 a directory name for the new_name:

          [c:\] ren memo.txt \wp\memos\
          [c:\] ren oct.dat nov.dat \data\save\

 The final backslash in the last two examples is optional.  If you use it, you
 force REN to recognize the last argument as the name of a directory, not a
 file.  The advantage of this approach is that if you accidentally mistype the
 directory name, REN will report an error instead of renaming your files in a
 way that you didn't intend.

 Finally, REN can move files to a new directory and change their name at the
 same time if you specify both a path and file name for new_name .  In this
 example, the files are renamed with an extension of .SAV as they are moved to
 a new directory:

          [c:\] ren *.dat \data\save\*.sav

 When new_name refers to a file or files (rather than a directory), the file(s)
 must not already exist.  Also, you cannot rename a subdirectory to a new
 location on the directory tree.

 REN does not change a file's attributes.  The new_name file(s) will have the
 same attributes as old_name.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select) Select only those files that have the specified
            attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with a hyphen
            [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.  The
            colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., REN /A: ...), REN will
            select all files and subdirectories including hidden and system
            files.  If attributes are combined, all the specified attributes
            must match for a file to be selected. For example, /A:RHS will
            select only those files with all three attributes set.

    /N      (Nothing) Do everything except actually rename the file(s). This
            option is useful for testing what a REN command will actually do.

    /P      (Prompt) Prompt the user to confirm each rename operation. Your
            options at the prompt are explained in detail under Page and File
            Prompts.

    /Q      (Quiet) Don't display filenames  or the number of files renamed.
            This option is most often used in batch files.  See also /T.

    /S      (Subdirectory) Normally, you can rename a subdirectory only if you
            do not use any wildcards in the new_name.  This prevents
            subdirectories from being renamed inadvertently when a group of
            files is being renamed with wildcards.  /S will let you rename a
            subdirectory even when you use wildcards.

    /T      (Total) Don't display filenames as they are renamed, but report the
            number of files renamed.  See also /Q.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.66. RETURN - Return from GOSUB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Return from a GOSUB (subroutine) in a batch file.

 Format:     RETURN

 See also:  GOSUB.

 Usage:

 Take Command allows subroutines in batch files.

 A subroutine begins with a label (a colon followed by a word) and ends with a
 RETURN command.

 The subroutine is invoked with a GOSUB command from another part of the batch
 file.  When a RETURN command is encountered the subroutine terminates, and
 execution of the batch file continues on the line following the original
 GOSUB.

 The following batch file fragment calls a subroutine which displays the files
 in the current directory:

          echo Calling a subroutine
          gosub subr1
          echo Returned from the subroutine
          quit
          :subr1
          dir /a/w
          return


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.67. SCREEN - Position cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Position the cursor on the screen and optionally display a
             message.

 Format:     SCREEN row column [text ]

             row :  The new row location for the cursor.
             column :  The new column location for the cursor.
             text :  Optional text to display at the new cursor location.

 See also:  ECHO, SCRPUT, TEXT, and VSCRPUT.

 Usage:

 SCREEN allows you to create attractive screen displays in batch files. You use
 it to specify where a message will appear on the screen.  You can use SCREEN
 to create menu displays, logos, etc. The following batch file fragment
 displays a menu:

          @echo off
          cls
          screen 3 10 Select a number from 1 to 4:
          screen 6 20  1 - Word Processing
          ...

 SCREEN does not change the screen colors.  To display text in specific colors,
 use SCRPUT or VSCRPUT.  SCREEN always leaves the cursor at the end of the
 displayed text.

 The row and column values are zero-based, so on a standard 25 line by 80
 column display, valid rows are 0 - 24 and valid columns are 0 - 79.  You can
 also specify the row and column as offsets from the current cursor position.
 Begin the value with a plus sign [+] to move the cursor down the specified
 number of rows or to the right the specified number of columns, or with a
 minus sign [-] to move the cursor up or to the left. This example prints a
 string 3 lines above the current position, in absolute column 10:

          screen -3 10 Hello, World!

 SCREEN checks for a valid row and column, and displays a "Usage" error message
 if either value is out of range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.68. SCRPUT - Display text in color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Position text on the screen and display it in color.

 Format:     SCRPUT row col [BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg text

             row:  Starting row
             col:  Starting column
             fg:  Foreground character color
             bg:  Background character color
             text:  The text to display

 See also:  CLS, ECHO, SCREEN, TEXT, and VSCRPUT.

 Usage:

 SCRPUT allows you to create attractive screen displays in batch files. You use
 it to specify where a message will appear on the screen and what colors will
 be used to display the message text. You can use SCRPUT to create menu
 displays, logos, etc.

 SCRPUT works like SCREEN, but allows you to specify the display colors.  It
 always leaves the cursor in its current position.

 The row and column are zero-based, so on a standard 25 line by 80 column
 display, valid rows are 0 - 24 and valid columns are 0 - 79.  You can also
 specify the row and column as offsets from the current cursor position.  Begin
 the value with a plus sign [+] to move down the specified number of rows or to
 the right the specified number of columns, or with a minus sign [-] to move up
 or to the left.

 The following batch file fragment displays part of a menu, in color:

          cls white on blue
          scrput 6 20 bri red on blu 1 - Word Processing
          scrput 7 20 bri yel on blu 2 - Spreadsheet


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.69. SELECT - Select files for a command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Interactively select files for a command.

 Format:     SELECT [/A[:][-][rhsda] /D /E /H /I"text" /O[:][-] adeginrsu /Z]
             [command ] ... (files...)...

             command :  The command to execute with the selected files.
             files :  The files from which to select.  File names may be
             enclosed in either parentheses or square brackets.  The difference
             is explained below.

             /A(ttribute select)             /I (match descriptions)
             /D(isable color coding)         /O(rder)
             /E (use upper case)             /Z (use FAT format)
             /H(ide dots)

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.
 Date, time, or size ranges must appear immediately after the SELECT keyword.

 Usage:

 SELECT allows you to select files for internal and external commands by using
 a full-screen "point and shoot" display.  You can have SELECT execute a
 command once for each file you select, or have it create a list of files for a
 command to work with.  The command can be an internal command, an alias, an
 external command, or a batch file.

 If you use parentheses around the files, SELECT executes the command once for
 each file you have selected.  During each execution, one of the selected files
 is passed to the command as an argument.  If you use square brackets around
 files, the SELECTed files are combined into a single list, separated by
 spaces. The command is then executed once with the entire list presented as
 its command-line arguments.

 You can scroll through the SELECT list with the scrollbars or with the
 keyboard.  SELECT uses the cursor up, cursor down, cursor left, cursor right,
 PgUp, and PgDn keys to scroll through the files matching the argument(s).
 Click on a line to select or deselect it, or use the + key or space bar to
 select a file, and the - key to deselect a file.  The "Toggle" button or  key
 will reverse all of the current marks (excluding subdirectories), and the
 "Clear" button or / key will unmark everything. After marking the files, click
 on "Go" or press Enter to execute the command.  You can select a single file
 by moving the scroll bar to the filename and selecting "Go" or pressing Enter.
 To skip the files listed in the current display and go on to the next file
 specification inside the parentheses or brackets (if any), press the Esc key
 or click on the Quit button.  To cancel the current SELECT command entirely,
 press Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break.

 On drives which support long file names, SELECT will use the standard long
 name display format with the filename at the right-hand side of the display.
 File descriptions are not displayed in this format.  To switch to the more
 traditional "FAT" (short name) format, and display the file descriptions, use
 the /Z switch.

 In the simplest form of SELECT, you merely specify the command and then the
 list of files from which you will make your selection(s). For example:

          [c:\] select copy (*.com *.exe) a:\

 will let you select from among the .COM and .EXE files on the current drive.
 It will then invoke the COPY command to copy each file you select to drive A:.
 You will be able to select first from a list of all .COM files in the current
 directory, and then from a list of all .EXE files.

 If you want to select from a list of all the .COM and .EXE files mixed
 together, create an include list inside the parentheses by inserting a
 semicolon:

          [c:\] select copy (*.com;*.exe) a:\

 Finally, if you want the SELECT command to send a single list of files to
 COPY, instead of invoking COPY once for each file you select, put the file
 names in square brackets instead of parentheses:

          [c:\] select copy [*.com;*.exe] a:\

 If you use brackets, you have to be sure that the resulting command (the word
 COPY, the list of files, and the destination drive in this example) is no more
 than 1,023 characters long.  The current line length is displayed by SELECT
 while you are marking files to help you to conform to this limit.

 The parentheses or brackets enclosing the file name(s) can appear anywhere
 within the command; SELECT assumes that the first set of parentheses or
 brackets it finds is the one containing the list of files from which you wish
 to make your selection.

 The list of files from which you wish to select can be further refined by
 using date, time, and size ranges. The range must be placed immediately after
 the word SELECT.  If the command is an internal command that supports ranges,
 an independent range can also be used in the command itself.

 If you don't specify a command, the selected filename(s) will become the
 command.  For example, this command defines an alias called UTILS that selects
 from the executable files in the directory C:\UTIL, and then executes them in
 the order marked:

          [c:\] alias utils select (c:\util\*.com;*.exe;*.btm;*.bat)

 If you want to use filename completion to enter the filenames inside the
 parentheses, type a space after the opening parenthesis. Otherwise the
 command-line editor will treat the open parenthesis as the first character of
 the filename.

 When displaying descriptions, SELECT adds a right arrow at the end of the line
 if the description is too long to fit on the screen.  This symbol will alert
 you to the existence of additional description text.

 With the /I option, you can select files based on their descriptions.  SELECT
 will display files if their description matches the text after the /I switch.
 The search is not case sensitive.  You can use wildcards and extended wild
 cards as part of the text.

 When sorting file names and extensions for the SELECT display, Take Command
 normally assumes that sequences of digits should be sorted numerically (for
 example, the file DRAW2 would come before DRAW03 because 2 is numerically
 smaller than 03), rather than strictly alphabetically (where DRAW2 would come
 second because "2" comes after "0").  You can defeat this behavior and force a
 strict alphabetic sort with the /O:a option.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select) Select only those files that have the specified
            attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with a hyphen
            [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.  The
            colon [:] after /A is optional.  The attributes are:

                         R  Read-only
                         H  Hidden
                         S  System
                         D  Subdirectory
                         A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., SELECT /A ...), SELECT
            will display all files and subdirectories including hidden and
            system files. If attributes are combined, all the specified
            attributes must match for a file to be included in the listing.
            For example, /A:RHS will display only those files with all three
            attributes set.

    /D      (Disable color coding)  Temporarily turn off directory color coding
            within SELECT.

    /E      (use upper case)  Display filenames in the traditional upper case
            format; also see SETDOS /U and the UpperCase  directive in the .INI
            file.

    /H      (Hide dots)  Suppress the display of the "." and ".." directories

    /I      (match descriptions)  Display filenames by matching text in their
            descriptions.  The text can include wild cards and extended
            wildcards.  The search text must be enclosed in quotation marks.

    /O      (Order)  Set the sort order for the files.  The order can be any
            combination of the following options:

              -  Reverse the sort order for the next option
              a  Sort in ASCII order, not numerically, when there are digits in
            the name
              d  Sort by date and time (oldest first); for HPFS drives also see
            /T
              e  Sort by extension
              g  Group subdirectories first, then files
              i  Sort by file description
              n  Sort by filename (this is the default)
              r  Reverse the sort order for all options
              s  Sort by size
              u  Unsorted

    /Z      Display HPFS filenames in FAT format.  Long names will be truncated
            to 12 characters.  If the name is longer than 12 characters, it
            will be followed by a right arrow to show that one or more
            characters have been truncated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.70. SET - Set environment variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display, create, modify, or delete environment variables.

 Format:     SET [/P /R filename...] [name [=][value ]]

             filename :  The name of a file containing variable definitions.
             name :  The name of the environment variable to define or modify.
             value :  The new value for the variable.

             /P(ause)                /R(ead from file)

 See also:  ESET and UNSET.

 Usage:

 Every program and command inherits an environment, which is a list of variable
 names, each of which is followed by an equal sign and some text.  Many
 programs use entries in the environment to modify their own actions.

 If you simply type the SET command with no options or arguments, it will
 display all the names and values currently stored in the environment.
 Typically, you will see an entry called PATH, an entry called CMDLINE, and
 whatever other environment variables you and your programs have established:

          [c:\] set
          PATH=C:\;C:\OS2;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;C:\UTIL
          CMDLINE=C:\Take Command\TCSTART.CMD

 To add a variable to the environment, type SET, a space, the variable name, an
 equal sign, and the text:

          [c:\] set mine=c:\finance\myfiles

 The variable name is converted to upper case by Take Command.  The text after
 the equal sign will be left just as you entered it.  If the variable already
 exists, its value will be replaced with the new text that you entered.

 Normally you should not put a space on either side of the equal sign. A space
 before the equal sign will become part of the name ; a space after the equal
 sign will become part of the value.

 If you use SET to create a variable with the same name as one of the Take
 Command internal variables, you will disable the internal variable.  If you
 later execute a batch file or alias that depends on that internal variable, it
 may not operate correctly.

 To display the contents of a single variable, type SET plus the variable name:

          [c:\] set mine

 You can edit environment variables with the ESET command.  To remove variables
 from the environment, use UNSET, or type SET plus a variable name and an equal
 sign:

          [c:\] set mine=

 The variable name is limited to a maximum of 80 characters. The name and value
 together cannot be longer than 1,023 characters.

 In Take Command the size of the environment is set automatically, and
 increased as necessary as you add variables.

 Options:

    /P      (Pause) Wait for a key to be pressed after each screen page before
            continuing the display.  Your options at the prompt are explained
            in detail under Page and File Prompts.

    /R      (Read) Read environment variables from a file.  This is much faster
            than loading variables from a batch file with multiple SET
            commands.  Each entry in the file must fit within the 1,023-byte
            command-line length limit for Take Command:  The file is in the
            same format as the SET display, so SET /R can accept as input a
            file generated by redirecting SET output.  For example, the
            following commands will save the environment variables to a file,
            and then reload them from that file:

                                set > varlist
                                set /r varlist

            You can load variables from multiple files by listing the filenames
            individually after the /R. You can add comments to a variable file
            by starting the comment line with a colon [:].

            If you are creating a SET /R file by hand, and need to create an
            entry that spans multiple lines in the file, you can do so by
            terminating each line, except the last, with an escape character.
            However, you cannot use this method to exceed the command-line
            length limit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.71. SETDOS - Set the Take Command configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display or set the Take Command configuration.

 Format:     SETDOS [/A /C? /D /E? /Fn.n /I+|- command /M? /N? /P? /R? S?:? /U?
             /V? /X[+|-]n /Y]

                          /A(NSI)
             /N(o clobber)
             /C(ompound)                   /P(arameter character)
             /D(escriptions)               /S(hape of cursor)
             /E(scape character)           /U(pper case)
             /F(@EVAL format)              /V(erbose)
             /I(nternal commands)          /X (expansion)
             /M(ode for editing)           /Y (single step)

 Usage:

 SETDOS allows you to customize certain aspects of Take Command to suit your
 personal tastes or the configuration of your system.  Each of these options is
 described below.

 You can display the value of all SETDOS options by entering the SETDOS command
 with no parameters.

 Most of the SETDOS options can be initialized when Take Command executes the
 configuration directives in the .INI file, and can also be changed from the
 configuration notebook. The name of the corresponding directive is listed with
 each option below; if none is listed, that option cannot be set from the .INI
 file. You can also define the SETDOS options in your TCSTART or other startup
 file (see Automatic Batch Files), in aliases, or at the command line.

 Options:

    /A      (ANSI) The ANSI option determines whether Take Command will handle
            ANSI strings displayed on the screen (for example, in the prompt or
            with the ECHO command).  /A0 disables ANSI support; /A1 enables it.
            See the ANSI Reference for more details on ANSI strings, and a
            reference list of ANSI sequences supported by Take Command for
            OS/2. You can test whether ANSI support is enabled with the _ANSI
            internal variable.  Also see the ANSIdirective.

    /C      (Compound character) The COMPOUND option sets the character used
            for separating multiple commands on the same line.  The default is
            the ampersand [&]. You cannot use any of the redirection characters
            (| > <), or the blank, tab, comma, or equal sign as the command
            separator.  This example changes the COMPOUND character to a tilde
            [~]:

                                [c:\] setdos /c~

            If you want to share batch files or aliases between 4DOS or 4OS2
            and Take Command, see the %+ variable, which retrieves the current
            command separator, and 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command
            Compatibility for details on using compatible command separators
            for all the products you use.  Also see the CommandSep directive.

    /D      (Descriptions) The DESCRIPTIONS option controls whether file
            processing commands like COPY, DEL, MOVE, and REN process file
            descriptions along with the files they belong to.  /D1 turns
            description processing on, which is the default.  /D0 turns
            description processing off.  Also see the Descriptions directive.

            You can also use /D to change the description file name, by placing
            the new name (rather than a "0" or "1"), in double quotes,
            immediately after the /D.  Use this option with caution, because
            changing the name from the default will make it difficult to
            transfer file descriptions to another system.  Also see the
            DescriptionName directive.

    /E      (Escape character) The ESCAPE option sets the character used to
            suppress the normal meaning of the following character.  Any
            character following the escape character will be passed unmodified
            to the command.  The default escape character for Take Command is a
            caret [^]. You cannot use any of the redirection characters (| > <)
            or the blank, tab, comma, or equal sign as the escape character.
            Certain characters (b, c, e, f, n, r, s, and t) have special
            meanings when immediately preceded by the escape character.

            If you want to share batch files or aliases between 4DOS, 4OS2,
            4DOS/NT, and Take Command, see the %= variable, which retrieves the
            current escape character, and 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command
            Compatibility for details on using compatible escape characters for
            all the products you use.  Also see the EscapeChar directive.

    /F      (Format for @EVAL) The FORMAT option lets you set default decimal
            precision for the @EVAL variable function. The maximum precision is
            16 digits to the left of the decimal point and up to 8 digits to
            the right of the decimal point.  By default, the minimum precision
            to the right of the decimal point is 0.  You can set both the
            minimum and maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal
            point with the FORMAT option.

            The general form of this option is /Fx.y, where the x value sets
            the minimum number of digits to the right of the decimal place and
            the y value sets the maximum number of digits.  Both values can
            range from 0 to 8; if x is greater than y, it is ignored.  You can
            specify either or both values:  /F2.5, /F2, and /F.5 are all valid
            entries. See the EvalMax and EvalMin directives to set the
            precision when Take Command starts; see the @EVAL function if you
            want to set the precision for a single computation.

    /I      (Internal) The INTERNAL option allows you to disable or enable
            internal commands.  To disable a command, precede the command name
            with a minus [-].  To re-enable a command, precede it with a plus
            [+]. For example, to disable the internal LIST command to force
            Take Command to use an external command:

                                [c:\] setdos /i-list

    /M      (Mode) The MODE option controls the initial line editing mode.  To
            start in overstrike mode at the beginning of each command line, use
            /M0 (the default).  To start in insert mode, use /M1.  Also see the
            EditMode directive.

    /N      (No clobber) The NOCLOBBER option controls output redirection).
            /N0 means existing files will be overwritten by output redirection
            (with >) and that appending (with >>) does not require the file to
            exist already.  This is the default.  /N1 means existing files may
            not be overwritten by output redirection, and that when appending
            the output file must exist.  A /N1 setting can be overridden with
            the [!] character.  If you use /N1, you may have problems with a
            few unusual programs that shell out to run a command with
            redirection, and expect to be able to overwrite an existing file.
            Also see the NoClobber directive .

    /P      (Parameter character) This option sets the character used after a
            percent sign to specify all or all remaining command-line arguments
            in a batch file or alias (e.g., %$ or %n$). The default for Take
            Command is the dollar sign [$].  If you want to share batch files
            or aliases between 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT, and Take Command, see 4DOS,
            4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility for details on
            selecting compatible parameter characters for all the products you
            use.  Also see the ParameterChar directive.

    /S      (Shape) The SHAPE option sets the cursor width.  The format is
            /So:i where o is the width for overstrike mode, and i is the width
            for insert mode.  The width is entered as a percentage of the total
            character width.  The default values are 100:15 (a 100% or block
            cursor for overstrike mode, and a 15% or thin line cursor for
            insert mode).  Because of the way video drivers remap the cursor
            shape, you may not get a smooth progression in the cursor size from
            0% - 100%.  To disable the cursor, enter /S0:0. To prevent all
            cursor modification, enter /S-1:-1. Also see the CursorOver and
            CursorIns directives.

    /U      (Upper) The UPPER option controls the default case (upper or lower)
            for filenames displayed by internal commands like COPY and DIR. /U0
            displays file names in lower case (the default). /U1 displays file
            names in the traditional upper case.  Also see the UpperCase
            directive .

            On drives which support long file names the /U setting is ignored,
            and file names are displayed in the case in which they are stored.

    /V      (Verbose) The VERBOSE option controls the default for command
            echoing in batch files.  /V0 disables echoing of batch file
            commands unless ECHO is explicitly set ON.  /V1, the default
            setting, enables echoing of batch file commands unless ECHO is
            explicitly set OFF.  Also see the BatchEcho directive.

    /V2     forces echoing of all batch file commands, even if ECHO is set OFF
            or the line begins with an "@".  This allows you to turn echoing on
            for a batch file without editing the batch file and removing the
            ECHO OFF command(s) within it.  /V2 is intended for debugging, and
            can be set with SETDOS, but not with the BatchEcho directive in
            TCMDOS2.INI.

    /X[+|-]n(expansion and special characters): This option enables and
            disables alias and environment variable expansion, and controls
            whether special characters have their usual meaning or are treated
            as text.  It is most often used in batch files to process text
            strings which may contain special characters.

            The features enabled or disabled by /X are numbered.  All features
            are enabled when Take Command starts, and you can re-enable all
            features at any time by using /X0.  To disable a particular
            feature, use /X-n, where n is the feature number from the list
            below.  To re-enable the feature, use /X+n.  To enable or disable
            multiple individual features, list their numbers in sequence after
            the  or+- (e.g. /X- 345 to disable features 3, 4, and 5).

            The features are:

              1  All alias expansion.
              2  Nested alias expansion only.
              3  All variable expansion (environment variables and batch and
            alias parameters)
              4  Nested variable expansion only.
              5  Multiple commands, conditional commands, and piping
              6  Redirection
              7  Quoting (double quotes and back quotes) and square brackets
              8  Escape character.

            If nested alias expansion is disabled, the first alias of a command
            is expanded but any aliases it invokes are not expanded.  If nested
            variable expansion is disabled, each variable is expanded once, but
            variables containing the names of other variables are not expanded
            further.

            For example, to disable all features except alias expansion while
            you are processing a text file containing special characters:

                                setdos /x-35678
                                ... [perform text processing here]
                                setdos /x0

    /Y      (Single step) /Y1 enables single-stepping through a batch file.
            Each command is displayed on the screen along with a Y/N/R (yes /
            no / remainder) prompt.  Press Y to execute the command, N to omit
            the command and go on to the next, or R or Esc to execute the
            remainder of the batch file (up to the next SETDOS /Y1 command).
            You may also press Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break to terminate the batch
            file.

            Batch file single stepping is disabled each time Take Command
            returns to the command prompt. This means you cannot enter the
            SETDOS /Y1 command at the prompt, press Enter, and start a batch
            file in single step mode at the next prompt.  However you can
            enable single step operation and run a batch file from the prompt
            if you enter both commands on one line. For example, this command
            runs FILECOMP.BTM with single step enabled:

                                [c:\] setdos /y1 & filecomp.btm


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.72. SETLOCAL - Save the environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Save a copy of the current disk drive, directory, environment, and
             alias list.

 Format:     SETLOCAL

 See also:  ENDLOCAL.

 Usage:

 SETLOCAL is used in batch files to save the default disk drive and directory,
 the environment, and the alias list to a reserved block of memory.  You can
 then change their values and later restore the original values with the
 ENDLOCAL command.

 For example, this batch file fragment saves everything, removes all aliases so
 that user aliases will not affect batch file commands, changes the disk and
 directory, modifies a variable, runs a program, and then restores the original
 values:

          setlocal
          unalias *cdd d:\test
          set path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\util
          rem run some program here
          endlocal

 SETLOCAL and ENDLOCAL are not nestable within a batch file. However, you can
 have multiple SETLOCAL / ENDLOCAL pairs within a batch file, and nested batch
 files can each have their own SETLOCAL / ENDLOCAL.  You cannot use SETLOCAL in
 an alias or at the command line.

 An ENDLOCAL is performed automatically at the end of a batch file if you
 forget to do so.  If you invoke one batch file from another without using
 CALL, the first batch file is terminated, and an automatic ENDLOCAL is
 performed.  The second batch file inherits the drive, directory, aliases, and
 environment variables as they were prior to any unterminated SETLOCAL.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.73. SHIFT - Shift batch parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Allows the use of more than 127 parameters in a batch file.

 Format:     SHIFT [n ]

             n :  Number of positions to shift.

 Usage:

 SHIFT is provided for compatibility with older batch files, where it was used
 to access more than 10 parameters.  Take Command supports 128 parameters (%0
 to %127), so you may not need to use SHIFT for batch files running exclusively
 under JP Software command processors.

 SHIFT moves each of the batch file parameters n positions to the left.  The
 default value for n is 1.  SHIFT 1 moves the parameter in %1 to position %0,
 the parameter in %2 becomes %1, etc.  You can reverse a SHIFT by giving a
 negative value for n (i.e., after SHIFT -1, the former %0 is restored, %0
 becomes %1, %1 becomes %2, etc.).

 SHIFT also affects the parameters %n$ (command-line tail) and %# (number of
 command arguments).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.74. START - Start application in new session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Start a program in another session or window.

 Format:     START ["program title "] [/B[G] /C /DOS[=optfile ] /F[G] /FS /I
             /ICON=iconfile /INV /K /L /LA /LD /LH /MAX /MIN /N /PGM progname
             /PM /POS=x,y,width,height /TTY /WAIT /WIN /WIN3[=optfile ]
             /WIN3S[=optfile ]] [command ]

             program title :  Title to appear on title bar.
             optfile :  Option settings file.
             iconfile :  Name of icon (.ICO ) file.
             progname :  Program name (not the session name).
             path :  Startup directory.
             command :  Command to be executed.

             /B[G] (background session)      /LH (local history list)
             /C(lose when done)              /MAX(imized)
             /DOS (DOS session)              /MIN(imized)
             /F[G] (foreground session)      /N(o command processor)
             /FS (full screen)               /PGM (program name)
             /I(nherit environment)          /PM (PM application)
             /ICON (.ICO file)               /POS(ition of window)
             /INV(isible)                    /TTY (run in TCMD window)
             /K(eep when done)               /WAIT(for session to finish)
             /L(ocal lists)                  /WIN (dowed session)
             /LA (local aliases)             /WIN3 (Windows enhanced mode)
             /LD (local dir history)         /WIN3S (Windows standard mode)

 See also:  DETACH.

 Usage:

 START is used to begin a new OS/2 session, and optionally run a program in
 that session.  If you use START with no parameters, it will begin a new Take
 Command session.  If you add a command, START will begin a new session or
 window and execute that command.

 The program title, if it is included, will appear on the title bar, and on the
 OS/2 Window List.  The program title must be enclosed in quotation marks and
 cannot exceed 60 characters.  If the program title is omitted, the program
 name will be used as the title.

 START offers a large number of switches to control the session you start.  In
 most cases you need only a few switches to accomplish what you want.  The list
 below summarizes the most commonly used START options, and how you can use
 them to control the way a session is started:

        /MAX, /MIN, and /POS allow you to start an application in a maximized
        window, a minimized window, or a window with a specified position and
        size.  The default is to let the operating system choose the position
        and size of the window.

        /C allows you to close the session when the command is finished (the
        default for DOS and OS/2 Presentation Manager sessions); /K allows you
        to keep the session open and go to a prompt (the default for OS/2
        character mode sessions).

        /BG and /FG allow you to start the session in the background (does not
        respond to keystrokes until selected) or foreground (responds to
        keystrokes until deselected).  /FG is the default if /DOS, /FS, /WIN,
        or /PM is used; otherwise, /BG is the default.

        /FS and /WIN control whether a character-mode session is started in
        full-screen or windowed mode.

 START determines the application type automatically and starts the session in
 the appropriate mode:  OS/2, Windows, DOS, full-screen, windowed, or
 Presentation Manager.

 START gives you some flexibility in determining the session mode. For example,
 if the command is the name of a batch file (either a .BTM or .CMD file), you
 can use the /FS or /WIN options to run the batch file as part of a new
 command-line (4OS2 or CMD.EXE) session in either full-screen or windowed mode.

 However, you cannot start a session in a mode that is inappropriate for the
 application type.  A DOS application cannot be run as part of a Presentation
 Manager session, for example, even if you use the /PM switch. Invalid or
 conflicting options will be ignored. Take Command will always attempt to run
 the command in the appropriate type of session.

 If the program is a DOS application or .BAT file, Take Command will start a
 new DOS session to run the program or batch file. The DOS session will close
 itself automatically as soon as the program or batch file ends, unless /K is
 used.  If you want the session to wait for a keystroke before it closes
 itself, you can use the syntax:

          [c:\] start /DOS command ^^ pause

 (Because the caret [^] is the default Take Command for OS/2 escape character,
 two carets must be used in order to pass one on to 4DOS, where the caret is
 the command separator.)

 If you want to start a DOS command-line session you can use the command:

          [c:\] start /DOS

 You can specify settings for DOS and Windows sessions by using a settings
 options file, and loading it with the /DOS=, /WIN3=, or /WIN3S= option.  This
 allows you to start DOS and Windows sessions with specific settings without
 creating a desktop object and modifying the settings manually.  Before using
 this capability you should read the description of it under /DOS= (below) very
 carefully, since errors in the settings file can occasionally hang your
 system.

 Options:

    /BG         (BackGround session) The session is started as a background
                session. /BG may be abbreviated to /B.

    /C          (Close) The session or window is closed when the application
                ends.

    /DOS[=filename] (DOS session) Start a DOS session.

                If you include the =filename, OS/2 will load DOS settings from
                the specified file.

                Starting a session with specific DOS settings is an
                undocumented feature which was implemented within OS/2 with
                little error checking.  It is included in START because it
                substantially eases a complex task, but you must experiment
                carefully to ensure that the settings you select will work
                properly on the systems on which you plan to use them.
                Incorrect settings may be ignored, but they may also hang your
                session or stop the entire system.  Be sure your experiments
                are not conducted while critical tasks are in process.

                Each line in the file must have a name, an equal sign [=], and
                a value.  The names are those shown in OS/2's DOS Settings
                dialog box.  Do not use spaces on either side of the equal
                sign.

                The names in the DOS Settings dialog box will vary depending on
                the device drivers and other settings in your CONFIG.SYS file,
                though many are available on all systems.  You must ensure that
                the names you use are valid for the systems on which you use
                them.  For example, if you replace IBM's COM.SYS and VCOM.SYS
                with different communications drivers, the COM_ settings will
                probably not be valid for the new drivers.  If you have a
                settings file which contains settings defined by a particular
                driver, and use it on a system where the corresponding driver
                is not loaded, the results are undefined.

                The values in your settings file must be numeric for settings
                which show a numeric value under DOS Settings (e.g.,
                DOS_FILES=30), and must be text strings for settings shown with
                a string (e.g., DOS_SHELL=C:\4DOS.COM C:\4DOS /P).  Strings
                should be entered without trailing blanks.  For values shown as
                multiple choice on the DOS Settings page you must specify a
                numeric value, typically "0" for Off and 1 for On (e.g.,
                DOS_HIGH=1).  Items with choices other than Off and On may use
                different values, or may not work at all; experimentation is
                usually required to find out what works.  Attempting to use
                strings for choice items (e.g., DOS_HIGH=ON) will not work, and
                can hang your system.  This is due to the internal operation of
                OS/2, and is not a problem in Take Command.

                A typical DOS settings file might look like this:

                                        DOS_FILES=30
                                        DOS_HIGH=1
                                        DOS_SHELL=C:\4DOS\4DOS.COM C:\4DOS /P
                                        MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS=0
                                        VIDEO_FASTPASTE=1

                You can include comments in a settings file by beginning any
                line with a colon [:].

    /FG         (ForeGround session) Start the session as the foreground
                session.  /FG may be abbreviated to /F.

    /FS         (Full Screen) Start the session as a full-screen session.

    /I          (Inherit environment) Inherit the default environment specified
                in CONFIG.SYS, if any, rather than the current environment.

    /ICON=filename: Use the specified icon file.  If you don't use /ICON, Take
                Command will look for an .ICO file with the same file name and
                in the same directory as the program file.  Some versions of
                OS/2 may ignore this option and use the default icon for the
                session.  If you encounter this problem, check whether an
                update to OS/2 has been released which addresses it.

    /INV        (Invisible) Start the session or window as invisible.  No icon
                will appear and the session will only be accessible through the
                Window List.

    /K          (Keep session or window at end) The session or window continues
                after the application program ends.  Use the EXIT command to
                end the session.

    /L          (Local lists) Start Take Command with local alias, history, and
                directory history lists.  This option combines the effects of
                /LA, /LD, and /LH (below).

    /LA         (Local Alias list) Start Take Command with a local alias list.
                See ALIAS for information on local and global aliases.

    /LD         (Local Directory history) Start Take Command with a local
                directory history list.  See Directory History Window for more
                information.

    /LH         (Local History list) Start Take Command with a local history
                list. See Command History and Recall for information on local
                and global history lists.

    /MAX        (Maximized) Start the session or window maximized.

    /MIN        (Minimized) Start the session or window minimized.

    /N          Start an OS/2 program directly, without a command processor.
                The command cannot be an internal command or batch file. This
                is the default for PM applications.

    /PGM        (Program name) The string following this option is the program
                name.  The first quoted string on the line will be used as the
                session and task list title, and not as the program name.

    /PM         (Presentation Manager) Start a program in the PM session.

    /POS        (Position) Start the window at the specified screen position.
                The syntax is /POS=x, y, width, height where the values are
                specified in pixels or pels.  x and y refer to the position of
                the bottom left corner of the window relative to the bottom
                left corner of the screen.

                /POS will not be effective for any application which sets its
                own screen size and position.  Because Take Command itself is
                such an application, /POS will have no effect when starting
                another Take Command session.

    /TTY        Run an OS/2 console-mode program or a DOS program in the Take
                Command window.  /TTY will only work with applications that get
                their keyboard input from STDIN and write to STDOUT and/or
                STDERR.  For more details see Starting Character-Mode
                Applications.  Take Command always waits for applications
                started with /TTY to finish before returning to the prompt.

    /WAIT       Wait for the new session or window to finish before continuing.
                Cannot be used with /WIN3 or /WIN3S.

    /WIN        (Windowed) Start the session in a window.

    /WIN3[=filename] (Windows enhanced mode) Run the program in an
                enhanced-mode Windows 3.x session.  The session will run
                seamless (on the OS/2 desktop).  To start a Windows application
                in full-screen mode, use /FS rather than /WIN3.  You can
                include an equal sign and the name of an options file to set
                options for the specific session and application (see /DOS=
                above for details).  The setting names in the file should be
                taken from those shown in OS/2's WIN-OS/2 Settings dialog box.

    /WIN3S[=filename] (Windows standard mode) Equivalent to /WIN3, but runs the
                program in standard mode rather than enhanced mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.75. SHRALIAS - Load or unload SHRALIAS.EXE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Load or unload SHRALIAS.EXE, which saves shared aliases, history,
             and directory history between Take Command sessions.

 Format:     SHRALIAS [/U]

             /U(nload)

 See also:  ALIAS, Command History and Recall, and the Directory History
 Window.

 Usage:

 If you select a global alias, history, or directory history list for Take
 Command you can share the list(s) among all copies of Take Command running in
 any session.  However, when you close all Take Command sessions the memory for
 these global lists is released, and new, empty lists are created the next time
 you start Take Command.

 SHRALIAS retains one or more of these lists in memory even when no Take
 Command session is running, and makes the information in the retained list(s)
 available to the next Take Command session that is started. This allows you to
 keep your aliases, command history, and directory history between Take Command
 sessions (as long as OS/2 is not restarted).

 Actual retention of the shared lists is handled by the SHRALIAS.EXE program.
 The internal SHRALIAS command is used to load and unload SHRALIAS.EXE.
 (SHRALIAS.EXE is distributed as part of Take Command, and must be located in
 your Take Command directory, or a directory on your PATH.)

 To load SHRALIAS.EXE, enter the SHRALIAS command with no parameters:

          [c:\] shralias

 SHRALIAS.EXE runs as a "detached" process, which means it does not have a
 screen display, accept keyboard input, or appear on the OS/2 window list.  It
 is shut down automatically when OS/2 shuts down.  You can also unload
 SHRALIAS.EXE manually, with SHRALIAS /U:

          [c:\] shralias /u

 Once SHRALIAS.EXE is unloaded any shared alias, history, and directory history
 lists will be released when the last copy of Take Command terminates.

 Do not attempt to load or unload the SHRALIAS.EXE program directly -- it must
 be managed with the SHRALIAS command.

 You may find it convenient to invoke SHRALIAS from your TCSTART file.  If you
 do, once SHRALIAS.EXE is loaded additional attempts to reload it (for example,
 when a second or subsequent Take Command session runs TCSTART) will be
 ignored, and will display the informational message "SHRALIAS already loaded".
 Similarly, if you attempt to unload SHARLIAS.EXE with the SHRALIAS /U command
 and it has not been loaded, Take Command will display the message "SHRALIAS
 not loaded".

 SHRALIAS must be invoked from a Take Command session which uses at least one
 global list.  If you invoke it from a session where the alias list, history
 list, and directory history list are all local, it will not be able to find
 any shared memory to retain, and will display an error.

 Option:

    /U      (Unload) Unload SHRALIAS.EXE from memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.76. TEE - "Tee" pipe fitting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Copy standard input to both standard output and a file.

 Format:     TEE [/A] file...

             file :  One or more files that will receive the "tee-d" output.

             /A(ppend)

 See also:  Y and the redirection options.

 Usage:

 TEE is normally used to "split" the output of a program so that you can see it
 on the display and also save it in a file.  It can also be used to capture
 intermediate output before the data is altered by another program or command.

 TEE gets its input from standard input (usually the piped output of another
 command or program), and sends out two copies:  one goes to standard output,
 the other to the file or files that you specify.  TEE is not likely to be
 useful with programs which do not use standard output, because these programs
 cannot send output through a pipe.

 For example, to search the file DOC for any lines containing the string "Take
 Command", make a copy of the matching lines in 4.DAT, sort the lines, and
 write them to the output file 4O.DAT:

          [c:\] find "Take Command" doc | tee 4.dat | sort > 4o.dat

 If you are typing at the keyboard to produce the input for TEE, you must enter
 a Ctrl-Z to terminate the input.

 When using TEE with a pipe under Take Command, the programs on the two ends of
 the pipe run simultaneously, not sequentially as in 4DOS.

 See Piping for more information on pipes.

 Option:

    /A      (Append) Append the output to the file(s) rather than overwriting
            them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.77. TEXT - Display text in batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display a block of text in a batch file.

 Format:     TEXT
                .
                .
                .
             ENDTEXT

 See also:  ECHO, SCREEN, SCRPUT, and VSCRPUT.

 Usage:

 TEXT can only be used in batch files.

 The TEXT command is useful for displaying menus or multi-line messages.  TEXT
 will display all subsequent lines in the batch file until terminated by
 ENDTEXT.  Both TEXT and ENDTEXT must be entered as the only command on the
 line.

 To redirect the entire block of text, use redirection on the TEXT command
 itself, but not on the actual text lines or the ENDTEXT line.  No environment
 variable expansion or other processing is performed on the lines between TEXT
 and ENDTEXT; they are displayed exactly as they are stored in the batch file.

 You can use a CLS or COLOR command to set the screen color before executing
 the TEXT command.

 The following batch file fragment displays a simple menu:

          @echo off & cls
          screen 2 0
          text
          Enter one of the following:
          1 - Spreadsheet
          2 - Word Processing
          3 - Utilities
          endtext


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.78. TIME - Set the system time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display or set the current system time.

 Format:     TIME [hh [:mm [:ss ]]] [AM | PM]

             hh :  The hour (0 - 23).
             mm :  The minute (0 - 59).
             ss :  The second (0 - 59).

 See also:  DATE.

 Usage:

 If you don't enter any parameters, TIME will display the current system time
 and prompt you for a new time.  Press Enter if you don't wish to change the
 time; otherwise, enter the new time:.

          [c:\] time
          Thu  Dec 22, 1994  9:30:10
          New time (hh:mm:ss):

 TIME defaults to 24-hour format, but you can optionally enter the time in
 12-hour format by appending "a", "am", "p", or "pm" to the time you enter.

 For example, to enter the time as 9:30 am:

          [c:\] time 9:30 am

 OS/2 adds the system time and date to the directory entry for every file you
 create or modify.  If you keep both the time and date accurate, you will have
 a record of when you last updated each file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.79. TIMER - Start or stop a stopwatch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    TIMER is a system stopwatch.

 Format:     TIMER [ON] [/1 /2 /3 /S]

             ON:  Force the stopwatch to restart

             /1 (stopwatch #1)           /3 (stopwatch #3)
             /2 (stopwatch #2)           /S(plit)

 Usage:

 The TIMER command turns a system stopwatch on and off.  When you first run
 TIMER, the stopwatch starts:

          [c:\] timer
          Timer 1 on:  12:21:46

 When you run TIMER again, the stopwatch stops and the elapsed time is
 displayed:

          [c:\] timer
          Timer 1 off:  12:21:58
          Elapsed time: 0:00:12.06

 There are three stopwatches available (1, 2, and 3) so you can time multiple
 overlapping events.  By default, TIMER uses stopwatch #1.

 The smallest interval TIMER can measure depends on the operating system you
 are using, your hardware, and the interaction between the two.  However, it
 should never be greater than .06 second.  The largest interval is 23 hours, 59
 minutes, 59.99 seconds.

 Options:

    /1      Use timer #1 (the default).
    /2      Use timer #2.
    /3      Use timer #3.
    /S      (Split) Display a split time without stopping the timer.  To
            display the current elapsed time but leave the timer running:

                                [c:\] timer /s
                                Timer 1 elapsed: 0:06:40.63

    ON:     Start the timer regardless of its previous state (on or off).
            Otherwise the TIMER command toggles the timer state (unless /S is
            used).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.80. TITLE - Set window title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Change the window title.

 Format:     TITLE "title"

             title: The new window title.

 See also:  ACTIVATE and WINDOW.

 Usage:

 TITLE changes the text that appears in the caption bar at the top of the Take
 Command window.  It is included for compatibility with traditional
 character-mode command processors (like CMD.EXE). You can also change the
 window title with the WINDOW command or the ACTIVATE command.

 The title text must be enclosed in double quotes.  The quotes will not appear
 as part of the actual title.

 To change the title of the current window to "Take Command Test":

          [c:\] title "Take Command Test"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.81. TYPE - Display a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display the contents of the specified file(s).

 Format:     TYPE [/A:[[-]rhsda] /L /P] file...

             file :  The file or list of files that you want to display.

             /A:(ttribute select)
             /L(ine numbers)
             /P(ause)

 See also:  LIST.

 File Selection:

 Supports extended wildcards, ranges, multiple file names, and include lists.

 Usage:

 The TYPE command displays a file.  It is normally only useful for displaying
 ASCII text files.  Executable files (.COM and .EXE ) and many data files may
 be unreadable when displayed with TYPE because they include non-alphanumeric
 characters.

 To display the files MEMO1 and MEMO2:

          [c:\] type /p memo1 memo2

 You can press Ctrl-S to pause TYPE's display and then any key to continue.

 You will probably find LIST to be more useful for displaying files. However,
 the TYPE /L command used with redirection is useful if you want to add line
 numbers to a file.

 Options:

    /A      (Attribute select) Select only those files that have the specified
            attribute(s) set.  Preceding the attribute character with a hyphen
            [-] will select files that do not have that attribute set.  The
            colon [:] after /A is required.  The attributes are:

                          R  Read-only
                          H  Hidden
                          S  System
                          D  Subdirectory
                          A  Archive

            If no attributes are listed at all (e.g., TYPE /A: ...), TYPE will
            select all files and subdirectories including hidden and system
            files.  If attributes are combined, all the specified attributes
            must match for a file to be selected.  For example, /A:RHS will
            select only those files with all three attributes set.

    /L      (Line numbers) Display a line number preceding each line of text.

    /P      (Pause) Prompt after displaying each page.  Your options at the
            prompt are explained in detail under Page and File Prompts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.82. UNALIAS - Remove aliases ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Remove aliases from the alias list.

 Format:     UNALIAS [/Q] alias...
                or
             UNALIAS *

             alias :  One or more aliases to remove from memory.

             /Q(uiet)

 See also:  ALIAS and ESET.

 Usage:

 Take Command maintains a list of the aliases that you have defined. The
 UNALIAS command will remove aliases from that list.  You can remove one or
 more aliases by name, or you can delete the entire alias list by using the
 command UNALIAS *.  For example, to remove the alias DDIR:

          [c:\] unalias ddir

 To remove all the aliases:

          [c:\] unalias *

 Options:

    /Q      (Quiet) Prevents UNALIAS from displaying an error message if one or
            more of the aliases does not exist.  This option is most useful in
            batch files, for removing a group of aliases when some of the
            aliases may not have been defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.83. UNSET - Remove environment variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Remove variables from the environment.

 Format:     UNSET  [/Q] name...
                or
             UNSET *

             name :  One or more variables to remove from the environment.

             /Q(uiet)

 See also:  ESET and SET.

 Usage:

 UNSET removes one or more variables from the environment.  For example, to
 remove the variable CMDLINE:

          [c:\] unset cmdline

 If you use the command UNSET *, all of the environment variables will be
 deleted:

          [c:\] unset *

 UNSET is often used in conjunction with the SETLOCAL and ENDLOCAL commands in
 order to clear the environment of variables that may cause problems for some
 applications.

 For more information on environment variables, see the SET command and the
 general discussion of the environment.

 Use caution when removing environment variables, and especially when using
 UNSET *.  Many programs will not work properly without certain environment
 variables; for example, Take Command uses PATH and CDPATH.

 Options:

    /Q      (Quiet) Prevents UNSET from displaying an error message if one or
            more of the variables does not exist.  This option is most useful
            in batch files, for removing a group of variables when some of the
            variables may not have been defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.84. VER - Display version levels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display the current command processor and operating system
             versions.

 Format:     VER [/R]

             /R(evision level)

 Usage:

 Version numbers consist of a one-digit major version number, a period, and a
 one- or two-digit minor version number.  The VER command displays both version
 numbers:

          [c:\] ver
          Take Command for OS/2 1.0   OS/2 Version is 3.0

 Option:

    /R      (Revision level) Display the Take Command and OS/2 internal
            revision levels, plus your Take Command serial number and
            registered name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.85. VERIFY - Disk write verification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Enable or disable disk write verification or display the
             verification state.

 Format:     VERIFY [ON | OFF]

 Usage:

 OS/2 maintains an internal verify flag.  When the flag is on, OS/2 attempts to
 verify each disk write by making sure that the data written to the disk can be
 read back successfully into the computer.  It does not compare the data
 written with the data on disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.86. VOL - Display drive label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display disk volume label(s).

 Format:     VOL [d :] ...

             d:  The drive or drives to search for labels.

 Usage:

 Each disk may have a volume label, created when the disk is formatted or with
 the external LABEL command.  Also, every floppy disk formatted with DOS
 version 4.0 or above or with OS/2 has a volume serial number.

 The VOL command will display the volume label and, if available, the volume
 serial number of a disk volume.  If the disk doesn't have a volume label, VOL
 will report that it is "unlabeled."  If you don't specify a drive, VOL
 displays information about the current drive:

          [c:\] vol
          Volume in drive C: is MYHARDDISK

 If available, the volume serial number will appear after the drive label or
 name.

 To display the disk labels for drives A and B:

          [c:\] vol a: b:
          Volume in drive A: is unlabeled
          Volume in drive B: is BACKUP_2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.87. VSCRPUT - Display text in color vertically ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Display text vertically in the specified color.

 Format:     VSCRPUT row col [BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg text

             row :  Starting row number.
             col :  Starting column number.
             fg :  Foreground text color.
             bg :  Background text color.
             text :  The text to display.

 See also:  SCRPUT.

 Usage:

 VSCRPUT writes text vertically on the screen rather than horizontally. Like
 the SCRPUT command, it uses the colors you specify to write the text.  VSCRPUT
 can be used for simple graphs and charts generated by batch files.  It always
 leaves the cursor in its current position.

 The row and column are zero-based, so on a standard 25 line by 80 column
 display, valid rows are 0 - 24 and valid columns are 0 - 79.  You can also
 specify the row and column as offsets from the current cursor position.  Begin
 the value with a plus sign [+] to move down the specified number of rows or to
 the right the specified number of columns before displaying text, or with a
 minus sign [-] to move up or to the left.

 VSCRPUT checks for a valid row and column, and displays a "Usage" error
 message if either value is out of range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.88. WINDOW - Change the window state or title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Minimize or maximize the current window, restore the default
             window size, or change the window title.

 Format:     WINDOW [MIN | MAX | RESTORE | /POS=x,y,width,height | "title "]

             title :  A new title for the window.

             /POS(ition)

 Usage:

 WINDOW is used to control the appearance and title of the current window.
 WINDOW MIN reduces the window to an icon, WINDOW MAX enlarges it to its
 maximum size, and WINDOW RESTORE returns the window to its default size and
 location on the desktop.

 You can use the /POS option to set the location and size of the window on the
 desktop.  The row and column values of the /POS option select the window's
 origin (from the bottom left of the screen) while the width and height values
 determine its size.

 If you specify a new title, the title text must be enclosed in double quotes.
 The quotes will not appear as part of the actual title.

 Option:

    /POS    (Position) Set the window screen position and size.  The syntax is
            /POS=x, y, width, height, where the values are specified in pixels
            or pels.  x and y refer to the position of the bottom left corner
            of the window relative to the bottom left corner of the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.89. Y - "Y" pipe fitting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Purpose:    Copy standard input to standard output, and then copy the
             specified file(s) to standard output.

 Format:     Y file ...

             file :  The file or list of files to send to standard output.

 See also:  TEE.

 Usage:

 The Y command copies input from standard input (usually the keyboard) to
 standard output (usually the screen).  Once the input ends, the named files
 are appended to standard output.

 For example, to get text from standard input, append the files MEMO1 and MEMO2
 to it, and send the output to MEMOS:

          [c:\] y memo1 memo2 > memos

 The Y command is most useful if you want to add redirected data to the
 beginning of a file instead of appending it to the end.  For example, this
 command copies the output of DIR, followed by the contents of  the file
 DIREND, to the file DIRALL:

          [c:\] dir | y dirend > dirall

 If you are typing at the keyboard to produce input text for Y, you must enter
 a Ctrl-Z to terminate the input.

 When using Y with a pipe you must take into account that the programs on the
 two ends of the pipe run simultaneously, not sequentially as they would under
 4DOS.

 See Piping for more information on pipes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Using Take Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command is both a collection of commands and a set of features which make
your computer easier to use.  This section explains the Take Command features
that are not directly related to individual commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Conventions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This information about conventions that are used throughout Take Command:

    Colors and color names
    Color-coded directories
    Keys and key names

These topics are combined here so that they will be easy to find when you need
to refer to them.  You will find cross references to this section throughout
the help system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.1. Colors and Color Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use color names in several of the directives in the TCMDOS2.INI file
and in many commands. The general form of a color name is:

    [BRIght] fg ON [BRIght] bg

where fg is the foreground or text color, and bg is the background color.

The available colors are:

        Black    Blue    Green    Red
        Magenta  Cyan    Yellow   White

Color names and the word BRIght may be shortened to the first 3 letters.

You can also specify colors by number instead of by name.  The numbers are most
useful in potentially long INI file directives like ColorDIR.  Take Command
recognizes these color numbers:

        0 - Black       8 - Gray (bright black)
        1 - Blue        9 - Bright blue
        2 - Green      10 - Bright green
        3 - Cyan       11 - Bright cyan
        4 - Red        12 - Bright red
        5 - Magenta    13 - Bright magenta
        6 - Yellow     14 - Bright yellow
        7 - White      15 - Bright white

Use one number to substitute for the [BRIght] fg portion of the color name, and
a second to substitute for the [BRIght] bg portion.  For example, instead of
bright cyan on blue you could use 11 on 1 to save space in a ColorDir
specification.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.2. Color-Coded Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DIR command can display each file name in a different color, depending on
the file's extension.

To choose the DIR display colors, you must either use the SET command to create
an environment variable called COLORDIR, or use the ColorDir directive in your
.INI file.  If you do not use the COLORDIR variable or the ColorDir directive,
DIR will use the default screen colors.

If you use both the COLORDIR variable and the ColorDir directive, the
environment variable will override the settings in your .INI file.  You may
find it useful to use the COLORDIR variable for experimenting and then set
permanent directory colors with the ColorDir directive.

The format for both the COLORDIR environment variable and the ColorDir
directive in the .INI file is:

        ext... :ColorName; ...

where "ext" is a file extension (which may include wildcards) or one of the
following file types:

        DIRS      Directories
        RDONLY    Read-only files
        HIDDEN    Hidden files
        SYSTEM    System files
        ARCHIVE   Files modified since the last backup

and "ColorName" is any valid color name (see Colors).

Unlike most color specifications, the background portion of the color name may
be left out for directory colors.  If you don't specify a background color, DIR
will use the current screen background color.

For example, to display the .COM and .EXE files in red on the current
background, the .C and .ASM files in bright cyan on the current background, and
the read-only files in bright green on white (this should be entered on one
line):

        [c:\] set colordir=com exe:red;c asm:bri cyan;rdonly:bri gre on whi

Extended wildcards (for example "BA[KXC]" for .BAK, .BAX, and .BAC files) can
be used in directory color specifications.

You can specify files with any extension using the * wildcard, and files with
no extension using a space.  For example, the following specification displays
files with no extension in red, .TXT files in blue, and all other files in
green:

        [c:\] set colordir= :red;txt:blu;*:gre

If the extension or type of a file matches an extension or type listed in your
color specification, the remainder of the colors are ignored for that file.
You may need to take this into account in determining the order of extensions
and file types in your COLORDIR setting.  For example, you might try this
setting to display all .COM and .EXE files in red, and all other files whose
extension starts with a "C" in green:

        [c:\] set colordir=c*:green;com exe:red

However in this case the .COM files will be displayed in green, because they
match the "c*", and the ".com" later on the line is ignored.  To correct this
problem, change the line to read:

        [c:\] set colordir=com exe:red;c*:green


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.3. Keys and Key Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Key names are used to define keystroke aliases, and in several TCMDOS2.INI
directives. The format of a key name is the same in both uses:

        [Prefix-]Keyname

The key prefix can be left out, or it can be any one of the following :

        Alt       followed by A - Z, 0 - 9, F1 - F12, or Bksp
        Ctrl      followed by A - Z, F1 - F12, Tab, Bksp, Enter,
                  Left, Right, Home, End, PgUp, PgDn, Ins, or Del
        Shift     followed by F1 - F12 or Tab.

The possible key names are:

        A - Z     Enter     PgDn
        0 - 9     Up        Home
        F1 - F    Down      End
        Esc       Left      Ins
        Bksp      Right     Del
        Tab       PgUp

All key names must be spelled as shown.  Alphabetic keys can be specified in
upper-case or lower-case.  You cannot specify a punctuation key.

The prefix and key name must be separated by a dash [-]. For example:

        Alt-F10   This is okay
        Alt F10   The space will cause an error

If you prefer, you can use a numeric value instead of a key name. Use the ASCII
code for an ASCII, extended ASCII, or control character. Use the scan code
preceded by an at sign [@] for extended key codes like F1 or the cursor keys.
For example, use 13 for Enter, or @59 for F1.  In general, you will find it
easier to use the names described above rather than key numbers.

Some keys are intercepted by OS/2 and are not passed on to Take Command.  For
example, Ctrl-S pauses screen output temporarily, and Alt-Tab switches to
another window.  Keys which are intercepted by OS/2 generally cannot be
assigned to aliases or with key mapping directives, because Take Command never
receives these keystrokes and therefore cannot act on them.

You also may not be able to use certain keys if your keyboard is not 100%
IBM-compatible or your keyboard driver does not support them.  For example, on
some systems the F11 and F12 keys are not recognized; others may not support
unusual combinations like Ctrl-Tab.  These problems are rare; when they do
occur, they are usually due to OS/2 and not to any problem with Take Command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. The Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command displays a [c:\] prompt when it is waiting for you to enter a
command.  (The actual text depends on the current drive and directory as well
as your PROMPT settings.)  This is called the command line and the prompt is
asking you to enter a command, an alias or batch file name, or the instructions
necessary to begin an application program.

This section explains the features that will help you while you are typing in
commands, how keystrokes are interpreted when you enter them at the command
line, and how to transfer text between Take Command and other OS/2
applications.

The keystrokes discussed here are the ones normally used by Take Command.  If
you prefer using different keystrokes to perform these functions, you can
assign new ones with key mapping directives in the .INI file.

The command line features documented in this section are:

            Command-Line Editing
            Command History and Recall
            Command History Window
            Filename Completion
            Directory History Window
            Automatic Directory Changes
            Multiple Commands
            Command-Line Length Limits
            Page and File Prompts
            Conditional Commands
            Command Grouping
            Escape Character
            Critical Errors

 Additional command-line features are documented under Redirection and Piping
 and File Selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1. Command-Line Editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The command line works like a single-line word processor, allowing you to edit
any part of the command at any time before you press Enter to execute it, or
Esc to erase it.  The command line extends to a maximum of 1023 characters.

You can use the following editing keys when you are typing a command (the words
Ctrl and Shift mean to press the Ctrl or Shift key together with the other key
named):

Cursor Movement Keys:

                       Move the cursor left one character.
                       Move the cursor right one character.
        Ctrl           Move the cursor left one word.
        Ctrl           Move the cursor right one word.
        Home            Move the cursor to the beginning of the line.
        End             Move the cursor to the end of the line.

 Insert and Delete:

        Ins             Toggle between insert and overtype mode.
        Del             Delete the character at the cursor.
        Backspace       Delete the character to the left of the cursor.
        Ctrl-L          Delete the word or partial word to the left of the
                        cursor.
        Ctrl-R          or Ctrl-Bksp  Delete the word or partial word to the
                        right of the cursor.
        Ctrl-Home       Delete from the beginning of the line to the cursor.
        Ctrl-End        Delete from the cursor to the end of the line.
        Esc             Delete the entire line.
        Ctrl-C          or Ctrl-Break  Cancel the command.
        Enter           Execute the command line.

 Take Command will prompt for additional command-line text when you include the
 escape character as the very last character of a typed command line.  The
 default escape character is the caret [^].  For example:

          [c:\] echo The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy^
          More? sleeping dog. > alphabet

 Sometimes you may want to enter one of the above keystrokes on the command
 line instead of performing the key's usual action.  For example, suppose you
 have a program that requires a Ctrl-R character on its command line.  Normally
 you couldn't type this keystroke at the prompt, because it would be
 interpreted as a "Delete word right" command.

 To get around this problem, use the special keystroke Alt-255. You enter
 Alt-255 by holding down the Alt key while you type 255 on the numeric keypad,
 then releasing the Alt key (you must use the number keys on the numeric pad;
 the row of keys at the top of your keyboard won't work).  This forces Take
 Command to interpret the next keystroke literally and places it on the command
 line, ignoring any special meaning it would normally have as a command- line
 editing or history keystroke.  You can use Alt-255 to suppress the normal
 meaning of command-line editing keystrokes even if they have been reassigned
 with key mapping directives in the .INI file, and Alt-255 itself can be
 reassigned with the CommandEscape directive.

 If you want your input at the command line to be in a different color from
 Take Command's prompts or output, you can use the InputColors directive in
 your .INI file.

 Most of the command-line editing capabilities are also available when a Take
 Command command prompts you for a line of input.  For example, you can use the
 command-line editing keys when DESCRIBE prompts for a file description, when
 INPUT prompts for input from an alias or batch file, or when LIST prompts you
 for a search string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2. Command History and Recall ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Command History Keys:

        Ctrl-          Recall the previous (or most recent) command, or the
                        most recent command that matches a partial command
                        line.
        Ctrl-          Recall the next (or oldest) command, or the oldest
                        command that matches a partial command line.
        F3              Fill in the rest of the command line from the previous
                        command, beginning at the current cursor position.
        Ctrl-D          Delete the currently displayed history list entry,
                        erase the command line, and display the previous
                        matching history list entry.
        Ctrl-E          Display the last entry in the history list.
        Ctrl-K          Save the current command line in the history list
                        without executing it, and then clear the command line.
        Ctrl-Enter      Copy the current command line to the end of the history
                        list even it has not been altered.
        @               As the first character in a line:  Do not save the
                        current line in the history list when it is executed,
                        and do not store it in the CMDLINE environment
                        variable.

 Use the Ctrl- key repeatedly to scan back through the history list.  When the
 desired command appears, press Enter to execute it again.  After you have
 found a command, you can edit it before pressing Enter.

 The history list is "circular".  If you move to the last command in the list
 and then press the Ctrl- one more time, you'll see the first command in the
 list.  Similarly, if you move to the first command in the list and then press
 the Ctrl- one more time, you'll see the last command in the list.

 You can search the command history list to find a previous command quickly
 using command completion.  Just enter the first few characters of the command
 you want to find and press Ctrl-. You only need to enter enough characters to
 identify the command that you want to find.  If you press the Ctrl- key a
 second time, you will see the previous command that matches.  The system will
 beep if there are no matching commands.  The search process stops as soon as
 you type one of the editing keys, whether or not the line is changed.  At that
 point, the line you're viewing becomes the new line to match if you press
 Ctrl- again.

 You can specify the size of the command history list with the History
 directive in the .INI file.  When the list is full, the oldest commands are
 discarded to make room for new ones.  You can also use the HistMin directive
 in the .INI file to enable or disable history saves and to specify the
 shortest command line that will be saved.

 You can prevent any command line from being saved in the history by beginning
 it with an at sign [@].

 Use Ctrl-Enter to organize the history list for repetitive tasks.  Instead of
 searching through the command history for the next command in a sequence, you
 can place all of the necessary commands next to each other and make them
 easier to repeat.

 When you execute a command from the history, that command remains in the
 history list in its original position.  The command is not copied to the end
 of the list (unless you modify it).  If you want each command to be copied to
 the end of the list when it is re-executed, set HistCopy to Yes in your .INI
 file.

 Local and Global Command History

 The command history can be stored in either a "local" or "global" list.

 With a local history list, any changes made to the history will only affect
 the current copy of Take Command.  They will not be visible in other shells,
 or other sessions.

 With a global history list, all copies of Take Command will share the same
 command history, and any changes made to the history in one copy will affect
 all other copies.  Global lists are the default for Take Command.

 You can control the type of history list with the LocalHistory directive in
 the .INI file, and with the /L and /LH options of the START command.

 If you select a global history list you can share the history among all copies
 of Take Command running in any session.  When you close all Take Command
 sessions, the memory for the global history list is released, and a new, empty
 history list is created the next time you start Take Command.

 If you want the command history to be retained in memory even when no Take
 Command session is running, see the SHRALIAS command, which retains the global
 alias, command history, and directory history lists.

 SHRALIAS retains the history list in memory, but cannot preserve it when OS/2
 itself is shut down.  To save the history list when restarting OS/2, you must
 store it in a file and reload it after the system restarts.  For details on
 how to do so, see the HISTORY command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.3. Command History Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Command History Window Keys:

        Ctrl-PgUp       (from the command line)  Open the command history
                        window.
         or Ctrl-PgDn
                       Scroll the display up one line.
                       Scroll the display down one line.
                       Scroll the display left 4 columns.
                       Scroll the display right 4 columns.
        PgUp            Scroll the display up one page.
        PgDn            Scroll the display down one page.
        Ctrl-PgUp       (inside the window)  Scroll the text in the window to
                        the left.
        Ctrl-PgDn       (inside the window)  Scroll the text in the window to
                        the right.
         or End
        Ctrl-D          Delete the selected line from the history list.
        Enter           Execute the selected line.
        Ctrl-Enter      Move the selected line to the command line for editing.
         or Ctrl-Double Click

 You can view the command history in a scrollable command history window, and
 select the command to modify or re-execute from those displayed in the window.
 To activate the command history window press Ctrl-PgUp or Ctrl-PgDn at the
 command line.  A window will appear in the upper right corner of the screen,
 with the command you most recently executed marked with a highlight. (If you
 just finished re-executing a command from the history, then the next command
 in sequence will be highlighted.)

 Once you have selected a command in the history window, press Enter or
 double-click with the mouse to execute it immediately.  Press Ctrl-Enter or
 hold down the Ctrl key while you double-click with the mouse to move the line
 to the prompt for editing (you cannot edit the line directly in the history
 window).

 You can bring up a "filtered" history window by typing some characters on the
 command line, then pressing Ctrl-PgUp or Ctrl-PgDn.  Only those commands
 matching the typed characters will be displayed in the window.

 If you prefer to use the PgUp key to access the command history without having
 to press Ctrl (as in 4OS2), see the SwapScrollKeys directive in TCMDOS2.INI,
 or the corresponding option on the Command Line page of the configuration
 dialogs.  SwapScrollKeys switches the keystroke mapping so that the  and PgUp
 keys manipulate the command history, and Ctrl-, Ctrl-, Ctrl-PgUp, and
 Ctrl-PgDn are used to control the scrollback buffer.  For more details see
 Scrolling and History Keystrokes.

 You can control the position and size of the history window with configuration
 directives in TCMDOS2.INI, or the corresponding items on the Command Line page
 of the configuration dialogs.  You can also change the keys used in the window
 with key mapping directives in the .INI file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4. Scrolling and History Keystrokes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In order to support the scrollback buffer, some Take Command keystrokes are
different from what you may be used to in 4OS2. Take Command uses the up / down
arrows and PgUp / PgDn to scroll the buffer, and the Ctrl-Up and Ctrl-Down
arrow keys for the command history. If you prefer to reverse this arrangement
and use the arrow and PgUp keys to access the command history without having to
press Ctrl (as in 4OS2), see the SwapScrollKeys directive in TCMDOS2.INI, or
the corresponding option on the Command Line page of the configuration dialogs.
(SwapScrollKeys does not affect the use of F6 for the directory history).

You can also change the way any individual key operates with the corresponding
key mapping directive in TCMDOS2.INI.  The directives associated with the
history and scrolling keys are:

    NextHistory
    PrevHistory
    HistWinOpen
    DirWinOpen
    ScrollUp
    ScrollDown
    ScrollPgUp
    ScrollPgDn


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5. Filename Completion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Filename Completion Keys:

        F8                  Get the previous matching filename.
         or Shift-Tab
        F9                  Get the next matching filename.
         or Tab
        Ctrl-Shift-Tab      Keep the current matching filename and display the
                            next matching name immediately after the current
                            one.

 Filename completion can help you by filling in a complete file name on the
 command line when you only remember part of the name.  For example, if you
 know the name of a file begins AU but you can't remember the rest of the name,
 type:

          [c:\] copy au

 and then press the Tab key or F9 key.  Take Command will search the current
 directory for filenames that begin AU and insert the first one onto the
 command line in place of the AU that you typed.

 If this is the file that you want, simply complete the command.  If Take
 Command didn't find the file that you were looking for, press Tab or F9 again
 to substitute the next filename that begins with AU.  When there are no more
 filenames that match your pattern, the system will beep each time you press
 Tab or F9.

 If you go past the filename that you want, press Shift-Tab or F8 to back up
 and return to the previous matching filename. After you back up to the first
 filename, the system will beep each time you press Shift-Tab or F8.

 If you want to enter more than one matching filename on the same command line,
 press Ctrl-Shift-Tab when each desired name appears. This will keep that name
 and place the next matching filename after it on the command line.  You can
 then use Tab (or F9) and Shift-Tab (or F8) to move through the remaining
 matching files.

 The pattern you use for matching may contain any valid filename characters, as
 well as wildcard characters and extended wildcards.  For example, you can copy
 the first matching .TXT file by typing

          [c:\] copy *.txt

 and then pressing Tab.

 If you don't specify part of a filename before pressing Tab, the matching
 pattern will be *..  If you type a filename without an extension, Take Command
 will add "*.*" to the name.  It will also place a "*" after a partial
 extension.  If you are typing a group of file names in an Include Lists, the
 part of the include list at the cursor will be used as the pattern to match.

 When filename completion is used at the start of the command line, it will
 only match directories, executable files, and files with executable extensions
 , since these are the only file names that it makes sense to use at the start
 of a command.  If a directory is found, a "\" will be appended to it to enable
 an automatic directory change.

 Filename Completion Window

 You can also view filenames in a scrollable filename completion window and
 select the file you want to work with.  To activate the window, press F7 or
 Ctrl-Tab at the command line. You will see a window in the upper-right corner
 of the screen, with the names of files that match any partial filename you
 have entered on the command line.  If you haven't yet entered a file name, the
 window will contain the name of all files in the current directory. (Ctrl-Tab
 will work only if your keyboard and keyboard driver support it.  If it does
 not work on your system, use F7 instead.)

 Filename Completion Window Keys:

        F7                  (from the command line)  Open the filename
                            completion window.
         or Ctrl-Tab
                           Scroll the display up one line.
                           Scroll the display down one line.
                           Scroll the display left 4 columns.
                           Scroll the display right 4 columns.
        PgUp                Scroll the display up one page.
        PgDn                Scroll the display down one page.
        Ctrl-PgUp           Go to the beginning of the filename list.
         or Home
        Ctrl-PgDn           Go to the end of the filename list.
         or End
        Enter               Insert the selected filename into the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.6. Directory History Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory History Window Keys:

        F6              Open the directory history window.
                       Scroll the display up one line.
                       Scroll the display down one line.
                       Scroll the display left 4 columns.
                       Scroll the display right 4 columns.
        PgUp            Scroll the display up one page.
        PgDn            Scroll the display down one page.
        Ctrl-PgUp       Go to the beginning of the directory list.
         or Home
        Ctrl-PgDn       Go to the end of the directory list.
         or End
        Ctrl-D          Delete the selected line from the directory list.
        Enter           Change to the selected drive and directory.
        Ctrl-Enter      Move the selected line to the command line for editing.

 Every time you change to a new directory or drive, the current directory is
 recorded in an internal directory history.  The length of the directory
 history is 256 bytes by default; as new entries are added, old entries are
 deleted from the list.  Directory changes are recorded whether you make them
 from the command line with the CD, CDD, PUSHD, or POPD commands, with an
 automatic directory change, or by typing a new drive letter followed by a
 colon. Directories are recorded whether you change from one to another at the
 command line, from within a batch file, or from within an alias. In order to
 conserve space, each directory name is recorded just once in the directory
 history, even if you move into and out of that directory several times.

 You can view the directory history from the scrollable directory history
 window and change to any drive and directory on the list. To activate the
 directory history window, press F6 at the command line.  You can then select a
 new directory with the Enter key or by double-clicking with the mouse.

 You can control the length of the directory history with initialization
 directives and the size of the window with configuration directives in
 TCMDOS2.INI.  You can also use the corresponding items on the Startup and
 Command Line pages of the configuration notebook.  You can change the keys
 used in the window with key mapping directives in the .INI file.

 Local and Global Directory History

 The directory history can be stored in either a local or global list.  A
 global list is the default.

 With a local directory history list, any changes made to the list will only
 affect the current copy of Take Command.  They will not be visible in other
 copies.

 With a global list, all copies of Take Command running in the same session
 will share the same directory history, and any changes made to the list in one
 copy will affect all other copies.

 You can control the type of directory history list with the LocalDirHistory
 directive in TCMDOS2.INI and with the /L and /LD options of the START command.

 There is no fixed rule for deciding whether to use a local or global directory
 history list.  Depending on your work style, you may find it most convenient
 to use one type, or a mixture of types in different sessions or shells.  We
 recommend that you start with the default approach and then modify it if you
 find a situation where the default is not convenient.

 If you select a global directory history you can share the history among all
 copies of Take Command running in any session.  When you close all Take
 Command sessions, the memory for the global directory history is released, and
 a new, empty directory history is created the next time you start Take
 Command.

 If you want the directory history to be retained in memory even when no Take
 Command session is running, see the SHRALIAS command, which retains the global
 alias, command history, and directory history lists.

 SHRALIAS retains the directory history list in memory, but cannot preserve it
 when OS/2 itself is shut down.  Take Command always starts with an empty
 directory history after the system is restarted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.7. Automatic Directory Changes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The automatic directory change feature gives you a quick method for changing
directories.  You can use an automatic directory change in place of the CD or
CDD command.  To do so, simply type the name of the directory you want to
change to at the prompt, with a backslash [\] at the end.  For example:

        [c:\] tcmd\
        [c:\tcmd]

This feature can make directory changes very simple when it's combined with
CDPATH, a list of directories for the CD and CDD commands to search if the
directory you name does not exist below the current directory.  For example,
suppose CDPATH is set to C:\;D:\;E:\, and the directory WIN exists on drive E:.
You can change to this directory with a single word on the command line:

        [c:\tcmd] win\
        [e:\win]

In executing the command shown above, Take Command first looks for a WIN
subdirectory of the current directory, i.e., C:\Take Command\WIN.  If no such
directory exists it looks for a WIN subdirectory in every directory in the
CDPATH list, and changes to the first one it finds.

Internally, automatic directory changes use the CDD command, so the text before
the backslash can include a drive letter, a full path, or a partial path.
Commands like "....\" can be used to move up the directory tree quickly (see
Extended Parent Directory Names). Automatic directory changes save the current
directory, so it can be recalled with a "CDD -" or "CD -" command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.8. Multiple Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can type several commands on the same command line, separated by an
ampersand [&].  For example, if you know you want to copy all of your .TXT
files to drive A: and then run CHKDSK to be sure that drive A's file structure
is in good shape, you could enter the following command:

        [c:\] copy *.txt a: & chkdsk a:

You may put as many commands on the command line as you wish, as long as the
total length of the command line does not exceed 1023 characters.

You can use multiple commands in batch files and alias definitions as well as
from the command line.

If you don't like using the default command separator, you can pick another
character using the SETDOS /C command or the CommandSep directive in the .INI
file.  If you plan to share aliases or batch files between 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT
and Take Command, see 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility for
details about choosing compatible command separators for two or more products.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.9. Command-Line Length Limits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you first enter a command at the prompt or in an alias or batch file, it
can be up to 1,023 characters long.

As Take Command scans the command line and substitutes the contents of aliases
and environment variables for their names, the line usually gets longer.  This
expanded line is stored in an internal buffer which allows each individual
command to grow to 1,023 characters during the expansion process.  In addition,
if you have multiple commands on a single line, during expansion the entire
line can grow to as much as 2,047 characters. If your use of aliases or
environment variables causes the command line to exceed either of these limits
as it is expanded, you will see an error message and the remainder of the line
will not be executed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.10. Page and File Prompts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Several Take Command commands can generate prompts, which wait for you to press
a key to view a new page or to perform a file activity.

When Take Command is displaying information in page mode, for example with a
DIR /P or SET /P command, it displays the message

        Press Esc to Quit or any other key to continue...

At this prompt, you can press Esc, Ctrl-C, or Ctrl- Break if you want to quit
the command.  You can press almost any other key to continue with the command
and see the next page of information.

During file processing, if you have activated prompting with a command like DEL
/P, you will see this prompt before processing every file:

        Y/N/R ?

You can answer this prompt by pressing Y for "Yes, process this file;"  N for
"No, do not process this file;" R for "process the Remainder of the files
without further prompting; or Esc for "cancel further processing for this
argument."  You can also press Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break at this prompt to cancel
the remainder of the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.11. Conditional Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Conditional commands allow you to perform tasks based upon the previous
command's exit code. Many programs return a 0 if they are successful and a
non-zero value if they encounter an error.

If you separate two commands by && (AND), the second command will be executed
only if the first returns an exit code of 0. For example, the following command
will only erase files if the BACKUP operation succeeds:

        [c:\] backup c:\ a: && del c:\*.bak;*.lst

If you separate two commands by || (OR), the second command will be executed
only if the first returns a non-zero exit code. For example, if the following
BACKUP operation fails, then ECHO will display a message:

        [c:\] backup c:\ a: || echo Error in the backup!

All internal commands return an exit code, but not all external programs do.
Conditional commands will behave unpredictably if you use them with external
programs which do not return an explicit exit code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.12. Command Grouping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Command grouping allows you to logically group a set of commands together by
enclosing them in parentheses.  The parentheses are similar in function to the
BEGIN and END block statements in some programming languages.

There are two primary uses for command grouping.  One is to execute multiple
commands in a place where normally only a single command is allowed.  For
example, suppose you want to copy then rename all the .WKQ files on drives A:
and B: using the FOR command.  You could do it like this:

        [c:\] for %drv in (A B) do copy %drv:*.wkq d:\wksave\
        [c:\] for %drv in (A B) do ren %drv:*.wkq *.old

But with command grouping you can do the same thing in one command (enter this
on one line):

        [c:\] for %drv in (A B) do (copy %drv:*.wkq d:\wksave\ &
ren %drv:*.wkq *.sav)

The COPY and REN commands enclosed in the parentheses appear to FOR as if they
were a single command, so both commands are executed for every element of the
FOR list.

You can also use command grouping to redirect input or output for several
commands without repeatedly using the redirection symbols.  For example,
consider the following batch file fragment which uses the ECHO command to
create a file (with >), and to append to the file (with >>):

        echo Data files %_date > filelist
        dir *.dat >> filelist
        echo. >> filelist
        echo Text files %_date >> filelist
        dir *.txt >> filelist

Using command grouping, these commands can be written much more simply.  Enter
this example on one line:

        (echo Data files %_date & dir *.dat & echo. & echo Text files
%_date & dir *.txt) > filelist

The redirection, which appears outside the parentheses, applies to all the
commands within the parentheses.  Because the redirection is performed only
once, the commands will run slightly faster than if each command was entered
separately.  The same approach can be used for input redirection and for
piping.

You can also use command grouping in a batch file or at the prompt to split
commands over several lines.  This last example is like the redirection example
above, but is entered at the prompt.  Take Command displays a "More?" prompt
after each incomplete line:

        [c:\] (echo Data files %_date
        More? dir *.dat
        More? echo.
        More? echo Text files %_date
        More? dir *.txt) > filelist
        [c:\]

You cannot use the DO command in a command group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.13. Escape Character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command recognizes a user-definable escape character.  This character
gives the following character a special meaning; it is not the same as the
ASCII ESC that is often used in ANSI and printer control sequences.

The default escape character is a caret [^].

If you don't like using the default escape character, you can pick another
character using the SETDOS /E command or the EscapeChar directive in your .INI
file.  If you plan to share aliases or batch files between 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT
and Take Command, see 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility for
details about choosing compatible escape characters for two or more products.

Eight special characters are recognized when they are preceded by the escape
character.  The combination of the escape character and one of these characters
is translated to a single character, as shown below.  These are useful for
redirecting codes to the printer, and ^r can be used in keystroke aliases.  The
special characters which can follow the escape character are:

        b   backspace
        c   comma
        e   the ASCII ESC character (ASCII 27)
        f   form feed
        n   line feed
        r   carriage return
        s   space
        t   tab character

 If you follow the escape character with any other character, the escape
 character is removed and the second character is copied directly to the
 command line.  This allows you to suppress the normal meaning of special
 characters (such as ? * / \ | " ` > < and &).

 For example, to send a form feed followed by the sequence ESC Y to the
 printer, you can use this command:

          [c:\] echos ^f^eY > prn


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.14. Critical Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 watches for physical errors during input and output operations.  Physical
errors are those due to hardware problems, such as trying to read a floppy disk
while the drive door is open.

These errors are called critical errors because OS/2, Take Command, or your
application program cannot proceed until the error is resolved.

When a critical error occurs, you will see a popup window asking you to choose
an error handling option.  The message comes from OS/2, and will typically
offer you three choices:

        Return error code to program

            Tell the program that the operation failed.  This option returns an
            error code to Take Command or to the application program that was
            running when the error occurred.  Take Command generally stops the
            current command when an operation fails.

        Retry command or operation

            Choose this option if you have corrected the problem.

        End program/command/operation

            Terminate the program which generated the error.  Use this option
            with caution as it is likely to close Take Command or any other
            program which caused an error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Redirection and Piping ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section covers redirection and piping.  You can use these features to
change how Take Command and some application programs handle input and output.

Internal commands and many external programs get their input from the
computer's standard input device and send their output to the standard output
device.  Some programs also send special messages to the standard error device.
Normally, the keyboard is used for standard input and the video screen for both
standard output and standard error.  Redirection and piping allow you to change
these assignments temporarily.

Redirection

Redirection assigns standard input, standard output, and standard error to a
device like the printer or serial port, or to a file.

Redirection always applies to a specific command, and lasts only for the
duration of that command.  When the command is finished, the assignments for
standard input, standard output, and standard error revert to whatever they
were before the command.

Here are the standard redirection options supported by Take Command for OS/2
(see below for additional redirection options using numeric file handles):

        < filename          To get input from a file or device instead of from
                            the keyboard
        > filename          Redirect standard output to a file or device
        >& filename         Redirect standard output and standard error to a
                            file or device
        >&> filename        Redirect standard error only to a file or device

 To use redirection, place the redirection symbol and filename at the end of
 the command line, after the command name and any parameters.  For example, to
 redirect the output of the DIR command to a file called DIRLIST, you could use
 a command line like this:

          [c:\] dir /b *.dat > dirlist

 You can use both input and output redirection for the same command, if both
 are appropriate:

          [c:\] sort < dirlist > dirlist.srt

 If you redirect the output of a single internal command like DIR, the
 redirection ends automatically when that command is done.  If you start a
 batch file with redirection, all of the batch file's output is redirected, and
 redirection ends when the batch file is done.  Similarly, if you use
 redirection at the end of a command group, all of the output from the command
 group is redirected, and redirection ends when the command group is done.

 If you want to append output to the end of an existing file, rather than
 creating a new file, replace the first ">" in the output redirection symbol
 with ">>" (use >>, >>&, and >>&>).

 When output is directed to a file with >, >&, or >&>, if the file already
 exists, it will be overwritten.  You can protect existing files by using the
 SETDOS /N1 command or the NoClobber directive in the .INI file.

 When output is appended to a file with >>, >>&, or >>&>, the file will be
 created if it doesn't already exist. Setting NoClobber will also prevent the
 creation of a new file.

 You can temporarily override the current setting of NoClobber by using an
 exclamation mark [!] after the redirection symbol. For example, to redirect
 the output of DIR to the file DIROUT, and allow overwriting of any existing
 file despite the NoClobber setting:

          [c:\] dir >! dirout

 Redirection is fully nestable.  For example, you can invoke a batch file and
 redirect all of its output to a file or device.  Output redirection on a
 command within the batch file will take effect for that command only; when the
 command is completed, output will revert to the redirected output file or
 device in use for the batch file as a whole.

 You can use redirection if you need to create a zero-byte file.  To do so,
 enter  >filename as a command, with no actual command before the > character.

 In addition to the standard redirection options, Take Command also supports
 the OS/2 CMD.EXE syntax:

        n>file      Redirect handle n to the named file
        n>&m        Redirect handle n to the same place as handle m

 [n] and [m] are one-digit file handles between 0 and 9.  You may not put any
 spaces between the n and the >, or between the >, &, and m in the second form.
 OS/2 interprets "0" as standard input, "1" as standard output, and "2" as
 standard error.  Handles 3 to 9 will probably not be useful unless you have an
 application which uses those handles for a specific, documented purpose, or
 have opened a file with the %@FILEOPEN variable function and the file handle
 is between 3 and 9.

 Piping

 You can create a "pipe" to send the standard output of one command to the
 standard input of another command:

        command1 | command2             Send the standard output of command1 to
                                        the standard input of command2
        command1 |& command2            Send the standard output and standard
                                        error of command1 to the standard input
                                        of command2

 For example, to take the output of the SET command (which displays a list of
 your environment variables and their values) and pipe it to the SORT utility
 to generate a sorted list, you would use the command:

          [c:\] set | sort

 To do the same thing and then pipe the sorted list to the internal LIST
 command for full-screen viewing:

          [c:\] set | sort | list /s

 The TEE and Y commands are "pipe fittings" which add more flexibility to
 pipes.

 Like redirection, pipes are fully nestable.  For example, you can invoke a
 batch file and send all of its output to another command with a pipe.  A pipe
 on a command within the batch file will take effect for that command only;
 when the command is completed, output will revert to the pipe in use for the
 batch file as a whole.

 Take Command implements pipes by starting a new process for the receiving
 program instead of using temporary files.  The sending and receiving programs
 run simultaneously; the sending program writes to the pipe and the receiving
 program reads from the pipe.  When the receiving program finishes reading and
 processing the piped data, it is ended automatically.

 When you use pipes with Take Command make sure you think about any possible
 consequences that can occur from using a separate process to run the receiving
 program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. File Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most internal commands (like COPY, DIR, etc.) work on a file or a group of
files. Besides typing the exact name of the file you want to work with, you can
use several shorthand forms for naming or selecting files.

The features explained in this section apply to Take Command commands only, and
generally can not be used to pass file names to external programs unless those
programs were specifically written to support these features.

The file selection features are:

    Extended Parent Directory Names
    Wildcards
    Date, Time, and Size Ranges
    Multiple Filenames
    Include Lists
    Executable Extensions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.1. Extended Parent Directory Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command allows you to extend the traditional syntax for naming the parent
directory, by adding additional [.] characters.  Each additional [.] represents
an additional directory level above the current directory.  For example,
.\FILE.DAT refers to a file in the current directory, ..\FILE.DAT refers to a
file one level up (in the parent directory), and ...\FILE.DAT refers to a file
two levels up (in the parent of the parent directory). If you are in the
C:\DATA\FINANCE\JANUARY directory and want to copy the file LETTERS.DAT from
the directory C:\DATA to drive A:

        [C:\DATA\FINANCE\JANUARY] copy ...\LETTERS.DAT A:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.2. Wildcards ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Wildcards let you specify a file or group of files by typing a partial
filename.  The appropriate directory is scanned to find all of the files that
match the partial name you have specified.

There are two wildcard characters, the asterisk [*] and the question mark [?],
plus a special method of specifying a range of permissible characters.

An asterisk [*] in a filename means "any zero or more characters in this
position."  For example, this command will display a list of all files in the
current directory:

        [c:\] dir *.*

If you want to see all of the files with a .TXT extension, you could type this:

        [c:\] dir *.txt

If you know that the file you are looking for has a base name that begins with
ST and an extension that begins with .D, you can find it this way. Filenames
such as STATE.DAT, STEVEN.DOC, and ST.D will all be displayed:

        [c:\] dir st*.d*

With Take Command, you can also use the asterisk to match filenames with
specific letters somewhere inside the name.  The following example will display
any file with a .TXT extension that has the letters AM together anywhere inside
its base name.  It will, for example, display AMPLE.TXT, STAMP.TXT, CLAM.TXT,
and AM.TXT:

        [c:\] dir *am*.txt

A question mark [?] matches any single filename character. You can put the
question mark anywhere in a filename and use as many question marks as you
need.  The following example will display files with names like LETTER.DOC and
LATTER.DAT, and LITTER.DU:

        [c:\] dir l?tter.d??

The use of an asterisk wildcard before other characters, and of the character
ranges discussed below, are enhancements to the standard wildcard syntax, and
are not likely to work properly with software other than Take Command.

"Extra" question marks in your wildcard specification are ignored if the file
name is shorter than the wildcard specification.  For example, if you have
files called LETTER.DOC, LETTER1.DOC, and LETTERA.DOC, this command will
display all three names:

        [c:\] dir letter?.doc

The file LETTER.DOC is included in the display because the "extra" question
mark at the end of "LETTER?" is ignored when matching the shorter name LETTER.

In some cases, the question mark wildcard may be too general.  You can also
specify what characters you want to accept (or exclude) in a particular
position in the filename by using square brackets. Inside the brackets, you can
put the individual acceptable characters or ranges of characters. For example,
if you wanted to match LETTER0.DOC through LETTER9.DOC, you could use this
command:

        [c:\] dir letter[0-9].doc

You could find all files that have a vowel as the second letter in their name
this way.  This example also demonstrates how to mix the wildcard characters:

        [c:\] dir ?[aeiouy]*.*

You can exclude a group of characters or a range of characters by using an
exclamation mark [!] as the first character inside the brackets.  This example
displays all filenames that are at least 2 characters long!except those which
have a vowel as the second letter in their names:

        [c:\] dir ?[!aeiouy]*.*

The next example, which selects files such as AIP, BIP, and TIP but not NIP,
demonstrates how you can use multiple ranges inside the brackets.  It will
accept a file that begins with an A, B, C, D, T, U, or V:

        [c:\] dir [a-dt-v]ip

You may use a question mark character inside the brackets, but its meaning is
slightly different than a normal (unbracketed) question mark wildcard.  A
normal question mark wildcard matches any character, but will be ignored when
matching a name shorter than the wildcard specification, as described above.  A
question mark inside brackets will match any character, but will not be
discarded when matching shorter filenames.  For example:

        [c:\] dir letter[?].doc

will display LETTER1.DOC and LETTERA.DOC, but not LETTER.DOC.  A pair of
brackets with no characters between them [], or an exclamation point and
question mark together [!?],will match only if there is no character in that
position.  For example,

        [c:\] dir letter[].doc

will not display LETTER1.DOC or LETTERA.DOC, but will display LETTER.DOC.  This
is most useful for commands like

        [c:\] dir /I"[]" *.btm

which will display a list of all .BTM files which don't have a description.

You can repeat any of the wildcard characters in any combination you desire
within a single file name.  For example, the following command lists all files
which have an A, B, or C as the third character, followed by zero or more
additional characters, followed by a D, E, or F, followed optionally by some
additional characters, and with an extension beginning with P or Q.  You
probably won't need to do anything this complex, but we've included it to show
you the flexibility of extended wildcards:

        [c:\] dir ??[abc]*[def]*.[pq]*

You can also use the square bracket wildcard syntax to work around a conflict
between HPFS filenames containing semicolons [;], and the use of a semicolon to
indicate an include list . For example, if you have a file on an HPFS drive
named C:\DATA\LETTER1;V2 and you enter this command:

        [c:\] del \data\letter1;v2

you will not get the results you expect.  Instead of deleting the named file,
Take Command will attempt to delete LETTER1 and then V2, because the semicolon
indicates an include list.  However if you use square brackets around the
semicolon it will be interpreted as a filename character, and not as an include
list separator.  For example, this command would delete C:\DATA\LETTER1;V2:

        [c:\] del \data\letter1[;]v2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.3. Date, Time, and Size Ranges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most internal commands which accept wild cards also allow date, time, and size
ranges to further define the files that you wish to work with.  Take Command
will examine the files' time stamps (which record when the file was last
modified), and the files' sizes, to determine which files meet the range
criteria that you specify.

A range begins with the switch character (/), followed by a left square bracket
("[") and a character that specifies the range type:  "s" for a size range, "d"
for a date range, or "t" for a time range.  The "s", "d", or "t" is followed by
a start value, and an optional comma and end value.  The range ends with a
right square bracket ("]").

See the individual range types for details on specifying ranges:

    Size Ranges
    Date Ranges
    Time Ranges

Using Ranges

If you combine two types of ranges, a file must satisfy both ranges to be
included.  For example, /[d2-8-94,2-9-94] /[s1024,2048] means files last
modified between February 8 and February 9, 1994, which are also between 1,024
and 2,048 bytes long.

When you use a date, time, or size range in a command, it should immediately
follow the command name.  Unlike some command switches which apply to only part
of the command line, the range usually applies to all file names specified for
the command.  Any exceptions are noted in the descriptions of individual
commands.

For example, to get a directory of all the *.C files dated October 1, 1994, you
could use this command:

        [c:\] dir /[d10-1-94,+0] *.c

To delete all of the 0-byte files on your hard disk, you could use this
command:

        [c:\] del /[s0,0] *.* /s

And to copy all of the non-zero byte files that you changed yesterday or today
to your floppy disk, you can use this command:

        [c:\] copy /[d-1] /[s1] *.* a:

File systems which support long filenames maintain 3 sets of dates and times
for each file: creation, last access, and last modification.  By default, date
and time ranges work with the last modification time stamp. You can use the
"last access" (a) or "created" (c) time stamp in a date or time range with the
syntax:

        /[da...]
    or  /[dc...]
    or  /[ta...]
    or  /[tc...]

For example, to select files that were last accessed yesterday or today :

        /[da-1]

Date, time, and size ranges can be used with the ATTRIB, COPY, DEL, DESCRIBE,
DIR, EXCEPT, FFIND, FOR, LIST, MOVE, RD, REN, SELECT, and TYPE commands. They
cannot be used with filename completion or in filename arguments for variable
functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.3.1. Size Ranges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Size ranges simply select files whose size is between the limits given.  For
example, /[s10000,20000] selects files between 10,000 and 20,000 bytes long.

Either or both values in a size range can end with "k" to indicate thousands of
bytes, "K" to indicate kilobytes (1,024 bytes), "m" to indicate millions of
bytes, or "M" to indicate megabytes (1,048,576 bytes).  For example, the range
above could be rewritten as /[s10k,20k].

All ranges are inclusive.  Both examples above will match files that are
exactly 10,000 bytes and 20,000 bytes long, as well as all sizes in between.

The second argument of a size range is optional.  If you use a single argument,
like /[s10k], you will select files of that size or larger.  You can also
precede the second argument with a plus sign [+]; when you do, it is added to
the first value to determine the largest file size to include in the search.
For example, /[s10k,+1k] selects files from 10,000 through 11,000 bytes in
size.

Some further examples of size ranges:

        Specification    Selects Files
        /[s0,0]          of length zero(empty)
        /[s1M]           1 megabyte or more in length
        /[s10k,+200]     between 10,000 and 10,200 bytes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.3.2. Date Ranges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Date ranges select files that were created or last modified at any time between
the two dates.  For example, /[d12-1-94,12-5-94] selects files that were last
modified between December 1, 1994, and December 5, 1994.

The time for the starting date defaults to 00:00:00 and the time for the ending
date defaults to 23:59:59.  You can alter these defaults, if you wish, by
including a start and stop time inside the date range.  The time is separated
from the date with an at sign [@].  For example, the range
/[d7-1-94@8:00a,7-3-94@6:00p] selects files that were modified at any time
between 8:00 am on July 1, 1994 and 6:00 PM on July 3, 1994.  If you prefer,
you can specify the times in 24-hour format (e.g., @18:00 for the end time in
the previous example).  The date format and the separator character used in the
time may vary depending upon your country information.

If you omit the second argument in a date range, Take Command substitutes the
current date and time.  For example, /[d10-1-94] selects files dated between
October 1, 1994 and today.

You can use an offset value for either the beginning or ending date, or both.
An offset begins with a plus sign [+] or a minus sign [-] followed by an
integer.  If you use an offset for the second value, it is calculated relative
to the first.  If you use an offset for the first (or only) value, the current
date is used as the basis for calculation.  For example:

        Specification     Selects Files
        /[d10-27-94,+3]   modified between 10-27-94 and 10-30-94
        /[d10-27-94,-3]   modified between 10-24-94 and 10-27-94
        /[d-0]            modified today (from today minus zero days,
                          to today)
        /[d-1]            modified yesterday or today (from today
                          minus one day, to today)
        /[d-1,+0]         modified yesterday (from today minus one
                          day, to zero days after that)

You cannot use offsets in the time portion of a date range (the part after an
at sign), but you can combine a time with a date offset.  For example,
/[d12-8-94@12:00,+2@12:00] selects files that were last modified between noon
on December 8 and noon on December 10, 1994. Similarly, /[d-2@15:00,+1] selects
files last modified between 3:00 PM the day before yesterday and the end of the
day one day after that, i.e., yesterday.  The second time defaults to the end
of the day because no time is given.

OS/2 HPFS partitions keep track of the date a file was created, the date it was
last modified (written), and the date it was last accessed.  You can specify
which date and time is used in a date range by adding a (access), c (creation),
or w (write) after the d in the range.  For example, to select all files
created between February 1, 1994 and February 7, 1994 you would use
/[dc2-1-94,2-7-94]. If you don't specify which date and time to use, Take
Command will use the date the file was last modified (written).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.3.3. Time Ranges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A time range specifies a file modification time without reference to the date.
For example, to select files modified between noon and 2:00 PM on any date, use
/[t12:00p,2:00p].  The times in a time range can either be in 12-hour format,
with a trailing "a" for AM or "p" for PM, or in 24-hour format.

If you omit the second argument in a time range, you will select files that
were modified between the first time and the current time, on any date. You can
also use offsets, beginning with a plus sign [+] or a minus sign [-] for either
or both of the arguments in a time range.  The offset values are interpreted as
minutes.  Some examples:

        Specification      Selects Files
        /[t12:00p,+120]    modified between noon and 2:00
                           PM on any date
        /[t-120,+120]      modified between two hours ago and the
                           current time on any date
        /[t0:00,11:59]     modified in the morning on any date

The separator character used in the time may vary depending upon your country
information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.4. Multiple Filenames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most file processing commands can work with multiple files at one time.  To use
multiple file names, you simply list the files one after another on the command
line, separated by spaces.  You can use wildcards in any or all of the
filenames.  For example, to copy all .TXT and .DOC files from the current
directory to drive A, you could use this command:

        [c:\] copy *.txt *.doc a:

If the files you want to work with are not in the default directory, you must
include the full path with each filename:

        [c:\] copy a:\details\file1.txt a:\details\file1.doc c:

Multiple filenames are handy when you want to match a group of files which
cannot be defined with a single filename and wildcards.  They let you be very
specific about which files you want to work with in a command.

When you use multiple filenames with a command that expects both a source and a
destination, like COPY or MOVE, be sure that you always include a specific
destination on the command line.  If you don't, the command will assume that
the last filename is the destination and may overwrite important files.

Like extended wildcards and include lists, the multiple filename feature will
work with internal commands but not with external programs, unless those
programs have been written to handle multiple file names on the command line.

If you have a list of files to process that's too long to put on the command
line or too time-consuming to type, see the SELECT command for another way of
passing multiple file names to a command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.5. Include Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any internal command that accepts multiple filenames will also accept one or
more include lists.  An include list is simply a group of filenames, with or
without wildcards, separated by semicolons [;].  All files in the include list
must be in the same directory.  You may not add a space on either side of the
semicolon.

For example, you can shorten this command which uses multiple file names:

        [c:\] copy a:\details\file1.txt a:\details\file1.doc c:

to this using an include list:

        [c:\] copy a:\details\file1.txt;file1.doc c:

Multiple filenames and include lists are processed differently by the DIR and
SELECT commands. If you use multiple filenames, all of the files matching the
first filename are processed, then all of the files matching the second name,
and so on.  When you use an include list, all files that match any entry in the
include list are processed together, and will appear together in the directory
display or SELECT list.  You can see this difference clearly if you experiment
with both techniques and the DIR command.  For example,

        [c:\] dir *.txt *.doc

will list all the .TXT files with a directory header, the file list, and a
summary of the total number of files and bytes used. Then it will do the same
for the .DOC files.  However,

        [c:\] dir *.txt;*.doc

will display all the files in one list.

Like extended wildcards and multiple filenames, the include list feature will
work with internal commands, but not with external programs (unless they have
been programmed especially to support it).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.6. Executable Extensions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, when you type a filename (as opposed to an alias or internal command
name) as the first word on the command line, Take Command looks for a file with
that name to execute.  The file's extension may be .EXE or .COM to indicate
that it contains a program, it may have a batch file extension like .BTM, or
the file's contents may indicate that it is executable.

You can add to this default list of extensions, and have Take Command take the
action you want with files that are not executable programs or batch files.
The action taken is always based on the file's extension. For example, you
could start your text editor whenever you type the name of a .DOC file, or
start your database manager whenever you type the name of a .DAT file.

You can use environment variables to define the internal command, external
program, batch file, or alias to run for each defined file extension.  To
create an executable extension use the SET command to create a new environment
variable.  An environment variable is recognized as an executable extension if
its name begins with a period.

The syntax for creating an executable extension is:

        set .ext=command [options]

This tells Take Command to run the specified command whenever you name a file
with the extension .ext at the prompt.  .EXT is the executable file extension;
command is the name of the internal command, external program, alias, or batch
file to run; and [options] are any command-line startup options you want to
specify for the program, batch file, or alias.

For example, if you want to run a word processor called EDITOR whenever you
type the name of a file that has an extension of .EDT, you could use this
command:

        [c:\] set .edt=c:\edit\editor.exe

If the command specified in an executable extension is a batch file or external
program, Take Command will search the PATH for it if necessary. However, you
can make sure that the correct program or batch file is used, and speed up the
executable extension, by specifying the full name including drive, path,
filename, and extension.

To remove an executable extension, use the UNSET command to remove the
corresponding variable.

Once an executable extension is defined, any time you name a file with that
extension the corresponding program, batch file, or alias is started, with the
name of your file passed to it as a parameter.

This example defines B.EXE (the Boxer text editor) as the processor for .C
files:

        [c:\] set .c=c:\boxer\b.exe -Mxyz

Now, if you have a file called HELLO.C and enter the command

        [c:\] hello -i30

This will be expanded to:

        c:\brief\b.exe -Mxyz hello.c -i30

Notice that the text from the .C environment variable is inserted at the
beginning of the line, including any options, followed by the original file
name plus its extension, and then the remainder of the original command line.

In order for executable extensions to work, the command, program, batch file,
or alias must be able to interpret the command line properly.  For example, if
a program you want to run doesn't accept a file name on its command line as
shown in these examples, then executable extensions won't work with that
program.

Executable extensions may include wildcards, so you could, for example, run
your text editor for any file with an extension beginning with T by defining an
executable extension called .T*.  Extended wildcards (e.g., DO[CT] for .DOC and
.DOT files) may also be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Using an OS/2 "Graphical" Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command for OS/2 is a new environment that lets you perform tasks easily
under OS/2. You can use it to execute commands, start applications, and perform
other work at the command line.

In the past you may have accomplished some of these tasks by starting an OS/2
character-mode session to run 4OS2, JP Software's replacement character-mode
command processor.

In either case -- and especially if you are an experienced user of 4OS2 --
you'll find plenty of familiar features in Take Command.  You'll also find a
lot that's new and different.

While Take Command includes most of the command-line, batch file, and other
capabilities provided by 4OS2, and goes well beyond those provided by CMD.EXE,
the OS/2 environment places a few limitations on how Take Command operates.

These limitations are minor -- for example, some keystrokes are interpreted
differently to conform more closely to OS/2 conventions, and there are some
considerations when running batch files or OS/2 aliases designed to work in
character mode under a graphical program like Take Command.  All of these
differences are covered in more detail under Take Command for 4DOS, 4OS2 and
4DOS/NT Users.

Take Command also offers a wide range of new OS/2 PM-related features which are
not available in 4OS2 or CMD.EXE, including:

        *   A built-in scrollback buffer that lets you look back through the
            output from past commands.

        *   A standard OS/2 menu bar for access to many commonly-used Take
            Command features.

        *   A status bar showing memory and resource usage.

        *   A customizable tool bar that gives you quick access to commands and
            applications.

        *   Dialogs (accessible from the Options and Utilities menus) for
            editing environment variables, aliases, file descriptions, and
            startup parameters.

        *   High-speed, dialog-based file and text search (see "Search
            Files/Text" on the Utilities menu).  The new FFIND command gives
            you the same capabilities at the Take Command prompt.

        *   Commands like ACTIVATE, MSGBOX, and QUERYBOX that allow you to use
            OS/2 features and control OS/2 applications from your batch files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. Starting Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command offers several ways to start applications.  (For special
considerations related to starting character-mode applications, see the next
topic).

First, you can simply type the name of any OS/2, DOS, or Windows application at
the Take Command prompt.  As long as the application's executable file is in
one of the standard search directories (see below), Take Command will find it
and start it.  If you type the full path name of the executable file at the
prompt the application will be started even if it is not in one of the standard
search directories.

Take Command offers two methods to simplify and speed up access to your
applications.  One is to create an alias, for example:

        [c:\] alias myapp d:\apps\myapp.exe

You can also use the Tool Bar to start frequently-used applications.  For
example, a tool bar button named MyApp which invokes the command
d:\apps\myapp.exe would accomplish the same thing as the alias shown above.

You can use these methods together.  For example, if you define the alias shown
above you can set up a tool bar button called MyApp and simply use the command
myapp, which would then invoke the previously-defined alias.

You can also start an application by typing the name of a data file associated
with the application.  Take Command will examine the file's extension and run
the appropriate application, based on Take Command's executable extensions.

For additional flexibility, you can also start applications with the START
command.  START provides a number of switches to customize the way an
application is started.

Searching for Applications

When you start an application without specifying a path, Take Command searches
for the application in the current directory and then all directories on the
PATH.  (If you do enter an explicit path, Take Command will only look in the
directory you specified.)

If you enter a file name with no extension, Take Command will search each
directory for a matching .COM, .EXE, .BTM, or .CMD file, then for a file
matching a Take Command executable extension.  If no such file is found Take
Command will move on to the next directory in the search sequence.

Waiting for Applications to Finish

When you start an application from the prompt, normally Take Command does not
wait for the application to finish before returning to the prompt.  This allows
you to continue your work in Take Command while the application is running.
You can change this default behavior for applications started from the prompt,
using the ExecWait directive in TCMDOS2.INI, or the External Programs option on
the Options 2 page of the configuration notebook.  These options do not affect
batch files; Take Command always waits for applications started from batch
files.

Character-mode applications which run inside the Take Command window are an
exception to this rule.  Take Command always waits for such applications to
finish before displaying a new prompt, regardless of the ExecWait setting. For
more information see the next section, on starting character-mode applications.

You can also force Take Command to wait for an application to finish with the
START command with the /WAIT switch.  START can also control many other aspects
of how your applications are started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.1. Starting Character-Mode Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command for OS/2 starts OS/2 "graphical" applications in their own
windows, just as if you had started them from the desktop.  By default, it also
creates a separate character-mode window to run each DOS or OS/2 character mode
application you start.

If you prefer, you can run some DOS and OS/2 character-mode applications within
the Take Command window, using an OS/2 facility called "named pipes."  When you
use this option, output from the application is displayed in the Take Command
window, and no separate window is created.

Because not all applications work properly with named pipes, you must specify
which TTY applications should be run within the Take Command window.  To do so,
use the TTY Apps Dialog (accessible from the Setup menu).  The dialog lets you
specify the application name, whether the application is a DOS or OS/2
character-mode program, and whether or not the application is currently enabled
to run within the Take Command window.  See the section on the TTY Applications
dialog for details of the dialog fields and their meanings.  Information
entered in this dialog is stored in the [TTYApps] section of TCMDOS2.INI.

Once an application is listed in the dialog and enabled, it will run within the
Take Command window whenever you start it from the command line.  However, if
you start the application with the START command (without the /TTY switch, see
below), the program will start in its own window.  The program will also start
in its own window if you start it as the sending or receiving process in a pipe
(see Redirection and Piping for details on pipes).

Your copy of Take Command comes with a list of applications which can be run
within the Take Command window.  The list is visible when you open the dialog,
and is also included in the README.DOC file.  However, all applications in the
list are initially disabled to ensure maximum compatibility.  This prevents
problems if you have a program with the same name as one we tested, but which
is not the same program or the same version.  To enable any application, select
it and check the Enable box.

You can explicitly start any character-mode application within the Take Command
window by using the START command's /TTY switch.  For example:

     start /tty c:\os2\chkdsk.com

Using this switch is the same as entering the application in the TTY
Applications dialog and enabling it.  Using START /TTY is a convenient way to
experiment with your DOS and OS/2 character-mode applications to see if they
are compatible with Take Command's TTY application support. See the START
command in the online help or Reference Manual for additional details.

The only character-mode programs which will run properly within the Take
Command window are those which can handle input and output delivered through
pipes.  In technical terms, these are programs which read all input from the
DOS or OS/2 "standard input" device, and write output to the "standard output"
or "standard error" device.  Applications which use command-line parameters
(rather than user input or "question and answer" dialogs), and which use simple
scrolling (TTY-style) output, are the ones most likely to work well.  Common
applications which run successfully in the Take Command window include program
development software like compilers and linkers, and some command-line
utilities. Programs which use "direct video" output to write complex screen
displays, require dialog with the user, or display graphics, must be run in
their own window.

Many OS/2 character-mode programs meet this test, as do some DOS programs.
However, some programs -- especially DOS programs -- which appear to work this
way may in fact use internal tricks or contain internal restrictions which are
not compatible with piped input and output.

For this reason, you will need to experiment to determine which of your DOS and
OS/2 character-mode applications can run successfully within the Take Command
window.  If you try an application and it does not work, first try using Ctrl-C
or Ctrl-Break to interrupt the application.  If this does not work you can
close the Take Command window with the mouse to clean up the offending
application, then restart Take Command from your desktop.  Applications which
do not run properly within the Take Command window can still be run from Take
Command, but will have to use their own window.

TTY application support for DOS programs depends on the TCNPDOS.COM file
distributed with Take Command.  This file must be available in the same
directory as TCMDOS2.EXE.  If it is not, Take Command will display an error
message if you try to run a DOS application within the Take Command window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. Take Command for 4DOS and 4OS2 Users ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you're a 4DOS or 4OS2 user, many of the features in Take Command will seem
very familiar.  Because the underlying command processing in Take Command is
based on 4DOS and 4OS2, you'll find the features of those products are readily
accessible.  All the commands and switches you're familiar with work the same
way and have the same meaning in Take Command; the only exceptions are those
that don't make sense in the OS/2 GUI environment.

Other 4DOS and 4OS2 features are included in Take Command as well -- you'll
find support for command line editing, command and directory histories,
aliases, .BTM files, and virtually all the other features you already know.

Even if you've never used 4DOS or 4OS2, you'll notice plenty of familiar items
in Take Command.  Like these products, Take Command is compatible with the
default OS/2 command processor (CMD.EXE).

There are also a few differences between running under 4DOS and 4OS2 (or
CMD.EXE) and running under Take Command.

In order to support the Take Command screen scrollback buffer, some Take
Command keystrokes are different from what you may be used to in 4DOS or 4OS2.
See Scrolling and History Keystrokes for more details.

Some command-line editing defaults have also been changed to conform more
closely to OS/2 GUI conventions. In Take Command the default editing mode is
insert, not overstrike, and the default insert-mode cursor is a line, not a
block.  You can change these defaults with statements in TCMDOS2.INI or via the
Command Line page of the configuration notebook, accessible from the Setup
menu. Before using your 4DOS or 4OS2 batch files and aliases under Take
Command, see Using 4OS2 Batch Files and Aliases .

What's new in Take Command are OS/2 GUI-related features, including:

        *   A built-in scrollback buffer that lets you look back through the
            output from past commands.

        *   A standard menu bar for access to many commonly-used Take Command
            features.

        *   A status bar showing memory and resource usage.

        *   A customizable tool bar that gives you quick access to commands and
            applications.

        *   Dialogs, accessible from the Options and Utilities menus, for
            editing environment variables, aliases, file descriptions, and
            startup parameters (the TCMDOS2.INI file).

        *   High-speed, dialog-based file and text search (see "Search
            Files/Text" on the Utilities menu).  The new FFIND command gives
            you the same capabilities at the Take Command prompt.

        *   Commands like ACTIVATE, MSGBOX, and QUERYBOX that allow you to use
            OS/2 features and control OS/2 applications from your batch files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. Using 4OS2 Batch Files and Aliases ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command and 4OS2 aliases are separate and independent; Take Command does
not automatically "inherit" aliases from a previously loaded copy of 4OS2, and
it cannot pass aliases on to a copy of 4OS2 started from the Take Command
prompt.  However, you can load aliases from your Take Command startup batch
file.  These can be the same aliases you use in 4OS2, or a set that is just for
Take Command.

While many of your 4OS2 aliases will work well under Take Command, you'll
probably want to create a separate set of Take Command aliases.  This will
allow you to account for the differences in running character mode and PM
applications, and to create new aliases that take advantage of Take Command
features that are unavailable in 4OS2.

If you want to write aliases or batch files that are used in both Take Command
and 4OS2, but that behave differently in each environment, use the %_DOS
variable to make the distinction.  For example, this batch file fragment uses
the INPUT command to accept a string if it is run under 4OS2, but uses the
GUI-style  QUERYBOX if it is run under Take Command:

        iff "%_dos" == "PM" then
           querybox "Enter your name:  " %%name
        else
           input "Enter your name:  " %%name
        endiff

Aliases and batch files which simply manipulate files or use other internal
commands should work with little or no change under Take Command. However, as a
general rule, you should test any batch file developed for 4OS2 or CMD.EXE
before assuming it will do exactly what you want under Take Command.  Pay
particular attention to batch files which run complex sequences of external
programs.

If you use aliases or batch files to perform a sequence which mixes internal
commands and DOS applications, the sequence may not work the way you expect
under Take Command.  For example, suppose you have an alias that changes the
screen color, starts a DOS application, and then resets the color again.  If
the DOS application is started in a separate window the color changes will not
affect it -- a contingency you probably didn't have to consider when you wrote
the batch file.

You may also find that you want to take advantage of some of the new features
of Take Command to improve your batch files.  For example, the START command
offers additional flexibility in starting applications.  MSGBOX and QUERYBOX
can be used to create OS/2 GUI-style input prompts, and KEYSTACK and ACTIVATE
will help control your OS/2 applications.

Once you get used to these enhancements and minor differences you'll find that
you can use Take Command to manage your system using the same techniques and
features you are already familiar with from your experience with 4OS2 or
CMD.EXE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. The Take Command Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Take Command window has five parts: the title bar, menu bar, toolbar,
command window, and status bar.

The command window accepts your input at the prompt, and displays Take
Command's output. You can use the scroll bars or the up arrow and down arrow
keys to view text that has scrolled off the window.  You can also save the
contents of the command window and scrollback buffer to a file, copy text from
the command window to the clipboard, and copy text from the clipboard or the
command window to the command line.

The next few sections discuss the menu bar, tool bar, and status bar portions
of the Take Command screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Take Command Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Like all OS/2 PM applications, Take Command displays a menu bar along the top
of the Take Command window.  To select a particular menu item, click once on
the menu heading, or use Alt+x where "x" is the underlined letter on the menu
bar (for example, Alt+F displays the File menu).

The items on the menu bar allow you to select a variety of Take Command
features:

            File Menu
            Edit Menu
            Apps Menu
            Setup Menu
            Utilities Menu
            Help Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1. File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File menu allows you to save or print the screen buffer, or exit Take
Command.

 Save to File...
     Saves the contents of the screen buffer to a file.  A Save As dialog box
     appears in which you can enter the name of the file that you wish to use.

 Print...
     Sends the contents of the screen buffer to the printer.  A Print dialog
     box appears in which you can select print options.

 Refresh
     Redraws everything on the Take Command screen.

 Shutdown
     Shuts down OS/2.

 Exit
     Ends the current Take Command session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.2. Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit menu allows you to copy text between the Take Command window and the
OS/2 clipboard.

To use the the Copy command you must first select a block of text with the
mouse or with the Select All command, below.  If you hold down the mouse button
2 while you select a block of text, that block will be copied to the clipboard
automatically when you release the button.

For more information on copying text see Highlighting and Copying Text.

 Cut
     Removes selected text from the command line and copies it to the OS/2
     clipboard.  This option is only available when you have selected text on
     the command line; it does not apply to selections anywhere else on the
     screen, or in the scrollback buffer.

 Copy
     Copies selected text from the Take Command screen buffer to the OS/2
     clipboard.

 Paste
     Copies text from the OS/2 clipboard to the command line.

 Delete
     Removes selected text from the command line.  Like Cut, this option is
     only available when you have selected text on the command line.

 Copy + Paste
     Copies the selected text directly to the command line.

 Select All
     Marks the entire contents of the Take Command screen buffer as selected
     text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.3. Apps Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Apps menu allows you to start applications or switch to the desktop.

 Run
     Displays the run dialogfrom which you can run an application or batch
     file.  Take Command remembers the commands you have run from this dialog
     in the current session.  To select from this list click on the drop-down
     arrow to the right of the "Command Line" field, or press Alt-down arrow
     [Alt-].  To scroll through the list line by line press the down arrow
     [].

 Goto Desktop
     Minimizes the Take Command window and switches the input focus to the OS/2
     desktop.

 OS/2 window
     Starts a windowed OS/2 character mode session.

 DOS window
     Starts a windowed DOS session.

 Win 3.x window
     Starts a seamless WinOS2 window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.4. Setup Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Setup menu lets you control the configuration of Take Command.

 Configure Take Command
     Opens the configuration notebook which you can use to change the
     configuration of Take Command.

 Configure Tool Bar
     Opens the toolbar dialog, to allow you to create or modify buttons for the
     Take Command tool bar.

 Configure TTY Apps
     Opens the TTY applications dialogwhich allows you to configure
     character-mode applications to run inside the Take Command window.

 Font
     Displays a font selection submenu with three choices.  Each choice opens a
     standard dialog box from which you can select the font and type size you
     want:

          Command window:          Selects the font for the main Take Command
                                   window. You can choose any monospaced font
                                   that has been properly installed in OS/2.
                                   Note:  Some fonts will not display all of
                                   the characters used by Take Command.  In
                                   particular, you may need to experiment to
                                   see if the font you choose includes the
                                   proper line drawing characters for the
                                   DRAWBOX, DRAWHLINE, and DRAWVLINE commands.
                                   The standard OS/2 monospaced fonts (Courier,
                                   System Monospaced, and System VIO) do
                                   include these characters when an English
                                   language character set is used.

          Tool bar:                Selects the font for the tool bar.

          Status bar:              Selects the font for the status bar.

 Logging
     Controls logging via a submenu with two choices:

          Command:         Enables or disables command logging using the
                           default TCOS2LOG file or the file you have chosen
                           with the LOG command or the LogName directive in the
                           TCMDOS2.INI file.

          History:         Enables or disables command history logging using
                           the default TCOS2LOG file or the file you have
                           specified with the LOG /H command or the HistLogName
                           directive in the TCMDOS2.INI file.

 Show Tool Bar
     Select this item to enable or disable the Take Command tool bar, which
     appears near the top of the Take Command window.  The tool bar will not
     appear unless at least one item has been defined for it with the Configure
     Tool Bar command, above.

 Show Status Bar
     Select this item to enable or disable the Take Command status bar, which
     appears near the bottom of the Take Command window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.5. Utilities Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Utilities menu invokes dialogs to search for files and text or to set up
Take Command aliases, environment variables, or file descriptions.  It can also
start your editor.

 Search Files/Text
     Opens the search files dialog which lets you search for files or text
     interactively (see FFIND to search from the command line).

 Descriptions
     Opens the descriptions dialog in which you can view and change the
     descriptions of files in any directory available on your system.  See
     DESCRIBE for details on file descriptions.

 Aliases
     Opens the aliases dialog in which you can view and change the list of
     current aliases.  You can also use this window to import aliases from a
     file or save all current aliases in a file.  Any changes you make will
     take effect as soon as you return to Take Command.  For more information
     on aliases see the ALIAS command.

 Environment
     Opens the environment dialog in which you can view and change the current
     environment.  Any changes you make will be immediately recorded in Take
     Command's environment.

 Editor
     Starts the OS/2 E editor or any other editor you have specified with the
     Editor directive in TCMDOS2.INI


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.6. Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Help Index
     Displays the index for the Take Command help.

 General Help
     Displays the table of contents for the Take Command help.

 Keys Help
     Displays help for the Take Command command line.  From this help page you
     can select a subtopic which covers the keystroke information you need
     (e.g. command line editing, command history window, etc.).

 Product Information
     Displays Take Command version, copyright, and license information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Tool Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Take Command screen has an optional Tool Bar that you can use to execute
internal or external commands, aliases, or batch files with the click of a
mouse.

To create buttons for the Tool Bar, select Configure Tool Bar from the Setup
menu.  This selection displays the tool bar dialog.

You can define up to 24 Tool Bar buttons.

When you first install Take Command a sample tool bar is included.  Use the
tool bar dialog to remove or modify any of the sample buttons, or add buttons
of your own.

To enable or disable the Tool Bar, use the ToolBarOn directive in TCMDOS2.INI,
the Tool Bar Enable setting on the Display page in the configuration notebook,
or the Show Tool Bar command in the Setup menu .

The configuration dialog and TCMDOS2.INI settings are modified when you enable
and disable the tool bar from the Setup menu. This preserves the tool bar state
when you close Take Command, and restores it the next time you start a Take
Command session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Take Command screen has an optional Status Bar that shows information about
your system .  To enable or disable the Status Bar, use the StatusBarOn
directive in TCMDOS2 .INI, the Status Bar Enable setting on the Display page in
the configuration notebook, or the Show Status Bar command in the Setup menu.

The configuration dialog and TCMDOS2.INI settings are modified when you enable
and disable the status bar from the Setup menu.  This preserves the tool bar
state when you close Take Command, and restores it the next time you start a
Take Command session.

The Status Bar shows 5 pieces of information:

    The Date, based on the OS/2 clock.
    The Time, based on the OS/2 clock.
    The size of the OS/2 swap file.
    The state of the Caps Lock key on the keyboard.
    The state of the Num Lock key on the keyboard.

If the OS/2 swap file is not stored in the \OS2\SYSTEM directory of the boot
drive, you must use the SwapFilePath directive in TCMDOS2.INI or Take Command
will not be able to display the swap file size in the status bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. Dialogs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Take Command menus invoke several dialog boxes:

    Save To File Dialog
    Print Dialog
    Run Dialog
    Configuration Notebook
    Toolbar Dialog
    TTY Apps Dialog
    Search Files Dialog
    Descriptions Dialog
    Aliases Dialog
    Environment Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.1. Save To File Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This standard "Save As" dialog box allows you to select the file to use to save
the contents of the screen buffer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.2. Print Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dialog allows you to print the contents of the screen buffer.  You can
select the printer to use, the print priority, and the number of copies.

If you have selected some text in the buffer, the Selection checkbox is
automatically marked.  If you leave it marked, Take Command prints only the
selected text.  If you remove the check mark, the entire buffer is printed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.3. Run Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Apps / Run menu leads to the Run Program dialog.  In the Command Line edit
box, you can enter the name of any executable program plus command-line
parameters.  If you click on the arrow to the right of the edit box, the dialog
displays a list of previous commands you have entered during the current Take
Command session.

The Normal, Minimized, and Maximized radio buttons determine the type of window
that will be used for the program.  If you select Minimized, the program will
start as an icon on the desktop or in the Minimized Window Viewer (depending on
your system default location for minimized window icons).  Maximized starts the
program in a full-screen window.  Normal lets the operating system select the
size and position of the program's window.

The Browse button leads to a standard file browser, from which you can select
any executable program.  Your choice will be placed in the Command Line edit
box, and you can add parameters before pressing Enter or selecting OK to run
the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.4. Toolbar Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dialog allows you to define or modify buttons on the tool bar .

Select the button you want to define or modify in the box on the left.

Enter the button's label and the command to be executed when you select the
button in the fields at the bottom of the dialog box.  You can enter multiple
commands in the Command field by separating them with the command separator
character [&].

You can use the Browse button to find a path and filename to be entered at the
beginning of the Command field.

Before entering a command to start an application program, be sure to check
whether the application must be started in a particular directory.  If so, you
should use a CDD command in\ the Command field before the application name, for
example:

        cdd d:\source & d:\os2\apps\epm.exe

If the command line begins with an at-sign [@] it will not be added to the
command history. Otherwise, all commands executed from the tool bar are stored
in the history.

Use the radio buttons to select how you want the command to be executed:

        *   Echo means display the tool bar command on the command line, but do
            not execute it.  You can add additional text to the line if you
            wish, then press Enter to execute the command.  This is the default
            setting.

        *   Echo & Execute means display the tool bar command on the command
            line, then execute it immediately, without waiting for you to press
            Enter.

        *   Execute w/o Echo means execute the tool bar command immediately,
            without waiting for you to press Enter, and without displaying the
            command.

 The Font Size setting applies to all of the buttons on the tool bar. If you
 make the font size too large buttons on the right hand end of the toolbar may
 not be visible even if the Take Command window is expanded to fill the screen.

 If you exit by choosing the OK button, any changes you have made will be saved
 in the TCMDOS2.INI file, and reloaded automatically the next time you start
 Take Command.  If you use the Cancel button, your changes will be discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.5. TTY Apps Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dialog allows you to specify which character-mode applications can be run
within the Take Command window.  If you are not familiar with the issues
involved in running character-mode applications inside the Take Command window,
read the separate section on Starting Character-Mode Applications before using
this dialog.

The list box on the left shows currently defined TTY applications.

The Command field shows the command line for the currently selected
application.  You can specify an executable file name (e.g. CHKDSK.COM), or a
full path name (e.g. C:\OS2\CHKDSK.COM).  If you use a full path name, the
entry will apply only to that specific file.  If you use just the file name,
the entry will apply to any file of that name, regardless of its location.
(For advanced use of this field to name an entire directory of TTY
applications, see the end of this section.)

The OS/2 and DOS radio buttons control whether Take Command treats the
application as a DOS or OS/2 program.

The Enable checkbox enables or disables an application.  If the box is checked,
the application will be run within the Take Command window.  If the box is not
checked, the entry will be ignored.  This allows you to temporarily disable an
application (without removing it from the list) in order to test its
compatibility with Take Command's TTY application support.

Your copy of Take Command comes with a list of applications which can be run
within the Take Command window.  The list is visible when you open the dialog,
and is also included in the README.DOC file. However, all applications in the
list are initially disabled to ensure maximum compatibility.  This prevents
problems if you have a program with the same name as one we tested, but which
is not the same program or the same version.  To enable any application, select
it and check the Enable box.

To modify an entry which is already in the TTY applications list, select the
application in the box on the left and press Enter (or double-click).  Modify
the Command field, the application type (DOS or OS/2), and the Enable checkbox
as desired.

To add a new entry, select the Add button.  Fill in the Command field, set the
application type, and check the Enable button if desired.  You can use the
Browse button to find a path and filename to be entered at the beginning of the
Command field.  After creating a new entry you must press Enter to copy the new
entry to the listbox.  If you do not, the information about the new application
will be discarded.

To delete an entry, select it in the list box, then select the Delete button.

If you exit by choosing the OK button, any changes you have made will be saved
in the [TTYApps] of TCMDOS2.INI, and reloaded automatically the next time you
start Take Command.  If you use the Cancel button, your changes will be
discarded.

In addition to the options described above, you can also enter a path without a
filename in the Command field (e.g. C:\OS2UTILS).  This will tell Take Command
to treat all DOS or OS/2 character-mode programs in the specified directory as
TTY applications.  If you use this option the OS2, DOS, and Enable buttons
apply to all applications in the specified directory.  This approach is useful
if you have many applications of the same type in a single directory, but
before you use it you should review the content of the directory carefully to
be sure all the character-mode programs stored there are compatible with Take
Command's TTY application support.

If you do choose to configure an entire directory for TTY application support,
you can create exceptions by entering specific filenames from that directory
into the dialog as well.  For example, if you enable the directory C:\OS2UTILS
for TTY support, you could also add a listing for C:\OS2UTILS\MYAPP.EXE (or
simply for MYAPP.EXE, with no path), and make sure the Enable box is not
checked for the MYAPP entry. This would prevent MYAPP.EXE from being treated as
a TTY application despite the entry for the directory as a whole.  If you use
this approach, the two listings can appear in any order.

TTY application support for DOS programs depends on the TCNPDOS.COM file
distributed with Take Command.  This file must be available in the same
directory as TCMDOS2.EXE.  If it is not, Take Command will display an error
message if you try to run a DOS application within the Take Command window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.6. Search Files Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Search Files/Text dialog box gives you the same features as the FFIND
command, in dialog form.

Enter the file name or names you wish search in the Files field.  You can use
wildcards and include lists as part of the file name.  To select files from
previous searches in the same Take Command session, click on the down arrow
beside the Files field, or press the up arrow [] or down arrow [] while the
input cursor is in the Files field.  You can also use the Browse button to find
files to include in the search.

Enter the text or hexadecimal values you are searching for in the Text field.

Enter the drive(s) you want to search in the Disks field.

The Match Case box, when it is selected, makes the search case-sensitive.  The
Hex Search option signals that you are searching for hexadecimal values, not
ASCII characters.

If you enable All Lines, every line from every file that contains the search
text will be displayed.  If this option is not enabled, only the first line
from such a file will be displayed.

Unless you enable the Hidden Files option, files with the hidden attribute will
not be included in the search.

The radio buttons in the Search area let you specify where you want to look for
files.

To start the search, press the Find button.  Once the search has started the
Find button changes to a Stop button, which can use to interrupt the search
before it is finished.

Once Take Command has finished searching, you can save the list of matching
files with the Export button.

As you move the cursor over the list of matching files, information about each
file appears below the file list.  If you select one of the matching files in
the list (by double-clicking on it, or selecting it with the cursor and
pressing Enter), Take Command will display another dialog with complete
directory information about the file.  From that dialog you can Run the file
(if it is an executable file, a batch file, or has an executable extension),
display the file with the LIST command, or Edit the file.  When you exit from
LIST or the editor, the original list of matching files will still be
available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.7. Descriptions Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dialog allows you to create, modify, or delete file descriptions (if you
are not familiar with Take Command file descriptions, see the DESCRIBE command
for details).

A list of files in the current directory is shown in the pane on the left side
of the dialog.  As you move the cursor in the pane, the description for the
file (if any) is shown in the Description field.  You can use this field to
edit or create the selected file's description.

After changing a description you must press Enter (or select the OK button and
close the dialog) to record your changes on the disk.  If you do not (for
example, if you change a description, then select another file without first
pressing Enter), your changes will be discarded.

If you click Cancel any changes to the current description are discarded, and
the dialog is closed.  Cancel does not undo previous changes which were saved
by pressing the Enter key as described above.

To delete a description, select the file, move to the description field and
delete all of the description text, then press Enter or click OK.

To work in a different drive or directory, use the Drive and/or Directory
fields on the right side of the dialog to select the desired location.

The dialog automatically includes all files in the list.  To select a specific
group of files of your own choosing, type a new filename in the Filename box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.8. Aliases Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The current list of aliases is shown in the pane on the left of this dialog
box.  As you move the cursor in the pane, the name of the alias under the
cursor is shown in the Name field and its definition is shown in the Value
field.  You can use these fields to edit the alias.

To add a new alias to the list, use the Add button.  The Name and Value fields
will be cleared so you can enter new values in each.  To save the new entry,
switch to a different entry or press Enter.

The Delete button deletes the highlighted alias.

The Import button reads a list of aliases from a file (similar to the ALIAS /R
command).  The Export button writes the current list to a file.

Changes you make in this dialog are not saved in the alias list until you click
the OK button.  If you click Cancel the changes are discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.9. Environment Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The current environment variables are shown in the pane on the left of this
dialog box.  As you move the cursor in the pane, the name of each entry appears
in the Name field and its value appears in the Value field.  You can use these
fields to edit the environment entry.

To add a entry to the list, use the Add button.  The Name and Value fields will
be cleared so you can enter new values in each. To save the new entry, switch
to a different entry or press Enter.

The Delete button deletes the highlighted environment variable.

The Import button reads a list of environment variables from a file (similar to
the SET /R command). The Export button writes the current list to a file.

Changes you make in this dialog are not saved in the environment until you
click the OK button.  If you click Cancel the changes are discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5. Using the Scrollback Buffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command retains the text displayed on its screen in a "scrollback buffer".

You can scroll through this buffer using the mouse and the vertical scroll bar
at the right side of the Take Command window, just as you can in any OS/2 GUI
application.

You can also use the up-arrow [] and down-arrow [] keys to scroll the display
one line at a time from the keyboard, and the PgUp and PgDn keys to scroll one
page at a time.

If you enter text on the command line, Take Command will automatically return
to the bottom of the buffer to display the text.

If you prefer to use the arrow and PgUp keys to access the command history (as
in 4OS2), see the SwapScrollKeys directive in TCMDOS2.INI, or the corresponding
option on the Command Line page of the configuration dialogs.  SwapScrollKeys
switches the keystroke mapping so that the , , and PgUp keys manipulate the
command history, and Ctrl-, Ctrl-, Ctrl-PgUp, and Ctrl-PgDn are used to
control the scrollback buffer.  For more details see Scrolling and History
Keystrokes.

You can set the size of the scrollback buffer on the Display page of the
configuration notebook (available from the Setup menu), or with the
ScreenBufSize directive in TCMDOS2.INI.

To clear the entire scrollback buffer, use the CLS /C command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6. Highlighting and Copying Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

While you are working at the Take Command prompt you can use common keystrokes
to edit commands, and use the OS/2 clipboard to copy text between Take Command
and other applications.

To copy text from the Take Command window to the clipboard, first use the mouse
to highlight the text,  then press Ctrl-Ins, or use the Copy command on the
Edit menu.  You can also mark the text using mouse button 2; in this case the
text will be copied to the clipboard immediately when you release the mouse
button.

To highlight text on the command line use the Shift key in conjunction with the
Left, Right, Ctrl-Left, Ctrl-Right, Home, and End cursor movement keys.  The
Del key will delete any highlighted text on the command line, or you can type
new text to replace the highlighted text.

While the Take Command window contains text, it is not a document window like
those used by word processors and other similar software, and you cannot move
the cursor throughout the window as you can in text processing programs. As a
result, you cannot use the OS/2 shortcut keys like Shift-Left or Shift-Right to
highlight text in the window.  These keys work only at the command line; to
highlight text elsewhere in the window you must use the mouse.  You can also
select all of the text in the Take Command screen buffer by using the Select
All command on the Edit menu.

To copy text from the clipboard to the command line use Shift-Ins, or the Copy
command on the Edit menu.

To paste text from elsewhere in the Take Command window directly onto the
command line, highlight the text with the mouse and press Ctrl-Shift-Ins, or
use the Copy+Paste command on the Edit menu.  This is equivalent to
highlighting the text and pressing Ctrl-Ins followed by Shift-Ins.  It's a
convenient way to copy a filename from a previous DIR or other command directly
to the command line.

You should use caution when pasting text containing carriage return or line
feed characters onto the command line.  If the text you insert contains one of
these characters the command line will be executed just as if you had pressed
Enter.  If you insert multiple lines, the text will be treated just like
multiple lines of commands typed at the prompt.

You can also use OS/2's Drag and Drop facility to paste a filename from another
application onto the command line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.7. Cursor Display on LCD Screens ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you use a laptop or LCD screen and find the "I-Beam" cursor in the Take
Command window difficult to see, use an IBeamCursor = No directive in the
[TakeCommand] section of TCMDOS2.INI to force the use of an arrow cursor in all
parts of the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Batch Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A batch file is a file that contains a list of commands to execute.  Take
Command reads and interprets each line as if it had been typed at the keyboard.
Like aliases, batch files are handy for automating computing tasks.  Unlike
aliases, batch files can be as long as you wish.  Batch files take up separate
disk space for each file, and can't usually execute quite as quickly as
aliases, since they must be read from the disk.

The topics included in this section are:

    .BAT, .CMD, and .BTM Files
    Echoing in Batch Files
    Batch File Line Continuation
    Batch File Parameters
    Automatic Batch Files
    Batch File Compression
    Argument Quoting
    4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility
    REXX Support
    EXTPROC Support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. .BAT, .CMD, and .BTM Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Take Command batch file can run in two different modes.  In the first,
traditional mode, each line of the batch file is read and executed
individually, and the file is opened and closed to read each line.  In the
second mode the batch file is opened once, the entire file is read into memory,
and the file is closed.  The second mode can be 5 to 10 times faster,
especially if most of the commands in the batch file are internal commands.
However, only the first mode can be used for self-modifying batch files (which
are rare), and for batch files larger than 64K bytes.

The batch file's extension determines its mode.  Files with a .BAT or .CMD
extension are run in the slower, traditional mode.  Files with a .BTM extension
are run in the faster, more efficient mode.  You can change the execution mode
inside a batch file with the LOADBTM command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Echoing in Batch Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

By default, each line in a batch file is displayed or "echoed" as it is
executed.  You can change this behavior, if you want, in several different
ways:

Any batch file line that begins with an [@] symbol will not be displayed.

The display can be turned off and on within a batch file with the ECHO OFF and
ECHO ON commands.

The default setting can be changed with the SETDOS /V command or the BatchEcho
directive in the .INI file.

For example, the following line turns off echoing inside a batch file. The [@]
symbol keeps the batch file from displaying the ECHO OFF command:

        @echo off

Take Command also has a command line echo that is unrelated to the batch file
echo setting.  See ECHO for details about both settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Batch File Line Continuation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command will combine multiple lines in the batch file into a single line
for processing when you include the escape character as the very last character
of each line to be combined (except the last).  The default escape character is
a caret [^].  For example:

        [c:\] echo The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy^
        sleeping^
        dog. > alphabet

You cannot use this technique to extend a batch file line beyond the normal
line length limit of 1,023 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Batch File Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Like aliases and application programs, batch files can examine the command line
that is used to invoke them.  The command tail (everything on the command line
after the batch file name) is separated into individual parameters (also called
arguments or batch variables) by scanning for the spaces, tabs, and commas that
separate the parameters.  A batch file can work with the individual parameters
or with the command tail as a whole.

These parameters are numbered from %1 to %127. %1 refers to the first parameter
on the command line, %2 to the second, and so on.  It is up to the batch file
to determine the meaning of each parameter.  You can use quotation marks to
pass spaces, tabs, commas, and other special characters in a batch file
parameter; see Argument Quoting for details.

Parameters that are referred to in a batch file, but which are missing on the
command line, appear as empty strings inside the batch file.  For example, if
you start a batch file and put two parameters on the command line, any
reference in the batch file to %3, or any higher-numbered parameter, will be
interpreted as an empty string.

A batch file can also work with three special parameters: %0 contains the name
of the batch file as it was entered on the command line, %# contains the number
of command line arguments, and %n$ contains the complete command-line tail
starting with argument number n (for example,%3$ means the third parameter and
all those after it).  The default value of n is 1, so %$ contains the entire
command tail.  The values of these special parameters will change if you use
the SHIFT command.

For example, if your batch file interprets the first argument as a subdirectory
name then the following line would move to the specified directory:

        cd %1

Batch files can also use environment variables, internal variables, and
variable functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. Automatic Batch Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each time Take Command starts, it looks for an automatic batch file called
TCSTART.BTM or TCSTART.CMD.  If the TCSTART batch file is not in the same
directory as Take Command itself, you should use the TCSTARTPath directive in
your .INI file to specify its location.  TCSTART is optional, so Take Command
will not display an error message if it cannot find the file.

Whenever an Take Command session ends, it runs a second automatic batch file
called TCEXIT.BTM or TCEXIT.CMD. This file, if you use it, should be in the
same directory as your TCSTART batch file.  Like TCSTART, TCEXIT is optional.
It is not necessary in most circumstances, but it is a convenient place to put
commands to save information such as a history list before Take Command ends,
or LOG the end of the session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6. Batch File Compression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can compress your .BTM files with a program called BATCOMP.EXE, which is
distributed with Take Command.  This program condenses batch files by about a
third and makes them unreadable with the LIST command and similar utilities.
Compressed batch files run at approximately the same speed as regular .BTM
files.

You may want to consider compressing batch files if you need to distribute them
to others and keep your original code secret or prevent your users from
altering them.  You may also want to consider compressing batch files to save
some disk space on the systems where the compressed files are used.

The full syntax for the batch compression program is

        BATCOMP [/O] input file [output file ]

You must specify the full name of the input file, including its extension, on
the BATCOMP command line.  If you do not specify the output file, BATCOMP will
use the same base name as the input file and add a .BTM extension. BATCOMP will
also add a .BTM extension if you specify a base name for the output file
without an extension.  For example, to compress MYBATCH.CMD and save the result
as MYBATCH.BTM, you can use any of these three commands:

        [c:\] batcomp mybatch.cmd
        [c:\] batcomp mybatch.cmd mybatch
        [c:\] batcomp mybatch.cmd mybatch.btm

If the output file (MYBATCH.BTM in the examples above) already exists, BATCOMP
will prompt you before overwriting the file.  You can disable the prompt by
including /O on the BATCOMP command line immediately before the input file
name.  Even if you use the /O option, BATCOMP will not compress a file into
itself.

JP Software does not provide a utility to decompress batch files.  If you use
BATCOMP.EXE, make sure that you also keep a copy of the original batch file for
future inspection or modification.

Each of our command processors includes its own version of BATCOMP.EXE, set up
to run under the corresponding operating system. However, the output produced
by each program is the same, so a batch file compressed with any version of
BATCOMP can be used with any JP Software command processor.

If you plan to distribute batch files to users of different platforms, see
4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7. Argument Quoting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

As it parses the command line, Take Command looks for the ampersand [&] command
separator, conditional commands (|| or &&), white space (spaces, tabs, and
commas), percent signs [%] which indicate variables or batch file arguments to
be expanded, and redirection and piping characters (>, <, or |).

Normally, these special characters cannot be passed to a command as part of an
argument.  However, you can include any of the special characters in an
argument by enclosing the entire argument in single back quotes [`] or double
quotes ["].  Although both back quotes and double quotes will let you build
arguments that include special characters, they do not work the same way.

No alias or variable expansion is performed on an argument enclosed in back
quotes.  Redirection symbols inside the back quotes are ignored. The back
quotes are removed from the command line before the command is executed.

No alias expansion is performed on expressions enclosed in double quotes.
Redirection symbols inside double quotes are ignored. However, variable
expansion is performed on expressions inside double quotes.  The double quotes
themselves will be passed to the command as part of the argument.

For example, suppose you have a batch file CHKNAME.BTM which expects a name as
its first parameter (%1).  Normally the name is a single word.  If you need to
pass a two-word name with a space in it to this batch file you could use the
command:

        [c:\] chkname `MY NAME`

Inside the batch file, %1 will have the value MY NAME, including the space.
The back quotes caused Take Command to pass the string to the batch file as a
single argument.  The quotes keep characters together and reduce the number of
arguments in the line.

When an alias is defined in a batch file or from the command line, its argument
can be enclosed in back quotes to prevent the expansion of replaceable
parameters, variables, and multiple commands until the alias is invoked. See
ALIAS for details.

You can disable and re-enable back quotes and double quotes with the SETDOS /X
command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8. 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT, and Take Command Compatibility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you use two or more of our products, or if you want to share aliases and
batch files with users of different products, you need to be aware of the
differences in three important characters:  the Command Separator (see Multiple
Commands), the Escape Character (see Escape Character), and the Parameter
Character (see Batch File Parameters).

The default values of each of these characters in each product is shown in the
following chart (in this section, <Ctrl-X> stands for the ASCII Ctrl-X
character, numeric value 24.  This character appears on your screen as an
up-arrow [].):

        Character           4DOS Default   4OS2 and Take Command Default

        Command Separator        ^              &
        Escape Character         <Ctrl-X>       ^
        Parameter Character      &              $

In your batch files and aliases, and even at the command line, you can smooth
over these differences in two ways:

        *   Select a consistent set of characters with .INI file configuration
            directives or the SETDOS command.  For example, to set the Take
            Command characters to match 4DOS, use:

                                CommandSep = ^
                                EscapeChar = <Ctrl-X>
                                ParameterChar = &

            in TCMDOS2.INI.

        *   Use internal variables that contain the current special character,
            rather than using the character itself (see + and =).  For example,
            this command:

                                if "%1" == "" (echo Argument missing! ^ quit)

            will only work if the command separator is a caret. However, this
            version works regardless of the current command separator:

                                if "%1" == "" (echo Argument missing! %+ quit)


 The following chart shows the correspondence between the appropriate SETDOS
 command options, .INI file directives, and internal variables:

          Special                 SETDOS   INI File     Internal
          Character               Switch   Directive    Variable

          Command Separator        /C      CommandSep     %+
          Escape Character         /E      EscapeChar     %=
          Parameter Character      /P      ParameterChar  (none)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9. REXX Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

REXX is a a powerful file and text processing language developed by IBM, and
available on many PC and other platforms.  REXX is an ideal extension to the
Take Command batch language, especially if you need advanced string processing
capabilities.

The REXX language is not built into Take Command.  You can use the REXX
provided with OS/2, or Personal REXX for OS/2 (a faster, more capable version
of REXX), developed by Quercus Systems of Saratoga, CA. (Personal REXX is
available from JP Software or directly from Quercus Systems.)

Take Command's REXX support will also work with other REXX processors such as
PMREXX, VX-REXX.  It does not work with IBM's VREXX, because the internal
design of VREXX does not perrmit reliable execution of REXX scripts from
Presentation Manager programs like Take Command.

REXX programs are stored in .CMD files.  When Take Command loads a .CMD file,
it checks to see if the first two characters of the file are "/*"; if so, it
passes the file to the REXX DLL for execution.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10. EXTPROC Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command offers an external processor (EXTPROC) option for batch files that
lets you define an external program to process a particular .CMD file. To
identify a .CMD file to be used with an external processor, place the string
"EXTPROC" as the first word on the first line of the file, followed by the name
of the external program that should be called.  Take Command will start the
program and pass it the name of the .CMD  file and any command-line arguments
that were entered.

For example, suppose GETDATA.CMD contains the following lines:

        EXTPROC D:\DATAACQ\DATALOAD.EXE
        OPEN PORT1
        READ 4000
        DISKWRITE D:\DATAACQ\PORT1\RAW

Then if you entered the command:

        [d:\dataacq] getdata /p17

Take Command would read the GETDATA.CMD file, determine that it began with an
EXTPROC command, read the name of the processor program, and then execute the
command:

        D:\DATAACQ\DATALOAD.EXE D:\DATAACQ\GETDATA.CMD /p17

The hypothetical DATALOAD.EXE program would then be responsible for reopening
the GETDATA.CMD file, ignoring the EXTPROC line at the start, and interpreting
the other instructions in the file. It would also have to respond appropriately
to the command-line parameter entered (/p17).

Do not try to use Take Command as the external processor named on the EXTPROC
line in the .CMD file.  It will interpret the EXTPROC line as a command to
re-open themselves.  The result will be an infinite loop that will continue
until the computer runs out of resources and locks up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. The Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The environment is a collection of information about your computer that every
program receives.  Each entry in the environment consists of a variable name,
followed by an equal sign and a string of text.  You can automatically
substitute the text for the variable name in any command. To create the
substitution, include a percent sign [%] and a variable name on the command
line or in an alias or batch file.

The following environment variables have special meanings in Take Command:

    CDPATH
    CMDLINE
    COLORDIR
    PATH
    PROMPT

Take Command also supports two special types of variables. Internal variables
are similar to environment variables, but are stored internally within Take
Command, and are not visible in the environment.  They provide information
about your system for use in batch files and aliases.  Variable functions are
referenced like environment variables, but perform additional functions like
file handling, string manipulation and arithmetic calculations.

The SET command is used to create environment variables. For example, you can
create a variable named BACKUP like this:

        [c:\] set BACKUP=*.bak;*.bk!;*.bk

If you then type

        [c:\] del %BACKUP

it is equivalent to the following command:

        del *.bak;*.bk!;*.bk

The variable names you use this way may contain any alphabetic or numeric
characters, the underscore character [_], and the dollar sign [$].  You can
force acceptance of other characters by including the full variable name in
square brackets, like this: %[AB##2]. You can also "nest" environment variables
using square brackets.  For example %[%var1] means "the contents of the
variable whose name is stored in VAR1".  A variable referenced with this
technique cannot contain more than 255 characters of information.  Nested
variable expansion can be disabled with the SETDOS /X command.

In Take Command the size of the environment is set automatically, and increased
as needed when you add variables.

The trailing percent sign that was traditionally required for environment
variable names is not usually required in Take Command, which accepts any
character that cannot be part of a variable name as the terminator. However,
the trailing percent can be used to maintain compatibility.

The trailing percent sign is needed if you want to join two variable values.
The following examples show the possible interactions between variables and
literal strings.  First, create two environment variables called ONE and TWO
this way:

        [c:\] set ONE=abcd
        [c:\] set TWO=efgh

Now the following combinations produce the output text shown:

        %ONE%TWOabcdTWO      ("%ONE%" + "TWO")
        %ONE%TWO%abcdTWO     ("%ONE%" + "TWO%")
        %ONE%%TWOabcdefgh    ("%ONE%" + "%TWO")
        %ONE%%TWO%abcdefgh   ("%ONE%" + "%TWO%")
        %ONE%[TWO]abcd[TWO]  ("%ONE%" + "[TWO]")
        %ONE%[TWO]%abcd[TWO] ("%ONE%" + "[TWO]%")
        %[ONE]%TWOabcdefgh   ("%[ONE]" + "%TWO")
        %[ONE]%TWO%abcdefgh  ("%[ONE]" + "%TWO%")

If you want to pass a percent sign to a command, or a string which includes a
percent sign, you must use two percent signs in a row. Otherwise, the single
percent sign will be seen as the beginning of a variable name and will not be
passed on to the command.  For example, to display the string "We're with you
100%" you would use the command:

        echo We're with you 100%%

You can also use back quotes around the text, rather than a double percent
sign.  See Argument Quoting for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. CDPATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CDPATH tells Take Command where to search for directories specified by the CD,
CDD, and PUSHD commands and in automatic directory changes.  (_CDPATH can be
used as an alternative to CDPATH if you are using Microsoft Bookshelf, which
uses a CDPATH variable for its own purposes.)

CDPATH is composed of a list of directories, separated by semicolons [;].  If
CD, CDD, PUSHD, or an automatic directory change can't locate the specified
directory to change to, they will append the specified directory name to each
directory in CDPATH and attempt to change to that drive and directory, until
the first match or the end of the CDPATH argument.  This allows you to use
CDPATH as a quick way to find commonly used subdirectories which have unique
names.  For example, if you are currently in the directory
C:\WP\LETTERS\JANUARY and you'd like to change to D:\SOFTWARE\UTIL, you could
enter the command:

        [c:\wp\letters\january] cdd d:\software\util

However, if the D:\SOFTWARE directory is listed in your CDPATH variable, and is
the first directory in the list with a UTIL subdirectory, you can simply enter
the command

        [c:\wp\letters\january] cdd util

to change to D:\SOFTWARE\UTIL.

You can create CDPATH with the SET command.  For example, if you want the
directory change commands to search the C:\DATA directory, the D:\SOFTWARE
directory, and the root directory of drive E:\ for the subdirectories that you
name, you should create CDPATH with this command:

        [c:\] set cdpath=c:\data;d:\software;e:\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. CMDLINE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CMDLINE is the fully expanded text of the currently executing command line.
CMDLINE is set just before invoking any .COM, .EXE, .BTM, or .CMD file.  If a
command line is prefaced with an "@" to prevent echoing, it will not be put in
CMDLINE, and any previous CMDLINE variable will be removed from the
environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3. COLORDIR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COLORDIR controls directory display colors used by DIR.  See Color-Coded
Directories for a complete description of the format of this variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.4. COMSPEC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

COMSPEC contains the full path and name of the character-mode command
processor.  Take Command uses it to start character-mode OS/2 sessions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5. PATH (variable) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PATH is a list of directories that Take Command will search for executable
files that aren't in the current directory.  PATH may also be used by some
application programs to find their own files.  See the PATH command for a full
description of this variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.6. PROMPT (variable) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PROMPT defines the command-line prompt.  It can be set or changed with the
PROMPT command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Internal Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Internal variables are special variables built into Take Command to provide
information about your system.  They are not actually stored in the
environment, but can be used in commands, aliases, and batch files just like
any environment variable.  The values of these variables are stored internally
in Take Command, and cannot be changed with the SET, UNSET, or ESET command.
However, you can override any of these variables by defining a new variable
with the same name.

The list below gives a one-line description of each variable, and a
cross-reference which selects a short help topic on that variable.  Most of the
variables are simple enough that the one-line description is sufficient.
However, for those variables marked with an asterisk [*], the cross-reference
topic contains some additional information you may wish to review.  You can
also obtain help on any variable with a HELP variable name command at the
prompt (this is why each variable has its own topic, in addition to its
appearance in the list below).

See the discussion after the variable list for some additional information, and
examples of how these variables can be used.

The variables are:

Hardware status

        _CPU            CPU type (86, 186, 200, 386, 486, 586)
        _NDP            Coprocessor type (0, 87, 287, 387)

 Operating system and software status

        _ANSI           ANSI status (always 1)
        _BOOT           Boot drive letter, without a colon
        _CI             Current cursor shape in insert mode
        _CO             Current cursor shape in overstrike mode
        _CODEPAGE       Current code page number
        _COUNTRY        Current country code
        _DOS            * Operating system (OS2, PM, DOS, etc.)
        _DOSVER         * Operating system version (2.1, 3.0, etc.)
        _KBHIT          Keystroke waiting in buffer (0 or 1)
        _MOUSE          Mouse driver flag (always 1)

 Command processor status

        _4VER           Take Command for OS/2 version (1.0, 1.01, etc.)
        _ANSI           ANSI status (0 or 1)
        _BATCH          Batch nesting level
        _BATCHLINE      Current line number in current batch file
        _BATCHNAME      Name of current batch file
        _DNAME          Name of file used to store file descriptions
        _HLOGFILE       Current history log file name
        _LOGFILE        Current log file name
        _PID            Take Command for OS/2 process ID (numeric)
        _PIPE           Whether running in a pipe (0 or 1)
        _PPID           Parent process ID (numeric)
        _PTYPE          OS/2 process type (PM)
        _SHELL          Shell level (0, 1, 2, ...)
        _SID            Current OS/2 session ID
        _TRANSIENT      * Transient shell flag (0 or 1)
        _WINTITLE       Current window title

 Screen and color

        _BG             Background color at cursor position
        _COLUMN         Current cursor column
        _COLUMNS        Screen width
        _FG             Foreground color at cursor position
        _ROW            Current cursor row
        _ROWS           Screen height

 Drives and directories

        _CWD            Current drive and directory (d:\path)
        _CWDS           Current drive and directory with trailing \ (d:\path\)
        _CWP            Current directory (\path)
        _CWPS           Current directory with trailing \ (\path\)
        _DISK           Current drive (C, D, etc.)
        _LASTDISK       Last possible drive (E, F, etc.)

 Dates and times

        _DATE           * Current date (mm-dd-yy)
        _DAY            Day of the month (1 - 31)
        _DOW            Day of the week (Mon, Tue, Wed, etc.)
        _DOY            Day of the year (1 - 366)
        _HOUR           Hour (0 - 23)
        _MINUTE         Minute (0 - 59)
        _MONTH          Month of the year (1 - 12)
        _SECOND         Second (0 - 59)
        _TIME           * Current time (hh:mm:ss)
        _YEAR           Year (1980 - 2099)

 Error codes

        ?               * Exit code, last external program
        _?              * Exit code, last internal command
        _SYSERR         * Last OS/2 error code

 Compatibility

        =               * Substitutes escape character
        +               * Substitutes command separator

 Examples

 You can use these variables in a wide variety of ways depending on your needs.
 Here are just a couple of examples.

 Store the current date and time in a file, then save the output of a DIR
 command in the same file:

          echo Directory as of %_date %_time > dirsave
          dir >> dirsave

 Call another batch file if today is Monday:

          if "%_DOW" == "Mon" call c:\cleanup\weekly.bat


═══ 8.1.  ? - Exit code, last external program ═══

? contains the exit code of the last external command.  Many programs return a
"0" to indicate success and a non-zero value to signal an error.  However, not
all programs return an exit code.  If no explicit exit code is returned, the
value of %? is undefined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. _? - Exit code, last internal command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_? contains the exit code of the last internal command.  It is set to "0" if
the command was successful, "1" if a usage error occurred, "2" if another
command processor error or an operating system error occurred, or "3" if the
command was interrupted by Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break.  You must use or save this
value immediately, because it is set by every internal command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. = - Substitutes escape character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

= returns the current escape character.  Use this variable, instead of the
actual escape character, if you want your batch files and aliases to work
regardless of how the escape character is defined.  For example, if the escape
character is a caret [^] (the default in Take Command for OS/2) both of the
commands below will send a form feed to the printer.  However, if the escape
character has been changed,  the first command will send the string "^f" to the
printer, while the second command will continue to work as intended.

        echos ^f > prn
        echos %=f > prn


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. + - Substitutes command separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

+ returns the current command separator.  Use this variable, instead of the
actual command separator, if you want your batch files and aliases to work
regardless of how the command separator is defined.  For example, if the
command separator is an ampersand [&] (the default in Take Command for OS/2)
both of the commands below will display "Hello" on one line and "world" on the
next. However, if the command separator has been changed the first command will
display "Hello & echo world", while the second command will continue to work as
intended.

        echo Hello & echo world
        echo Hello %+ echo world


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. _4VER - Take Command for OS/2 version (1.0, 1.01, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_4VER is the current Take Command for OS/2 version (for example, "1.0"). The
version number is in decimal and uses the appropriate decimal separator for
your country (to allow numeric comparisons with the IF and IFF)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. _ANSI - ANSI status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_ANSI returns "1" if Take Command's ANSI support is enabled, or "0" if it is
disabled.  For more details on ANSI support see SETDOS /A, the ANSI directive
in TCMDOS2.INI, or the ANSI Reference.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.7. _BATCH - Batch nesting level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_BATCH is the current batch nesting level.  It is "0" if no batch file is
currently being processed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.8. _BATCHLINE - Current line number in current batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_BATCHLINE is the current line number in the current batch file.  It is "-1" if
no batch file is currently being processed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.9. _BATCHNAME - Name of current batch file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_BATCHNAME is the full pathname of the current batch file.  It is an empty
string if no batch file is currently being processed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.10. _BG - Background color at cursor position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_BG is a string containing the first three characters of the screen background
color at the current cursor location (for example, "Bla").


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.11. _BOOT - Boot drive letter, without a colon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_BOOT is the boot drive letter, without a colon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.12. _CI - Current cursor shape in insert mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CI is the current shape of the cursor in insert mode, as a percentage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.13. _CO - Current cursor shape in overstrike mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CO is the current shape of the cursor in overstrike mode, as a percentage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.14. _CODEPAGE - Current code page number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CODEPAGE is the current code page number (see CHCP).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.15. _COLUMN - Current cursor column ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_COLUMN is the current cursor column (for example, "0" for the left side of the
screen).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.16. _COLUMNS - Screen width ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_COLUMNS is the current number of screen columns (for example, "80").


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.17. _COUNTRY - Current country code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_COUNTRY is the current country code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.18. _CPU - CPU type (86, 186, 200, 386, 486, 586) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CPU is the CPU type:

        386     i386
        486     i486
        586     Pentium


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.19. _CWD - Current drive and directory (d:\path) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CWD is the current working directory in the format d:\pathname.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.20. _CWDS - Current drive and directory with trailing backslash (d:\path\) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CWDS has the same value as CWD, except it ends the pathname with a backslash
[\].


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.21. _CWP - Current directory (\path) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CWP is the current working directory in the format \pathname.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.22. _CWPS - Current directory with trailing backslash (\path\) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_CWPS has the same value as CWP, except it ends the pathname with a backslash
[\].


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.23. _DATE - Current date (mm-dd-yy) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DATE contains the current system date, in the format mm-dd-yy (U.S.), dd-mm-yy
(Europe), or yy-mm-dd (Japan).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.24. _DAY - Day of the month (1 - 31) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DAY is the day of the month (1 to 31).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.25. _DISK - Current drive (C, D, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DISK is the current disk drive, without a colon (for example, "C").


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.26. _DNAME - Name of file used to store file descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DNAME is the name of the file used to store file descriptions.  It can be
changed with the DescriptionName directive in TCMDOS2.INI or the SETDOS /D
command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.27. _DOS - Operating system (OS2, PM, DOS, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DOS is the operating system and command processor type.  Each JP Software\
command processor returns a different value, as follows:

        Product                     Returns

        Take Command for OS/2       "PM" (for OS/2 Presentation Manager)
        4DOS                        "DOS"
        4OS2                        "OS2"
        4DOS/NT                     "NT"
        Take Command/16             "WIN"
        Take Command/32             "WIN95" (under Windows 95) or "WIN32"
                                    (under Windows NT)

 This variable is useful if you have batch files running in more than one
 environment, and need to take different actions depending on the underlying
 operating environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.28. _DOSVER - Operating system version (2.1, 3.0, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DOSVER is the current operating system version (for example, "3.0").  The
version number is in decimal and uses the appropriate decimal separator for
your country (to allow numeric comparisons with the IF and IFF commands.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.29. _DOW - Day of the week (Mon, Tue, Wed, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DOW is the first three characters of the current day of the week ("Mon",
"Tue", "Wed", etc.).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.30. _DOY - Day of the year (1 - 366) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_DOY is the day of the year (1 to 366).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.31. _FG - Foreground color at cursor position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_FG is a string containing the first three letters of the screen foreground
color at the current cursor position (for example, "Whi").


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.32. _HLOGFILE - Current history log file name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_HLOGFILE  returns the name of the current history log file (or an empty string
if LOG /H is OFF).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.33. _HOUR - Hour (0 - 23) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_HOUR is the current hour (0 - 23).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.34. _KBHIT - Keystroke waiting in buffer (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_KBHIT returns 1 if one or more keystrokes are waiting in the keyboard buffer,
or 0 if the keyboard buffer is empty.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.35. _LASTDISK - Last possible drive (E, F, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_LASTDISK is the last valid drive letter, without a colon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.36. _LOGFILE - Current log file name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_LOGFILE  returns the name of the current log file (or an empty string if LOG
is OFF).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.37. _MINUTE - Minute (0 - 59) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_MINUTE is the current minute (0 - 59).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.38. _MONTH - Month of the year (1 - 12) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_MONTH is the month of the year (1 to 12).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.39. _MOUSE - Mouse driver flag (always 1 in Take Command for OS/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_MOUSE always returns "1" in Take Command for OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.40. _NDP - Coprocessor type (0, 87, 287, 387) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_NDP is the coprocessor type:

        0       no coprocessor is installed
        387     80387, 80486DX, or Pentium


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.41. _PID - Take Command for OS/2 process ID (numeric) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_PID is the current process ID number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.42. _PIPE - Whether running in a pipe (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_PIPE returns 1 if the current process is running inside a pipe or 0 otherwise.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.43. _PPID - Parent process ID (numeric) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_PPID is the process ID number of the parent process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.44. _PTYPE - OS/2 process type (PM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_PTYPE is the current OS/2 process type.  It is included for compatibility with
4OS2, but will always return PM in Take Command for OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.45. _ROW - Current cursor row ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_ROW is the current cursor row (for example, "0" for the top of the screen).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.46. _ROWS - Screen height ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_ROWS is the current number of screen rows (for example, "25").


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.47. _SECOND - Second (0 - 59) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_SECOND is the current second (0 - 59).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.48. _SHELL - Shell level (0, 1, 2, ...) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_SHELL is the current shell nesting level.  The primary shell is level "0", and
each subsequent secondary shell increments the level by 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.49. _SID - Current OS/2 session ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_SID is the session ID number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.50. _SYSERR - Last OS/2 error code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_SYSERR is the error code of the last operating system error. You will need a
technical or programmer's manual to understand these error values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.51. _TIME - Current time (hh:mm:ss) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_TIME contains the current system time in the format hh:mm:ss. The separator
character may vary depending upon your country information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.52. _TRANSIENT - Transient shell flag (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_TRANSIENT is "1" if the current shell is transient (started with a /C, see
Startup Options for details), or "0" otherwise.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.53. _WINTITLE - Current window title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_WINTITLE returns the title of the current window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.54. _YEAR - Year (1980 - 2099) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

_YEAR is the current year (1980 to 2099).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Variable Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Variable Functions

Variable functions are like internal variables, but they take one or more
arguments (which can be environment variables or even other variable functions)
and they return a value.

The list below gives a one-line description of each function, and a
cross-reference which selects a separate help topic on that function.  A few of
the variables are simple enough that the one-line description is sufficient,
but in most cases you should check for any additional information in the
cross-referenced explanation if you are not already familiar with a function.
You can also obtain help on any function with a HELP @functionname command at
the prompt.

See the discussion after the function list for additional information and
examples.

The variable functions are:

System status

        @DOSMEM[b|k|m]                      Size of largest free memory block
        @READSCR[row,col,len]               Read characters from the screen

 Drives and devices

        @CDROM[d:]                          CD-ROM drive detection (0 or 1)
        @DEVICE[name]                       Character device detection
        @DISKFREE[d:,b|k|m]                 Free disk space
        @DISKTOTAL[d:,b|k|m]                Total disk space
        @DISKUSED[d:,b|k|m]                 Used disk space
        @FSTYPE[d:]                         File system type (FAT, HPFS, CDFS,
                                            etc.)
        @LABEL[d:]                          Volume label
        @READY[d:]                          Drive ready status (0 or 1)
        @REMOTE[d:]                         Remote (network) drive detection (0
                                            or 1)
        @REMOVABLE[d:]                      Removable drive detection (0 or 1)

 Files

        @ATTRIB[filename,[nrhsda]]          File attribute test (0 or 1)
        @DESCRIPT[filename]                 File description
        @EXETYPE[filename]                  Executable file type (DOS, PM, WIN,
                                            etc.)
        @FILEAGE[filename]                  File age (date and time)
        @FILECLOSE[n]                       Close a file
        @FILEDATE[filename]                 File date
        @FILEOPEN[filename,mode]            Open a file
        @FILEREAD[n [,length]]              Read next line from a file
        @FILES[filename [,-nrhsda]]         Count files matching a wildcard
        @FILESEEK[n,offset,start]           Move a file pointer to an offset
        @FILESEEKL[n,offset,start]          Move a file pointer to a line
                                            number
        @FILESIZE[filename,b|k|m]           Size of files matching a wildcard
        @FILETIME[filename]                 File time
        @FILEWRITE[n,text]                  Write next line to a file
        @FILEWRITEB[n,length,string]        Write bytes from a string to a file
        @FINDCLOSE[filename]                Terminate an @FINDFIRST / @FINDNEXT
                                            scan
        @FINDFIRST[filename,nrhsda]         Find first matching file
        @FINDNEXT[filename,nrhsda]          Find next matching file
        @LINE[filename,n]                   Read a random line from a file
        @LINES[filename]                    Count lines in a file
        @SEARCH[filename]                   Path search
        @UNIQUE[d:\path]                    Create file with unique name

 File names

        @EXT[filename]                      File extension
        @FILENAME[filename]                 File name and extension
        @FULL[filename]                     Full file name with path
        @NAME[filename]                     File name without path or extension
        @PATH[filename]                     File path without name

 Strings and characters

        @ASCII[c]                           Numeric ASCII value for a character
        @CHAR[n]                            Character value for numeric ASCII
        @FORMAT[[-][x][.y],string]          Formats (justifies) a string
        @INDEX[string1,string2]             Position of one string in another
        @INSTR[start,length,string]         Extract a substring
        @LEN[string]                        Length of a string
        @LOWER[string]                      Convert string to lower case
        @REPEAT[c,n]                        Repeat a character
        @SUBSTR[string,start,length]        Extract a substring
        @TRIM[string]                       Remove blanks from a string
        @UPPER[string]                      Convert string to upper case
        @WORD[["sep",]n,string]             Extract a word from a string
        @WORDS[["sep",]string]              Counts number of words in a string

 Numbers and arithmetic

        @COMMA[n]                           Inserts commas in a number
        @DEC[%var]                          Decremented value of a variable
        @EVAL[expression]                   Arithmetic calculations
        @INC[%var]                          Incremented value of a variable
        @INT[n]                             Integer part of a number
        @NUMERIC[string]                    Test if a string is numeric
        @RANDOM[min,max]                    Generate a random integer

 Dates and times

        @DATE[mm-dd-yy]                     Convert date to number of days
        @MAKEAGE[n]                         Convert date/time to file date/time
        @MAKEDATE[n]                        Convert number of days to date
        @MAKETIME[n]                        Convert number of seconds to time
        @TIME[hh:mm:ss]                     Convert time to number of seconds
        @TIMER[n]                           Elapsed time of specified timer

 Utility

        @ALIAS[name]                        Value of an alias
        @IF[condition,true,false]           Evaluates a test condition
        @EXEC[command]                      Execute a command
        @REXX[expr]                         Execute a REXX expression
        @SELECT[file,t,l,b,r,title]         Menu selection

 Like all environment variables, these variable functions must be preceded by a
 percent sign (%@EVAL, %@LEN, etc.).  All variable functions must have square
 brackets enclosing their argument(s).  The argument(s) to a variable function
 cannot exceed 255 characters in length for all arguments taken as a group.

 Some variable functions, like @DISKFREE, are shown with "b|k|m" as one of
 their arguments.  Those functions return a number of bytes, kilobytes, or
 megabytes based on the "b|k|m" argument:

        b   return the number of bytes
        K   return the number of kilobytes (bytes / 1,024)
        k   return the number of thousands of bytes (bytes / 1,000)
        M   return the number of megabytes (bytes / 1,048,576)
        m   return the number of millions of bytes (bytes / 1,000,000)

 You can include commas in the results from a "b|k|m" function by appending a
 "c" to the argument.  For example, to add commas to a "b" or number of bytes
 result, enter "bc" as the argument.

 In variable functions which take a drive letter as an argument, like @DISKFREE
 or @READY, the drive letter must be followed by a colon.  The function will
 not work properly if you use the drive letter without the colon.

 The @FILEREAD, @FILEWRITE, @FILESEEK, and @FILECLOSE functions allow you to
 access files based on a file handle.  These functions should only be used with
 file handles returned by @FILEOPEN!  If you use them with any other number you
 may damage other files opened by Take Command (or by the program which started
 Take Command), or hang your system.

 Examples

 You can use variable functions in a wide variety of ways depending on your
 needs.  We've included a few examples below to give you an idea of what's
 possible.

 To set the prompt to show the amount of free memory (see PROMPT for details on
 including variable functions in your prompt):

          [c:\] prompt (%%@dosmem[K]K) $p$g

 Set up a simple command-line calculator.  The calculator is used with a
 command like CALC 3 * (4 + 5):

          [c:\] alias calc `echo The answer is:  %@eval[%&]`


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. @ALIAS - Value of an alias ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@ALIAS[name]  Returns the contents of the specified alias as a string, or a
null string if the alias doesn't exist.  When manipulating strings returned by
@ALIAS you may need to disable certain special characters with the SETDOS /X
command. Otherwise, command separators, redirection characters, and other
similar "punctuation" in the alias may be interpreted as part of the current
command, rather than part of a simple text string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. @ASCII - Numeric ASCII value for a character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@ASCII[c]:  Returns the numeric value of the specified ASCII character as a
string.  For example %@ASCII[A] returns 65.  You can put an escape character
[^] before the actual character to process.  This allows quotes and other
special characters as the argument (e.g., %@ASCII[^`]).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. @ATTRIB - File attribute test (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@ATTRIB[filename[,nrhsda[,p]]]:  Returns a "1" if the specified file has the
matching attribute(s); otherwise returns a "0". The attributes are:

        N   Normal (no attributes set)
        R   Read-only
        H   Hidden
        S   System
        D   Directory
        A   Archive

 The attributes (other than N) can be combined (for example
 %@ATTRIB[MYFILE,HS]).  Normally ATTRIB will only return a "1" if all of the
 attributes match. However, if a final ,p is included (for partial match), then
 @ATTRIB will return a "1" if any of the attributes match.  For example,
 %@ATTRIB[MYFILE,HS,p] will return a "1" if MYFILE has the hidden, system, or
 both attributes.  Without ,p the function will return a "1" only if MYFILE has
 both attributes.

 If you do not specify any attributes, @ATTRIB will return the attributes of
 the specified file in the format RHSAD, rather than a "0" or "1".  Attributes
 which are not set will be replaced with an underscore.  For example. if
 SECURE.DAT has the read-only, hidden, and archive attributes set,
 %@ATTRIB[SECURE.DAT] would return "RH_A_" (without the quotes).  If the file
 does not exist, @ATTRIB will return an empty string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. @CDROM - CD-ROM drive detection (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@CDROM[d:]:  Returns "1" if the drive is a CD-ROM or "0" otherwise.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. @CHAR - Character value for numeric ASCII ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@CHAR[n]:  Returns the character corresponding to an ASCII numeric value.  For
example %@CHAR[65] returns A.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6. @COMMA - Inserts commas in a number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@COMMA[n]:  Returns the number with commas (or the appropriate thousands
separator for your current country setting) inserted where appropriate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.7. @DATE - Convert date to number of days ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DATE[mm-dd-yy]:  Returns the number of days since January 1, 1980 for the
specified date.  DATE uses the date format and separators mandated by your
country code (for example dd.mm.yy in Germany, or yy-mm-dd in Japan).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.8. @DEC - Decremented value of a variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DEC[%var]:  Returns the same value as @EVAL[%var - 1].  That is, it retrieves
and decrements the value of a variable. The variable itself is not changed; to
do so, use a command like this:

        set var=%@dec[%var]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9. @DESCRIPT - File description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DESCRIPT[filename]  Returns the file description for the specified filename
(see DESCRIBE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.10. @DEVICE - Character device detection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DEVICE[name]:  Returns "1" if the specified name is a character device (such
as a printer or serial port), or "0" if not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.11. @DISKFREE - Free disk space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DISKFREE[d:,b|k|m]: Returns the amount of free disk space on the specified
drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.12. @DISKTOTAL - Total disk space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DISKTOTAL[d:,b|k|m]:  Returns the total disk space on the specified drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.13. @DISKUSED - Used disk space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DISKUSED[d:,b|k|m]:  Returns the amount of disk space in use by files and
directories on the specified drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.14. @DOSMEM - Size of largest free memory block ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@DOSMEM[b|k|m]:  Returns the size of the largest free memory block (either in
physical or virtual memory).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.15. @EVAL - Arithmetic calculations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@EVAL[expression]:  Evaluates an arithmetic expression.  @EVAL supports
addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), division (/), integer
division (\, returns the integer part of the quotient), modulo (%%), and
integer exponentiation (**).  The expression can contain environment variables
and other variable functions.  @EVAL also supports parentheses, commas, and
decimals.  Parentheses can be nested. @EVAL will strip leading and trailing
zeros from the result.  When evaluating expressions, **, *, /, and %% take
precedence over + and -. For example, 3 + 4 * 2 will be interpreted as 3 + 8,
not as 7 * 2.  To change this order of evaluation, use parentheses to specify
the order you want.

The maximum precision is 16 digits to the left of the decimal point and 0 to 8
digits to the right of the decimal point.  You can alter the default precision
with the EvalMax and EvalMin  directives inTCMDOS2.INI, and with the SETDOS /F
command.

You can alter the precision for a single evaluation with the construct
@EVAL[expression=x.y].  The x value specifies the the minimum decimal precision
(the minimum number of decimal places displayed); the y value sets the maximum
decimal (rounding) precision.  If x is greater than y, it is ignored.  You can
specify either or both arguments: @EVAL[3/7=2], @EVAL[3/7=2.4], or
@EVAL[3/7=.4].

Also see @DEC and @INC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.16. @EXEC - Execute a command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@EXEC[command]:  Execute the command and return the numeric exit code.  The
command can be an alias, internal command, external command, .BTM file, or .BAT
file.  @EXEC is primarily intended for running a program from within the
PROMPT.  It is a "back door" entry into command processing and should be used
with extreme caution.  Incorrect or recursive use of @EXEC may hang your
system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.17. @EXETYPE - Executable file type (DOS, PM, WIN, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@EXETYPE[filename]:  Returns the application type as a string:

        DOS         DOS .COM, .EXE, or .BAT file
        AVIO        OS/2 Character mode, windowed
        FS          OS/2 Character mode, full-screen
        PM          OS/2 Presentation Manager
        WIN         Windows 3
        UNKNOWN     Any other file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.18. @EXT - File extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@EXT[filename]:  Returns the extension from a file name, without a leading
period.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.19. @FILEAGE - File age (date and time) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILEAGE[filename]:  Returns the date and time of the file as a single numeric
value.  The number can be used to compare the relative ages of two or more
files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.20. @FILECLOSE - Close a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILECLOSE[n]:  Closes the file whose handle is "n." You cannot close handles
0, 1 or 2.  Returns "0" if the file closed OK or "-1" if an error occurred.  Be
sure to read the cautionary note about file functions under Variable Functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.21. @FILEDATE - File date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILEDATE[filename]:  Returns the date a file was last modified, in the default
country format (mm-dd-yy for the US).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.22. @FILENAME - File name and extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILENAME[filename]:  Returns the name and extension of a file, without a path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.23. @FILEOPEN - Open a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILEOPEN[filename, read | write | append[,b|t]]:  Opens the file in the
specified mode and returns the file handle as an integer.  If you add "b" the
file is opened in binary mode;  "t" means text mode, the default.  In binary
mode, no special translation of CR/LF pairs is performed.  Returns "-1" if the
file cannot be opened. Be sure to read the cautionary note about file functions
under Variable Functions.

@FILEOPEN can also open named pipes.  The pipe name must begin with \pipe\.
@FILEOPEN first tries to open an existing pipe; if that fails it tries to
create a new pipe.  Pipes are opened in blocking mode, duplex access, byte-read
mode, and inheritable. For more information on named pipes see your OS/2
documentation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.24. @FILEREAD - [,length]] Read next line from a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILEREAD[n[,length]]:  Reads a line or a series of bytes from the file whose
handle is "n."  Returns "**EOF**" if you attempt to read past the end of the
file.  If length is not given @FILEREAD reads up to the next CR or LF
character.  If length is given @FILEREAD reads the specified number of bytes
regardless of whether CR or LF characters are found.  Be sure to read the
cautionary note about file functions under Variable Functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.25. @FILES - Count files matching a wildcard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILES[filename [,-nrhsda]]:  Returns the number of files that match the
filename specification, which may contain wildcards and include lists.  The
filename must refer to a single directory; to check several directories, use
@FILES once for each directory, and add the results together with @EVAL. The
second argument, if included, defines the attributes of the files that will be
included in the search.  Returns an empty string if no files match.  The
attributes are:

        N   Normal (no attributes set)
        R   Read-only
        H   Hidden
        S   System
        D   Directory
        A   Archive

 The attributes (other than N) can be combined (for example
 %@FINDFIRST[MYFILE,HS]).  @FINDFIRST will only find a file if all of the
 attributes match.  You can prefix an attribute with "-" to mean "everything
 except files with this attribute."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.26. @FILESEEK - Move a file pointer to an offset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILESEEK[n,offset,start]:  Moves the file pointer "offset" bytes in the file
whose handle is "n".  Returns the new position of the pointer, in bytes from
the start of the file.  Set "start" to 0 to seek relative to the beginning of
the file, 1 to seek relative to the current file pointer, or 2 to seek relative
to the end of the file.  The offset value may be negative (seek backward),
positive (seek forward), or zero (return current position, but do not change
it).  Be sure to read the cautionary note about file functions under Variable
Functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.27. @FILESEEKL - Move a file pointer to a line number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILESEEKL[n,line]:  Moves the file pointer to the specified line in the file
whose handle is "n". Returns the new position of the pointer, in bytes from the
start of the file. Be sure to read the cautionary note about file functions
under Variable Functions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.28. @FILESIZE - Size of files matching a wildcard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILESIZE[filename,b|k|m]:  Returns the size of a file, or "-1" if the file
does not exist.  If the filename includes wildcards or an include list, returns
the combined size of all matching files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.29. @FILETIME - File time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILETIME[filename]:  Returns the time a file was last modified, in hh:mm
format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.30. @FILEWRITE - Write next line to a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILEWRITE[n,text]:  Writes a line to the file whose handle is "n".  Returns
the number of bytes written, or "-1" if an error occurred.  Be sure to read the
cautionary note about file functions under Variable Functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.31. @FILEWRITEB - Write bytes from a string to a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FILEWRITEB[n,length,string]:  Writes the specified number of bytes from the
string to the file whose handle is "n". Returns the number of bytes written, or
"-1" if an error occurred.  Be sure to read the cautionary note about file
functions under Variable Functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.32. @FINDCLOSE - Terminate a find first / find next scan ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FINDCLOSE[filename]:  Signals the end of a @FINDFIRST / @FINDNEXT sequence.
You must use this function to release the directory search handle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.33. @FINDFIRST - Find first matching file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FINDFIRST[filename [,[-]nrhsda]]:  Returns the name of the first file that
matches the filename, which may include wildcards and/or an include list.  The
second argument, if included, defines the attributes of the files that will be
included in the search. Returns an empty string if no files match.  The
attributes are:

        N   Normal (no attributes set)
        R   Read-only
        H   Hidden
        S   System
        D   Directory
        A   Archive

 The attributes (other than N) can be combined (for example
 %@FINDFIRST[MYFILE,HS]).  @FINDFIRST will only find a file if all of the
 attributes match.  You can prefix an attribute with "-" to mean "everything
 except files with this attribute."

 After @FINDFIRST or the last @FINDNEXT, you must use @FINDCLOSE to avoid
 running out of directory search handles.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.34. @FINDNEXT - Find next matching file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FINDNEXT[[filename [,[-]nrhsda]]]:  Returns the name of the next file that
matches the filename(s) in the previous @FINDFIRST call. The second argument,
if included, defines the attributes of the files that will be included in the
search (see @FINDFIRST for details). Returns an empty string when no more files
match.  @FINDNEXT should only be used after a successful call to @FINDFIRST.
You do not need to include the filename parameter, because it must be the same
as the previous @FINDFIRST call, unless you also want to specify file
attributes for @FINDNEXT.

After the last @FINDNEXT, you must use @FINDCLOSE to avoid running out of
directory search handles.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.35. @FORMAT - Formats (justifies) a string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FORMAT[[-][x][.y],string]:  Reformats a string, truncating it or padding it
with spaces as necessary.  If you use the minus [-], the string is
left-justified; otherwise, it is right-justified.  The x value is the minimum
number of characters in the result.  The y value is the maximum number of
characters in the result.  You can combine the options as necessary.  For
example, Echo %@format[7,Hello] displays "Hello" while Echo %@format[.3,Hello]
displays "Hel".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.36. @FSTYPE - File system type (FAT, HPFS, CDFS, etc.) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FSTYPE[d:]:  Returns the file system type for the specified drive.  @FSTYPE
will return "FAT" for a DOS-compatible drive with a file allocation table,
"HPFS" for a drive that uses the OS/2 high performance file system, or "CDFS"
for a CD-ROM drive.  It may return other values if additional file systems have
been installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.37. @FULL - Full file name with path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@FULL[filename]:  Returns the fully qualified path name of a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.38. @IF - Evaluates a test condition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@IF[condition,true,false]:  Evaluates the condition and returns a string based
on the result.  The condition can include any of the tests allowed in the IF
command. If the condition is true, @IF returns the first result string; if it
is false, @IF returns the second string.  For example, %IF[2==2,Correct!,Oops!]
returns "Correct!"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.39. @INC - Incremented value of a variable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@INC[%var]:  Returns the same value as %@EVAL[%var + 1].  That is, it retrieves
and increments the value of a variable. The variable itself is not changed; to
do so, use a command like this:

        set var=%@inc[%var]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.40. @INDEX - Position of one string in another ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@INDEX[string1,string2]  Returns the position of string2 within string1, or
"-1" if string2 is not found.  The first position in string1 is numbered 0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.41. @INSTR - Extract a substring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@INSTR[start, length, string]:  The same as @SUBSTR.  However, the string is at
the end of the @INSTR argument list, so that commas in the string will not be
confused with commas separating the arguments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.42. @INT - Integer part of a number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@INT[n]:  Returns the integer part of the number n.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.43. @LABEL - Volume label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@LABEL[d:]:  Returns the volume label of the specified disk drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.44. @LEN - Length of a string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@LEN[string]:  Returns the length of a string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.45. @LINE - Read a random line from a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@LINE[filename,n]:  Returns line "n" from the specified file. The first line in
the file is numbered 0.  "**EOF**" is returned for all line numbers beyond the
end of the file.  If you need to scan through the lines of a file in sequence,
the @FILEREAD function (above) and the "@filename" construct available in the
FOR command are much faster than calling the @LINE function repeatedly.  @LINE
will retrieve input from standard input if you specify CON as the filename.  If
you are redirecting input to @LINE using this feature, you must use command
grouping or the redirection will not work properly.  For example:

        (echo %@line[con,0]) < myfile.dat


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.46. @LINES - Count lines in a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@LINES[filename]  Returns the line number of the last line in the file, or "-1"
if the file is empty.  The first line in the file is numbered 0, so (for
example) @LINES will return 0 for a file containing one line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.47. @LOWER - Convert string to lower case ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@LOWER[string]:  Returns the string converted to lower case.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.48. @MAKEAGE - Convert date/time to file date/time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@MAKEAGE[date[,time]]:  Returns the date and time (if included) as a single
value in the same format as @FILEAGE.  Can be used to compare the time stamp of
a file with a specific date and time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.49. @MAKEDATE - Convert number of days to date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@MAKEDATE[n]:  Returns a date (formatted according to the current country
settings).  "n" is the number of days since 1/1/80. This is the inverse of
@DATE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.50. @MAKETIME - Convert number of seconds to time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@MAKETIME[n]:  Returns a time (formatted according to the current country
settings).  "n" is the number of seconds since midnight.  This is the inverse
of @TIME.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.51. @NAME - File name without path or extension ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@NAME[filename]:  Returns the base name of a file, without the path or
extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.52. @NUMERIC - Test if a string is numeric ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@NUMERIC[string]:  Returns "1" if the argument is composed entirely of digits
(0 to 9), signs (+ or -), and the thousands and decimal separators.  Otherwise,
returns "0".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.53. @PATH - File path without name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@PATH[filename]:  Returns the path from a file name, including the drive letter
and a trailing backslash but not including the base name or extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.54. @RANDOM - Generate a random integer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@RANDOM[min, max]:  Returns a random value between min and max, inclusive.
Min, max, and the returned value are all integers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.55. @READSCR - Read characters from the screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@READSCR[row,col,length]:  Returns the text displayed on the screen at the
specified location.  The upper left corner of the screen is location 0,0.

You can also specify the row and column as offsets from the current cursor
position.  Begin the value with a plus sign [+] to read the screen the
specified number of rows below (or columns to the right of) the current
position, or with a minus sign [-] to read the screen above (or to the left of)
the current position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.56. @READY - Drive ready status (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@READY[d:]:  Returns "1" if the specified drive is ready; otherwise returns
"0".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.57. @REMOTE - Remote (network) drive detection (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@REMOTE[d:]:  Returns "1" if the specified drive is a remote (network) drive;
otherwise returns "0".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.58. @REMOVABLE - Removable drive detection (0 or 1) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@REMOVABLE[d:]:  Returns "1" if the specified drive is removable (i.e., a
floppy disk or removable hard disk); otherwise returns "0".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.59. @REPEAT - Repeat a character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@REPEAT[c,n]:  Returns the character "c" repeated "n" times.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.60. @REXX - Execute a REXX expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@REXX[expr]:  Calls the REXX interpreter to execute the expression. Returns the
result string from REXX; if the REXX expression does not return a string, @REXX
returns the REXX numeric result code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.61. @SEARCH - Path search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@SEARCH[filename]:  Searches for the filename using the PATH environment
variable, appending an extension if one isn't specified. Returns the
fully-expanded name of the file including drive, path, base name, and
extension, or an empty string if a matching file is not found.  If wildcards
are used in the filename, @SEARCH will search for the first file that matches
the wildcard specification, and return the drive and path for that file plus
the wildcard filename (e.g., E:\UTIL\*.COM). (See the PATH command for details
on the default extensions used when searching the PATH and the order in which
the search proceeds.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.62. @SELECT - Menu selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@SELECT[filename,top,left,bottom,right,title]:  Pops up a selection window with
the lines from the specified file. Returns the text of the line the scrollbar
is on if you press Enter, or an empty string if you press Esc.  @SELECT can be
used to display menus or other selection lists from a batch file.  To select
from lines passed through input redirection or a pipe, use CON as the filename.
You can move through the selection window with standard navigation keystrokes.
To change the navigation keys, see the Key Mapping directives in the .INI file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.63. @SUBSTR - Extract a substring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@SUBSTR[string,start,length]:  Returns a substring, starting at the position
"start" and continuing for "length" characters.  If the length is omitted, it
will default to the remainder of the string.  If the length is negative, the
start is relative to the right side of the string.  The first character in the
string is numbered 0; if the length is negative, the last character is numbered
0.  For example, %@SUBSTR[%_TIME,0,2] gets the current time and extracts the
hour.  If the string includes commas, it must be quoted with double quotes ["]
or back quotes [`].  The quotes do count in calculating the position of the
substring. @INSTR performs the same function, and allows commas in the string
without quoting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.64. @TIME - Convert time to number of seconds ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@TIME[hh:mm:ss]:  Returns the number of seconds since midnight for the
specified time.  The time must be in 24-hour format; "am" and "pm" cannot be
used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.65. @TIMER - Elapsed time of specified timer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@TIMER[n]:  Returns the current split time for a stopwatch started with the
TIMER command.  The value of n specifies the timer to read and can be 1, 2, or
3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.66. @TRIM - Remove blanks from a string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@TRIM[string]:  Returns the string with the leading and trailing white space
(space and tab characters) removed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.67. @UNIQUE - Create file with unique name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@UNIQUE[d:\path]:  Creates a zero-length file with a unique name in the
specified directory, and returns the full name and path.  If no path is
specified, the file will be created in the current directory.  The file name
will be FAT-compatible (8 character name and 3-character extension) regardless
of the type of drive on which the file is created.  This function allows you to
create a  temporary file without overwriting an existing file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.68. @UPPER - Convert string to upper case ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@UPPER[string]:  Returns the string converted to upper case.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.69. @WORD - Extract a word from a string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@WORD[["xxx",]n,string]:  Returns the "nth" word in a string.  The first word
is numbered 0.  If "n" is negative, words are returned from the end of the
string.  You can use the first argument, "xxx" to specify the separators that
you wish to use.  If you want to use a double quote as a separator, prefix it
with an escape character.  If you don't specify a list of separators, @WORD
will consider only spaces, tabs, and commas as word separators.  For example:

        %@WORD[2,NOW IS THE TIME]    returns "THE"
        %@WORD[-0,NOW IS THE TIME]   returns "TIME"
        %@WORD[-2,NOW IS THE TIME]   returns "IS"
        %@WORD["=",1,2 + 2=4]        returns "4"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.70. @WORDS - Convert string to upper case ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

@WORDS[["xxx"],string]  Returns the number of words in the string.  The
optional list of delimiters follows the same format as @WORD.  If the string
argument is enclosed in quotation marks, you must enter a list of delimiters as
well.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Configuring Take Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section covers the configuration of Take Command, including:

    Startup Options

    File Locations
    Configuration Notebook
    TCMDOS2.INI


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. Startup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You will typically start Take Command from an icon on your OS/2 desktop.
Usually a single object is sufficient, but if you wish you can create multiple
objects to start Take Command in different modes, with different startup
commands or options, or to run different batch files or other commands.  You
can use these objects to run commonly-used commands and batch files directly
from the OS/2 desktop.

Each object or icon represents a different Take Command window.  You can set
any necessary command line parameters for Take Command such as a command to be
executed, any desired switches, and the name and path for TCMDOS2.INI.  More
information on command line switches and options for Take Command is included
later in this topic.

When you configure a Take Command object, place the full path and name for the
TCMDOS2.EXE file in the Path and File Name field on the Program page of the
object's Settings notebook, and put any startup options that you want passed to
Take Command (e.g., the name of a startup batch file) in the Parameters field.
(To bring up the Settings notebook click on the object with mouse button 2,
then click on the Settings item on the popup menu.)  For example:

        Path and File Name:    C:\TCMDOS2\TCMDOS2.EXE
        Parameters:            C:\GO.BAT
        Working directory:     C:\

When Take Command starts it automatically runs the optional TCSTART batch file.
You can use this file to load aliases and environment variables and otherwise
initialize Take Command.

You can also place the name of a batch file, internal or external command, or
alias at the end of the Parameters field for any object (as shown in the
example above).  The batch file, command, or alias will be executed after
TCSTART but before the first prompt is displayed.

Each OS/2 program -- including Take Command -- has a command line which can be
used to pass information to the program when it starts.  When Take Command is
started from an object on the OS/2 desktop, the command line is entered in the
Parameters field on the Program page of the Settings notebook for the Take
Command object.

The Take Command startup command line does not need to contain any information.
When invoked with an empty command line, Take Command will configure itself
from the TCMDOS2.INI file, run TCSTART, and then display a prompt and wait for
you to type a command.  However, you may add information to the startup command
line that will affect the way Take Command operates.

Take Command recognizes several optional fields on the command line. If you use
more than one of these fields, their order is important.  The syntax for the
command line is:

[@d:\path\inifile] [//iniline]... [/L] [/LA] [/LD] [/LH] [/C] [command]

The options are:

@d:\path\inifile:  This option sets the path and name of the TCMDOS2.INI file.
You do not need this option if you aren't using a TCMD.INI file, or if the file
is named TCMDOS2.INI and is stored in the same subdirectory as TCMDOS2.EXE.

//iniline:  This option tells Take Command to treat the text appearing between
the // and the next space or tab as a TCMDOS2.INI directive. The directive
should be in the same format as a line in the [TakeCommand] section of
TCMDOS2.INI, but it may not contain spaces, tabs, or comments.  This option
overrides any corresponding directive in your TCMDOS2.INI file.

/L, /LA, /LD, and /LH:  These options force Take Command to use a local alias,
directory history, and / or command history list. This allows you to use global
aliases as the default, but start a specific Take Command session with local
aliases or history.  See ALIAS for details on local and global aliases,
Directory History Window for details on local and global directory history, and
Command History for details on local and global command history. /LA forces
local aliases, /LD forces local directory history, /LH forces local command
history, and /L forces all three.

[/C] command:  This option tells Take Command to run a command when it starts.
The command will be run after TCSTART has been executed and before any command
prompt is displayed.  It can be any valid internal or external command, batch
file, or alias; you may include multiple commands by using the command
separator.  All other startup options must be placed before the command,
because Take Command will treat characters after the command as part of the
command and not as additional startup options.

When the command is preceded by a /C, Take Command will execute the command and
then exit and return to the parent program or the OS/2 desktop without
displaying a prompt.

To run a specific startup batch file or other command when a particular Take
Command object is started, include the batch file or command name (with a path,
if the file is not in the startup directory) as the last item in the Parameters
field.  The batch file or command will be executed after any TCSTART file, but
before the first prompt is displayed.

You can use this capability to run a specific batch file or command for a
particular object (as opposed to TCSTART, which is run every time Take Command
starts).

For example, to run C:\STARTUP.BAT when the object starts:

        Path and File Name:    C:\TCMDOS2\TCMDOS2.EXE
        Parameters:            C:\STARTUP.BAT
        Working directory:     C:\

To execute an internal or external command, an alias, or a batch file and then
exit (return to the desktop) when it is done, place /Ccommand (rather than just
command) as the last item in the Parameters field.  For example:

        Path and File Name:    C:\TCMDOS2\TCMDOS2.EXE
        Parameters:            /C C:\STARTUP.BAT
        Working directory:     C:\


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. File Locations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The automated Take Command installation program places all Take Command for
OS/2 files in a single directory.  You may move the files to different
directories if you wish, but you must make sure that the files can be found by
the programs that need to use them.  The following information will help you
set up your system correctly if you are moving the files:

        TCOS2DLL.DLL is a library used by TCMDOS2.EXE.  This file must be in a
        directory which is included in the LIBPATH setting in CONFIG.SYS.  You
        can either add the Take Command for OS/2 directory to the LIBPATH
        setting, or copy TCOS2DLL.DLL to a standard library directory such as
        \OS2\DLL.

        TCMDOS2.INF contains this help text.  For the help system to work
        properly, the directory containing this file must be included in the
        SET BOOKSHELF command in CONFIG.SYS.  You can either add the Take
        Command for OS/2 directory to the BOOKSHELF setting, or copy
        TCMDOS2.INF to a standard help directory such as \OS2\BOOK.

        TCMDOS2H.MSG contains the help text for the /? option that is available
        as part of each internal command.  For this feature to work properly,
        the directory containing this file must be included in the SET DPATH
        command in CONFIG.SYS.  You can either add the Take Command for OS/2
        directory to the DPATH setting, or copy TCMDOS2H.MSG to a standard
        DPATH directory such as \OS2.

        SHRALIAS.EXE is a small utility that saves the shared alias, history,
        and directory history lists between Take Command sessions (it is loaded
        with the SHRALIAS command).  This file should be in the Take Command
        directory, or in a directory listed in your PATH statement.  If it is
        not, the SHRALIAS command will fail.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. Configuration Notebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The dialogs in the Take Command for OS/2 configuration notebook control the
configuration of Take Command.  Each option on one of the notebook pages a
corresponding directive in TCMDOS2.INI.  You can start the configuration
notebook with the Configure Take Command selection on the Setup menu.

Most changes you make in the configuration notebook will take effect
immediately.  If you return to Take Command by selecting the OK button, new
settings will only stay in effect until you end the current Take Command
session.  If you return to Take Command by selecting Save, the changes will be
recorded in the [TakeCommand] section of TCMDOS2.INI and will be in effect each
time you start Take Command.  Changes made on the Startup page, if saved, will
take effect the next time you start Take Command, but will not affect the
current Take Command session.

While you are using the dialogs, you can move between sets of configuration
options with the tabs on the right hand side of the notebook.  The sets of
options available in the notebook are:

    Startup Options
    Display Options
    Command Line Options
    General Options 1
    General Options 2
    Command Options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.1. Startup Options Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use this page to set startup options in TCMDOS2.INI.  Most changes you
make will take effect immediately.  If you return to Take Command by selecting
the OK button, new settings will only stay in effect until you end the current
Take Command session.  If you return to Take Command by selecting Save, the
changes will be recorded in TCMDOS2.INI and will be in effect each time you
start Take Command.  Changes made on the Startup page, if saved, will take
effect the next time you start Take Command, but will not affect the current
Take Command session.

The TCSTART and TCEXIT Path field lets you set the path to TCSTART and TCEXIT
if they aren't in the same directory as Take Command, and sets the TCStartPath
directive.

In the TCMDOS2.INI section, you can set the value of the INIQuery directive.

In the Buffer Sizes section:

        *   Command History sets the size of the command history list, and the
            value of the History directive.

        *   Directory History sets the size of the  directory history list, and
            the value of the DirHistory directive.

 The Display section sets the size and location of Take Command's window when
 it starts up:

        *   Standard, Max, Min, and Custom set the WindowState directive.

        *   The window position and size fields set the WindowX, WindowY,
            WindowHeight, and WindowWidth directives.  Use these if you want
            Take Command to start up at a specific location on your desktop.
            These fields are ignored unless the item above is set to Custom.

 The Cursor section sets the shape of the cursor and the IBeamCursor directive.
 Use the I-Beam shape for normal systems, and the Arrow shape for laptop or
 other systems where the I-Beam cursor is hard to see.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.2. Display Options Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use this page to set display-related options in TCMDOS2.INI.  Most
changes you make will take effect immediately.  If you return to Take Command
by selecting the OK button, new settings will only stay in effect until you end
the current Take Command session.  If you return to Take Command by selecting
Save, the changes will be recorded in TCMDOS2.INI and will be in effect each
time you start Take Command.

The Text Dimensions section configures the way that text appears in Take
Command's main window:

        *   Width sets the number of columns that Take Command uses for its
            displays and sets the ScreenColumns directive.

        *   Tabs selects the location of tab stops and sets the TabStops
            directive.

 The Options section controls the appearance of the Tool Bar (sets the
 ToolBarOn directive) and the Status Bar (sets the StatusBarOn directive), and
 enables or disables ANSI support (sets the ANSI directive).  The tool bar and
 status bar settings are also modified when you enable and disable the
 corresponding option on the Setup menu.

 The Scrolling section controls Take Command's screen scrollback buffer:

        *   Buffer Size sets the size of the screen buffer, and the value of
            the ScreenBufSize directive. Valid sizes are from 16,000 to 256,000
            bytes.

        *   Scroll Lines controls how much the screen scrolls when Take
            Command's text has reached the bottom of the window, and sets the
            ScrollLines directive.  Lower values produce slower but smoother
            scrolling.

 The Colors section sets default screen colors:

        *   Output establishes the default colors Take Command uses for the
            text it displays, and sets the StdColors directive.

        *   Input establishes the colors for echoing the commands you type, and
            sets the InputColors directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.3. Command Line Options Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use this page to set command line options in TCMDOS2.INI.  Most changes
you make will take effect immediately.  If you return to Take Command by
selecting the OK button, new settings will only stay in effect until you end
the current Take Command session.  If you return to Take Command by selecting
Save, the changes will be recorded in TCMDOS2.INI and will be in effect each
time you start Take Command.

The Editing section controls command-line editing:

        *   Default Mode selects whether you begin editing in Overstrike or
            Insert mode, and sets the EditMode directive.

        *   Cursor sets the width of the cursor for both Overstrike and Insert
            modes, and sets the CursorIns and CursorOver directives. The width
            is expressed as a percentage of the width of a character cell.

 In the Command History section:

        *   The Scroll / History keys setting controls whether Take Command or
            4OS2 defaults are used for scrolling through the scrollback buffer
            and the command history.  The Normal setting uses the arrow and
            PgUp / PgDn keys for the scrollback buffer, and the corresponding
            control keys (Ctrl-Up, Ctrl-Down, etc.) for the command history.
            The Swapped setting reverses these assignments.  For more details
            see Scrolling and History Keystrokes.  This option sets the value
            of the SwapScrollKeys directive.

        *   Minimum saved characters sets the size of the shortest line that
            will be saved in the command history, and sets the value of the
            HistMin directive.

        *   Copy to end, if checked, copies a recalled command to the end of
            the history list each time it is executed, and sets the HistCopy
            directive.

 The History Windows section sets the position and size of the popup history
 window and sets the HistWinLeft, HistWinTop, HistWinWidth, and HistWinHeight
 directives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.4. Options 1 Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use this page to set options in TCMDOS2.INI.  Most changes you make
will take effect immediately.  If you return to Take Command by selecting the
OK button, new settings will only stay in effect until you end the current Take
Command session.  If you return to Take Command by selecting Save, the changes
will be recorded in TCMDOS2.INI and will be in effect each time you start Take
Command.

The Descriptions section sets the way that Take Command handles file
descriptions entered with the DESCRIBE command:

        *   The Enable checkbox enables or disables the display and processing
            of descriptions, and sets the Descriptions directive.

        *   The Maximum Length field determines the maximum size of file
            descriptions and sets the DescriptionMax directive.  The value can
            range from 20 to 512 characters.  This value sets the size of the
            internal description buffers; the actual description limit is 1
            character less.  For example, if you set the limit to 512, the
            longest description you can use is 511 characters.

 The Special Characters section sets the characters that have special meaning
 for Take Command.  See 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility for
 information on how to change these to make Take Command more compatible with
 4DOS, 4OS2, and 4DOS/NT.

        *   Separator is the character that separates multiple commands.  It
            can also be set with the CommandSep directive or SETDOS /C.

        *   Escape sets the character used to suppress the normal meaning of
            the following character.  It can also be set with the EscapeChar
            directive or SETDOS /E.

        *   Parameter sets the character used after a percent sign to specify
            all or all remaining command-line arguments in a batch file or
            alias.  It can also be set with the ParameterChar directive or with
            SETDOS /P.

 Default Beep sets defaults for the BEEP command and for "error" beeps.  To
 disable error beeps, set the beep length to 0, and be sure to specify an
 explicit length each time you use the BEEP command.

        *   Length sets the length of the beep in timer ticks that are
            approximately 1/18 of a second each.  It also sets the BeepLength
            directive.

        *   Frequency sets the frequency of the beep in Hz.  It also sets the
            BeepFreq directive.

 The Options section sets miscellaneous options:

        *   Force upper case, when selected, forces Take Command to display
            file names in upper case in internal commands like DIR and COPY.
            You can use the UpperCase directive or the SETDOS /U command
            achieve the same result.  Force upper case has no effect on
            filenames from volumes which support long filenames.

        *   Default batch echo, if selected, turns on echoing in batch files by
            default.  You can use the BatchEcho directive or the SETDOS /V
            command to achieve the same result.

        *   Protect redirected output files, if selected, keeps Take Command
            from overwritng an existing file with redirected (>) output or from
            creating a new file with output redirected in append (>>) mode.
            You can achieve the same result with the NoClobber directive or the
            SETDOS /N command.

        *   The Time options determine how Take Command displays times.  If you
            select Country, the time display is based on your country settings
            in OS/2.  The am/pm setting forces a 12-hour display with a
            trailing "a" or "p."  The 24-hour setting forces a standard 24-hour
            display. You can also set the time display with the AmPm directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.5. Options 2 Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use this page to set options in TCMDOS2.INI.  Most changes you make
will take effect immediately.  If you return to Take Command by selecting the
OK button, new settings will only stay in effect until you end the current Take
Command session.  If you return to Take Command by selecting Save, the changes
will be recorded in TCMDOS2.INI and will be in effect each time you start Take
Command.

The Logging section enables or disables Command and History logging (see the
LOG command) and sets the file name to use for each.  It also sets the LogName
and HistLogName directives.

The Eval Precision sets the minimum and maximum number of digits after the
decimal point that @EVAL will display.  You can achieve the same results with
the EvalMin and EvalMax directives or with the SETDOS /F command.

The External Programs setting controls whether Take Command waits for
applications to complete before displaying the prompt.  This setting applies
only to applications started from the Take Command prompt, including DOS
applications.  Take Command will always wait for applications run from batch
files.  It also has no effect on "TTY" applications run within the Take Command
window, or on applications started with the START command, which has its own
separate /WAIT switch.  This option sets the ExecWait directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.6. Command Options Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use this page to set options related to specific commands in
TCMDOS2.INI.  Most changes you make will take effect immediately.  If you
return to Take Command by selecting the OK button, new settings will only stay
in effect until you end the current Take Command session.  If you return to
Take Command by selecting Save, the changes will be recorded in TCMDOS2.INI and
will be in effect each time you start Take Command.

The DIR Colors field sets the colors used by DIR.  You can achieve the same
effect with the ColorDir directive or by setting the COLORDIR environment
variable.  See Color Coded Directories for details.

The LIST section sets the foreground and background colors for the LIST
command.  It also sets the ListColors directive.

The SELECT section sets the foreground and background colors for the SELECT
command.  It also sets the SelectColors directive.

The Editor Filename sets the path and name of the program you want to use when
you use when you select Editor from the Utilities menu.  It also sets the
Editor directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. TCMDOS2.INI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The configuration of Take Command is controlled through an optional file of
initialization information called TCMDOS2.INI.  You can modify this file
manually with an ASCII editor, but in most cases you will probably find it
easier and faster to modify it using the configuration notebook, available on
the Setup menu.

The .INI file has several sections.  All of the directives described here go
into in the [TakeCommand] section, which is usually first in the file.  You can
edit this section manually. Take Command uses the other sections to record
information you set while you are using it, including its window size and
position, the font you are using, and the buttons you create on the tool bar.
You should use Take Command's menu commands to change the settings in these
other sections of the .INI file instead of editing them directly.

The Advanced directives, the Key Mapping directives, and a few other individual
directives do not have corresponding fields in the configuration notebook, and
must be entered manually (this is noted for each individual directive which
requires manual entry).

This topic contains general information on TCMDOS2.INI. For information on
specific directives see the separate topic for each type of directive:

    Initialization Directives
    Configuration Directives
    Color Directives
    Key Mapping Directives
    Advanced Directives

These topics list the directives, with a one-line description of each, and a
cross-reference which selects a full screen help topic on that directive. A few
of the directives are simple enough that the one-line description is
sufficient, but in most cases you should check for any additional information
in the cross-reference topic if you are not already familiar with the
directive.

You can also obtain help on most directives with a HELP directive command at
the prompt.

Take Command reads TCMDOS2.INI when it starts, and configures itself
accordingly.  The file is not re-read when you change it manually.  For changes
to take effect, you must restart Take Command.  However, if you make changes
with the configuration notebook those changes will take effect immediately.

Each item that you can include in the [TakeCommand] section of TCMDOS2.INI has
a default value.  You only need to include entries in this section for settings
that you want to change from their default values.  If you are happy with all
of the default values, you can leave the [TakeCommand] section of the file
empty.

Take Command searches for TCMDOS2.INI in two places:

        *   If there is an "@d:\path\inifile" option on the Take Command
            startup command line Take Command will use the path and file name
            specified there, and will not look elsewhere.

        *   If there is no .INI file name on the startup command line, the
            search proceeds to the same directory where the Take Command
            program file (TCMDOS2.EXE ) is stored.  This is the "normal"
            location for the .INI file.  Take Command determines this directory
            automatically.

 Most lines in the .INI file consist of a one-word directive, an equal sign
 [=], and a value.  For example, in the following line, the word "History" is
 the directive and "2048" is the value:

          History = 2048

 Any spaces before or after the equal sign are ignored.

 If you have a long string to enter in the .INI file (for example, for the
 ColorDir directive), you must enter it all on one line. Strings cannot be
 "continued" to a second line.  Each line may be up to 1023 characters long.

 The format of the value part of a directive line depends on the individual
 directive.  It may be a numeric value, a single character, a choice (like
 "Yes" or "No"), a color setting, a key name, a path, a filename, or a text
 string.  The value begins with the first non-blank character after the equal
 sign and ends at the end of the line or the beginning of a comment.

 Blank lines are ignored in the .INI file and can be used to separate groups of
 directives.  You can place comments in the file by beginning a line with a
 semicolon [;].  You can also place comments at the end of any line except one
 containing a text string value.  To do so, enter at least one space or tab
 after the value, a semicolon, and your comment, like this:

          History = 2048       ;set history list size

 If you try to place a comment at the end of a string value, the comment will
 become part of the string and will probably cause an error.

 When Take Command detects an error while processing the .INI file, it displays
 an error message and prompts you to press a key to continue processing the
 file.  This allows you to note any errors before the startup process
 continues.  The directive in error will retain its previous or default value.
 Only the most catastrophic errors (like a disk read failure) will terminate
 processing of the remainder of the .INI file.  If you don't want a pause after
 each error, use a PauseOnError = No directive at the beginning of TCMDOS2.INI.

 If you need to test different values for an .INI directive without repeatedly
 editing the .INI file, see INIQuery.

 The SETDOS command can override several of the .INI file directives.  For
 example, the cursor shape used by Take Command can be adjusted either with the
 CursorIns and CursorOver directives or the SETDOS /S command.  The
 correspondence between SETDOS options and .INI directives is noted under each
 directive below, and under each option of the SETDOS command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1. Initialization Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The directives in this section control how Take Command starts and where it
looks for its files. The initialization directives are:

        DirHistory          Size of directory history list.
        HelpBook            Books to load in help system
        History             Size of history list
        INIQuery            Query for each line in TCMDOS2.INI
        LocalAliases        ehp1. Local vs. global aliases
        LocalHistory        Local vs. global history
        LocalDirHistory     Local vs. global directory history
        PauseOnError        Pause on errors in TCMDOS2.INI
        ScreenBufSize       Size of screen buffer.
        TCStartPath         Path for TCSTART and TCEXIT
        WindowState         Initial state for the Take Command window
        WindowX, WindowY, WindowWidth, WindowHeightInitial size and position of
                            the Take Command window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.1. DirHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DirHistory = nnnn (256):  Sets the amount of memory allocated to the directory
history list in bytes.  The allowable range of values is 128 to 2048.  If you
use a global directory history list (see Directory History Window), the
DirHistory value is ignored in all sessions except that which fist establishes
the global list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.2. HelpBook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HelpBook = String:  Sets the names of the "books" to be loaded when Take
Command for OS/2 help is invoked with the HELP command or theF1 key.  The
default is TCMDOS2 which loads only the Take Command for OS/2 help.

For example, to load both the Take Command for OS/2 help and the OS/2 Command
Reference when you press F1 or enter the HELP command:

        HelpBook = TCMDOS2+CMDREF

(For this statement to work the CMDREF.INF file must be available in a
directory listed in your BOOKSHELF path in CONFIG.SYS.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.3. History (directive) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

History = nnnn (1024):  Sets the amount of memory allocated to the command
history list in bytes.  The allowable range of values is 256 to 32767 bytes.
If you use a global history list (see Command History and Recall), the History
value is ignored in all shells except the shell which first establishes the
global list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.4. INIQuery ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

INIQuery = Yes | NO:  If set to Yes, a prompt will be displayed before
execution of each subsequent line in the current .INI file.  This allows you to
modify certain directives when you start Take Command in order to test
different configurations.  INIQuery can be reset to No at any point in the
file.  Normally INIQuery = Yes is only used during testing of other .INI file
directives.

The prompt generated by INIQuery = Yes is:

        [contents of the line]  (Y/N/Q/R/E)  ?

At this prompt, you may enter:

        Y = Yes:    Process this line and go on to the next.
        N = No:     Skip this line and go on to the next.
        Q = Quit:   Skip this line and all subsequent lines.
        R = Rest:   Execute this and all subsequent lines.
        E = Edit:   Edit the value for this entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.5. LocalAliases ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LocalAliases = Yes | NO:  No forces all copies of Take Command to share the
same alias list.  Yes keeps the lists for each shell separate.  See ALIAS for
more details on local and global alias lists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.6. LocalDirHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LocalDirHistory = Yes | NO:  No forces all copies of Take Command to share the
same directory history list. Yes keeps the list for each session separate. See
directory history window for more details on local and global directory
history.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.7. LocalHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LocalHistory = Yes | NO:  No forces all copies of Take Command to share the
same history list.  Yes keeps the lists for each shell separate.  See Command
History and Recall for more details on local and global history lists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.8. PauseOnError ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PauseOnError = YES | No:  Yes forces a pause with the message "Error in
filename, press any key to continue processing" after displaying any error
message related to a specific line in the .INI file.  No continues processing
with no pause after an error message is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.9. ScreenBufSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScreenBufSize = nnnn (64000):  Sets the size of the screen scrollback buffer in
bytes.  The allowable range is from 16,000 to 256,000 bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.10. TCStartPath ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TCStartPath = Path:  Sets the drive and directory where the TCSTART and TCEXIT
batch files (if any) are located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.11. WindowState ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WindowState = STANDARD | Maximize | Minimize | Custom: Sets the initial state
of the Take Command window.  Standard puts the window in the default position
on the OS/2 desktop, and is the default setting. Maximize maximizes the window;
Minimize minimizes it, and Custom sets it to the position specified by the
WindowX, WindowY, WindowWidth, WindowHeight directives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1.12. WindowX, WindowY, WindowWidth, WindowHeight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WindowX = nnnn, WindowY = nnnn, WindowWidth = nnnn, WindowHeight = nnnn:  These
4 directives set the initial size and position of the Take Command window.  The
measurements are in pixels or pels.  WindowX and WindowY refer to the position
of the bottom left corner of the window relative to the bottom left corner of
the screen.  These directives will be ignored unless WindowState is set to
Custom.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2. Configuration Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives control the way that Take Command operate.  Some can be
changed with the SETDOS command while Take Command is running. Any
corresponding SETDOS command is listed in the description of each directive.
The configuration directives are:

        AmPm                Time display format
        BatchEcho           Default batch file echo state
        BeepFreq            Default beep frequency
        BeepLength          Default beep length
        CommandSep          Multiple command separator character
        CursorIns           Cursor width in insert mode
        CursorOver          Cursor width in overstrike mode
        DescriptionMax      Maximum length of file descriptions
        DescriptionName     Name of file to hold file descriptions
        Descriptions        Enable / disable description processing
        EditMode            Editing mode (insert / overstrike)
        Editor              Program to run for "Editor" menu choice
        EvalMax             Maximum precision returned by @EVAL
        EvalMin             Minimum precision returned by @EVAL
        ExecWait            Forces Take Command to wait for external programs
                            to complete
        EscapeChar          Take Command escape character
        HistCopy            History copy mode
        HistLogName         History log file name
        HistMin             Minimum command length to save
        HistWinHeight       History window height
        HistWinLeft         History window left side position
        HistWinTop          History window top position
        HistWinWidth        History window width
        IBeamCursor         Change the default text cursor to an arrow
        LogName             Log file name
        NoClobber           Overwrite protection for output redirection
        ParameterChar       Alias / batch file parameter character
        ScreenColumns       Virtual screen width
        ScrollLines         Number of lines to scroll up when at the bottom of
                            the window
        StatusBarOn         Set status bar mode at startup
        StatBarText         Point size of status bar text
        SwapFilePath        Path to OS/2 swap file
        SwapScrollKeys      Use the 4OS2-style keys for history recall
        TabStops            Sets the tab positions for Take Command's output
        ToolBarOn           Set toolbar mode at startup
        ToolBarText         Point size of toolbar text
        UpperCase           Force file names to upper case


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.1. AmPm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AmPm = Yes | NO | Auto:  Yes displays times in 12-hour format with a trailing
"a" for AM or "p" for PM.  The default of No forces a display in 24-hour time
format.  Auto formats the time according to the country code set for your
system. AmPm controls the time displays used by DIR and SELECT, in LOG files,
and the output of the TIMER, DATE, and TIME commands.  It has no effect on
%_TIME, %@MAKETIME, the $t and $T options of PROMPT, or date and time ranges.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.2. ANSI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ANSI = YES | No:  Sets the initial state of ANSI support.  Yes enables ANSI
string processing in the Take Command window (for example, ANSI strings can be
displayed in the prompt, or with the ECHO command)  No disables ANSI strings.
Also see SETDOS /A.

You can test whether ANSI support is enabled with the _ANSI internal variable.

See the ANSI Reference for more details on ANSI strings, and a reference list
of ANSI sequences supported by Take Command for OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.3. BatchEcho ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BatchEcho = YES | No:  Sets the default batch echo mode. Yes enables echoing of
all batch file commands unless ECHO is explicitly set off in the batch file.
No disables batch file echoing unless ECHO is explicitly set on.  Also see
SETDOS /V.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.4. BeepFreq ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BeepFreq = nnnn (440):  Sets the default BEEP command frequency in Hz.  This is
also the frequency for "error" beeps (for example, if you press an illegal
key).  To disable all error beeps set this or BeepLength to 0.  If you do, the
BEEP command will still be operable, but will not produce sound unless you
explicitly specify the frequency and duration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.5. BeepLength ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BeepLength = nnnn (2):  Sets the default BEEP length in system clock ticks
(approximately 1/18 of a second per tick). BeepLength is also the default
length for "error" beeps (for example, if you press an illegal key).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.6. CommandSep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CommandSep = c:  This is the character used to separate multiple commands on
the same line.  The default for Take Command is the ampersand [&]. You cannot
use any of the redirection characters (| > < ) or any of the whitespace
characters (space, tab, comma, or equal sign).  Also see SETDOS /C, the %+
internal variable, and 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility for
information on using compatible command separators for two or more products.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.7. CursorIns ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CursorIns = nnnn (15):  This is the width of the cursor for insert mode during
command-line editing and all commands which accept line input (DESCRIBE, ESET,
etc.).  The size is a percentage of the total character cell size, between 0%
and 100%.  Because of the way video drivers map the cursor shape, you may not
get a smooth progression in cursor shapes as CursorIns and CursorOver change.
If you set CursorIns and CursorOver to -1, the cursor shape won't be modified
at all.  If you set them to 0, the cursor will be invisible. Also see SETDOS
/S.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.8. CursorOver ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CursorOver = nnnn (100):  This is the width of the cursor for overstrike mode
during command-line editing and all commands which accept line input.  The size
is a percentage of the total character cell size, between 0% and 100%.  For
more details see the CursorIns directive; also see SETDOS /S.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.9. DescriptionMax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DescriptionMax = nnnn (512):  Controls the description length limit for
DESCRIBE.  The allowable range is 20 to 512 characters.  This sets the size of
the internal description buffers; the actual description limit is 1 character
less.  For example, if you set DescriptionMax = 512, the longest description
you can use is 511 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.10. DescriptionName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DescriptionName = File:  Sets the name of the hidden file in each directory
that will hold file descriptions.  If you don't use this directive, the
description files will be named DESCRIPT.ION.  This directive cannot be entered
via the configuration notebook; you must enter it manually (see TCMDOS2.INI for
details).  Use this directive with caution, because changing the name from the
default will make it difficult to transfer file descriptions to another system.
Also see SETDOS /D.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.11. Descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Descriptions = YES | No:  Turns description handling on or off during the file
processing commands COPY, DEL, MOVE, and REN.  If set to No, Take Command will
not update the description file when files are moved, copied, deleted or
renamed.  Also see SETDOS /D.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.12. EditMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EditMode = INSERT | Overstrike:  This directive lets you start the command-line
editor in either insert or overstrike mode.  Also see SETDOS /M.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.13. Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Editor = File:  Specifies the path and filename of the program that Take
Command will execute when you select "Editor" from the Utilities menu.  The
default is the standard OS/2 editor E.EXE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.14. EvalMax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EvalMax = nnnn (8):  Controls the maximum number of digits after the decimal
point in values returned by @EVAL.  You can override this setting with the
construct @EVAL[expression=n,n].  The allowable range is 0 to 8. Also see
SETDOS /F.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.15. EvalMin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EvalMin = nnnn (0):  Controls the minimum number of digits after the decimal
point in values returned by @EVALF_EVAL.  The allowable range is 0 to 8.  This
directive will be ignored if EvalMin is larger than EvalMax.  You can override
this setting with the construct @EVAL[expression=n,n].  Also see SETDOS /F.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.16. ExecWait ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ExecWait = Yes | NO:  Controls whether Take Command waits for an external
program to complete before redisplaying the prompt.

This setting applies only to applications started from the Take Command prompt.
Take Command will always wait for applications run from batch files.  ExecWait
also has no effect on "TTY" applications run within the Take Command window, or
on applications started with the START command, which has its own separate
/WAIT switch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.17. EscapeChar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EscapeChar = c:  Sets the character used to suppress the normal meaning of the
following character.  The default for Take Command is a a caret [^]. See Escape
Character for a description of special escape sequences.  You cannot use any of
the redirection characters (|, >, or < ) or the whitespace characters (space,
tab, comma, or equal sign) as the escape character.  Also see SETDOS /E, the %=
internal variable, and 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command Compatibility for
information on using compatible escape characters for two or more products.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.18. HistCopy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistCopy = Yes | NO:  Controls what happens when you re-execute a line from the
command history.  If this option is set to Yes, the line is appended to the end
of the history list.  By default, or if this option is set to No, no copy of
the command is made.  The original copy of the command is always retained at
its original position in the list, regardless of the setting of HistCopy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.19. HistLogName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistLogName = File:  Sets the history log file name and path.  Using
HistLogName does not turn history logging on; you must use a LOG /H ON command
to do so.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.20. HistMin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistMin = nnnn (0):  Sets the minimum command-line size to save in the command
history list.  Any command line whose length is less than this value will not
be saved.  Legal values range from 0, which saves everything, to 1024, which
disables all command history saves.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.21. HistWinHeight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinHeight = nn (12):  Sets the height of the command-line and directory
history windows in lines, including the border.  Legal values range from 5 to
the height of your Take Command window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.22. HistWinLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinLeft = nn (20):  Sets the horizontal position of the left side of the
command-line and directory history windows.  Legal values range from 0 (the
left edge of the Take Command window) to the number of columns in your Take
Command window minus 10.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.23. HistWinTop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinTop = nn (1):  Sets the vertical position of the top of the command-line
and directory history windows.  Legal values range from 0 (the top of the Take
Command window) to the number of rows in your Take Command window minus 5.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.24. HistWinWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinWidth = nn (36):  Sets the width of the command-line and directory
history windows in characters, including the border. Legal values range from 10
to the width of your Take Command window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.25. IBeamCursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBeamCursor = YES | No:  If set to Yes, Take Command will display the standard
"I-Beam" cursor in text areas of its window.  If IBeamCursor is set to No, an
arrow is used in all areas of the window. This option is intended for LCD
screens where the I-beam cursor may be hard to see.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.26. LogName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LogName = File:  Sets the log file name and path. Using LogName does not turn
logging on; you must use a LOG ON command to do so.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.27. NoClobber ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NoClobber = Yes | NO:  If set to Yes, will prevent standard output redirection
from overwriting an existing file, and will require that the output file
already exist for append redirection.  Also see SETDOS /N.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.28. ParameterChar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ParameterChar = c:  Sets the character used after a percent sign to specify all
or all remaining command-line arguments in a batch file or alias (e.g., %$ or
%n$.; see Batch Files and ALIAS).  The default in Take Command is the dollar
sign [$].  Also see SETDOS /P.  See 4DOS, 4OS2, 4DOS/NT and Take Command
Compatibility for information on using compatible parameter characters for two
or more products.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.29. ScreenColumns ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScreenColumns = nnnn:  Sets the number of virtual screen columns used by the
video display.  If the virtual window width is greater than the physical window
width, Take Command will display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the
window.  If you attempt to drag the right margin to a size greater than the
virtual screen width, Take Command will resize the window to the virtual width.
The default value is 80.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.30. ScrollLines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScrollLines = nnnn (2):  Sets the number of lines displayed before the screen
is physically scrolled.  Take Command will scroll up when output reaches the
bottom of the window. Higher values will speed up the display but also make it
jerky; lower values will make scrolling smoother but will slow it down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.31. StatusBarOn ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

StatusBarOn = YES | No:  Yes enables the status bar when Take Command starts.
No disables it.  The status bar can always be enabled or disabled while Take
Command is running by using the Setup menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.32. StatBarText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

StatBarText = nnnn (8):  Sets the point size of the text on the status bar.
The allowable range is 4 to 16.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.33. SwapFilePath ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SwapFilePath = Path:  Specifies the path of the OS/2 swap file so the MEMORY
command and the status bar  can find it and display its size.

This directive is only required if the swap file is not stored in the
\OS2\SYSTEM directory of the boot drive.  It can include a drive and directory
only (in which case the standard file name, SWAPPER.DAT, will be used), or a
drive, directory, and complete file name.

This directive cannot be entered via the configuration notebook; you must enter
it manually (see TCMDOS2.INI for details).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.34. SwapScrollKeys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SwapScrollKeys = Yes | NO:  Yes switches to 4OS2-style keystrokes for
manipulating the scrollback buffer.

If SwapScrollKeys is set to Yes, the Up and Down arrow keys will scroll through
the command history list and the PgUp key will pop up the history window.  The
Ctrl-Up, Ctrl-Down, Ctrl-PgUp, and Ctrl-PgDn keys will scroll the text in the
screen buffer.

If SwapScrollKeys is set to No, these keys will assume their default meanings.
The Up and Down arrow keys and the PgUp and PgDn keys will scroll the text in
the screen buffer.  The Ctrl-Up and Ctrl-Down keys will scroll through the
command history list and the Ctrl-PgUp key will pop up the history window.

For additional details see Scrolling and History Keystrokes.

Do not set SwapScrollKeys to Yes if you use key mapping directives to reassign
the scrolling or history keys individually.  SwapScrollKeys takes effect before
other key mappings, and using both methods at the same time will be confusing
at best.  Setting SwapScrollKeys to Yes has essentially the same effect as
including the following key mapping directives in TCMDOS2.INI individually:

        PrevHistory = Up
        NextHistory = Down
        HistWinOpen = PgUp
        HistWinOpen = PgDn
        ScrollUp = Ctrl-Up
        ScrollDown = Ctrl-Down
        ScrollPgUp = Ctrl-PgUp
        ScrollPgDn = Ctrl-PgDn


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.35. TabStops ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TabStops = nnnn (8):  Sets the tab stops for Take Command's output (including
the output from the LIST and TYPE commands).  The allowable range is 1 to 32.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.36. ToolBarOn ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ToolBarOn = YES | No:  Yes enables the tool bar when Take Command starts.  No
disables it.  The tool bar can be enabled or disabled while Take Command is
running by using the Setup menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.37. ToolBarText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ToolBarText = nnnn (8):  Sets the point size of text on the tool bar.  The
allowable range is 4 to 16.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.2.38. UpperCase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UpperCase = Yes | NO:  Yes specifies that filenames should be displayed in the
traditional upper-case by internal commands like COPY and DIR.  No allows the
normal Take Command lower-case style. This directive does not affect the
display of filenames on drives which support long filenames.  Also see SETDOS
/U.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.3. Color Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives control the colors that Take Command use for its displays.
For complete details on color names and numbers, see Colors and Color Names.
The color directives are:

        ColorDir            Directory colors
        InputColors         Input colors
        ListColors          Colors used in the LIST display
        SelectColors        Colors used in the SELECT display
        StdColors           Standard display colors


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.3.1. ColorDIR (directive) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ColorDir = ext1 ext2 ...:colora;ext3 ext4... :colorb; ...: Sets the directory
colors used by DIR.  The format is the same as that used for the COLORDIR
environment variable.  See Color-Coded Directories for a detailed explanation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.3.2. InputColors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

InputColors = Color:  Sets the colors used for command-line input.  This
setting is useful for making your input stand out from the normal output.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.3.3. ListColors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListColors = Color:  Sets the colors used by the LIST command.  If this
directive is not used, LIST will use the current default colors set by the CLS
or COLOR command or by the StdColors directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.3.4. SelectColors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SelectColors = Color:  Sets the colors used by the SELECT command.  If this
directive is not used, SELECT will use the current default colors set by the
CLS or COLOR command or by the StdColors directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.3.5. StdColors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

StdColors = Color:  Sets the standard colors to be used when CLS is used
without a color specification.  Using this directive is similar to placing a
COLOR command in the TCSTART file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4. Key Mapping Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives allow you to change the keys used for command-line editing and
other internal functions.  They cannot be entered via the configuration
notebook; you must enter them manually (see TCMDOS2.INI for details).

They are divided into four types, depending on the context in which the keys
are used.  For a discussion and list of directives for each type see:

            General Input Keys
            Command-Line Editing Keys
            History and @SELECT Window Keys
            LIST Keys
            Scrollback Buffer Keys

 Using a key mapping directive allows you to assign a different or additional
 key to perform the function described.  For example, to use function key F3 to
 invoke the HELP facility (normally invoked with F1):

          Help = F3

 Any directive can be used multiple times to assign multiple keys to the same
 function.  For example:

          ListFind = F         ;F does a find in LIST
          ListFind = F4        ;F4 also does a find in LIST

 Use some care when you reassign keystrokes.  If you assign a default key to a
 different function, it will no longer be available for its original use.  For
 example, if you assign F1 to the AddFile directive (a part of filename
 completion), the F1 key will no longer invoke the help system, so you will
 probably want to assign a different key to Help.

 See Keys and Key Names before using the key mapping directives.

 Key assignments are processed before looking for keystroke aliases. For
 example, if you assign Shift-F1 to HELP and also assign Shift-F1 to a key
 alias, the key alias will be ignored.

 Assigning a new keystroke for a function does not deassign the default
 keystroke for the same function.  If you want to deassign one of the default
 keys, use the NormalKey directive described below or the corresponding
 directive for keys in the other key groups (NormalEditKey, NormalHWinKey, or
 NormalListKey).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1. General Input Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives apply to all input.  They are in effect whenever Take Command
requests input from the keyboard, including during command-line editing and the
DESCRIBE, ESET, INPUT, LIST, and SELECT commands.  The general input keys are:

        Backspace           Deletes the character to the left of the cursor
        BeginLine           Moves the cursor to the start of the line
        Del                 Deletes the character at the cursor
        DelToBeginning      Deletes from the cursor to the start of the line
        DelToEnd            Deletes from the cursor to the end of the line
        DelWordLeft         Deletes the word to the left of the cursor
        DelWordRight        Deletes the word to the right of the cursor
        Down                Moves the cursor or scrolls the display down
        EndLine             Moves the cursor to the end of the line
        EraseLine           Deletes the entire line
        ExecLine            Executes or accepts a line
        Ins                 Toggles insert / overstrike mode
        Left                Moves the cursor or scrolls the display left
        NormalKey           Deassigns a key
        Right               Moves the cursor or scrolls the display right
        Up                  Moves the cursor or scrolls the display up
        WordLeft            Moves the cursor left one word
        WordRight           Moves the cursor right one word


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.1. Backspace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Backspace = Key (Bksp):  Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.2. BeginLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

BeginLine = Key (Home):  Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.3. Del (directive) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Del = Key (Del):  Deletes the character at the cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.4. DelToBeginning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DelToBeginning = Key (Ctrl-Home):  Deletes from the cursor to the start of the
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.5. DelToEnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DelToEnd = Key (Ctrl-End):  Deletes from the cursor to the end of the line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.6. DelWordLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DelWordLeft = Key (Ctrl-L):  Deletes the word to the left of the cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.7. DelWordRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DelWordRight = Key (Ctrl-R, Ctrl-Bksp):  Deletes the word to the right of the
cursor.  See ClearKeyMap if you need to remove the default mapping of Ctrl-Bksp
to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.8. Down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Down = Key (Down):  Scrolls the display down one line in LIST; moves the cursor
down one line in SELECT and in the command-line history, directory history, or
%@SELECT window. (Scrolling down through the command history at the prompt is
controlled by NextHistory, not by this directive.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.9. EndLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EndLine = Key (End):  Moves the cursor to the end of the line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.10. EraseLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EraseLine = Key (Esc):  Deletes the entire line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.11. ExecLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ExecLine = Key (Enter):  Executes or accepts a line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.12. Ins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ins = Key (Ins):  Toggles insert / overstrike mode during line editing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.13. Left ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Left = Key (Left):  Moves the cursor left one character; scrolls the display
left 8 columns in LIST; scrolls the display left 4 columns in the command-line,
directory history, or %@SELECT window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.14. NormalKey ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NormalKey = Key:  Deassigns a general input key in order to disable the usual
meaning of the key within Take Command and/or make it available for keystroke
aliases.  This will make the keystroke operate as a "normal" key with no
special function.  For example:

        NormalKey = Ctrl-End

will disable Ctrl-End, which is the standard "delete to end of line" key.
Ctrl-End could then be assigned to a keystroke alias. Another key could be
assigned the "delete to end of line" function with the DelToEnd directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.15. Right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Right = Key (Right):  Moves the cursor right one character; scrolls the display
right 8 columns in LIST; scrolls the display right 4 columns in the
command-line history, directory history, or %@SELECT window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.16. Up ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Up = Key (Up):  Scrolls the display up one line in LIST; moves the cursor up
one line in SELECT and in the command-line history, directory history, or
%@SELECT window.  (Scrolling up through the command history at the prompt is
controlled by PrevHistory, not by this directive.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.17. WordLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WordLeft = Key (Ctrl-Left):  Moves the cursor left one word; scrolls the
display left 40 columns in LIST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.1.18. WordRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WordRight = Key (Ctrl-Right):  Moves the cursor right one word; scrolls the
display right 40 columns in LIST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2. Command-Line Editing Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives apply only to command-line editing.  They are only effective
at the Take Command prompt.  The command-line editing keys are:

        AddFile             Keeps filename completion entry and adds another
        CommandEscape       Allows direct entry of a keystroke
        DelHistory          Deletes a history list entry
        EndHistory          Displays the last entry in the history list
        Help                Invokes this help system
        NextFile            Gets the next matching filename
        NextHistory         Recalls the next command from the history
        NormalEditKey       Deassigns a command-line editing key
        PopFile             Opens the filename completion window
        PrevFile            Gets the previous matching filename
        PrevHistory         Recalls the previous command from the history
        SaveHistory         Saves the command line without executing it


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.1. AddFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AddFile = Key (Ctrl-Shift-Tab):  Keeps the current filename completion entry
and inserts the next matching name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.2. CommandEscape ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CommandEscape = Key (Alt-255):  Allows direct entry of a keystroke that would
normally be interpreted as an editor command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.3. DelHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DelHistory = Key (Ctrl-D):  Deletes the displayed history list entry and
displays the previous entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.4. EndHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EndHistory = Key (Ctrl-E):  Displays the last entry in the history list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.5. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help = Key (F1):  Invokes the HELP facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.6. NextFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NextFile = Key (F9, Tab):  Gets the next matching filename. See ClearKeyMap if
you need to remove the default mapping of Tab to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.7. NextHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NextHistory = Key (Ctrl-Down):  Recalls the next command from the command
history.  Also see Scrolling and History Keystrokes and the SwapScrollKeys
directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.8. NormalEditKey ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NormalEditKey = Key:  Deassigns a command-line editing key in order to disable
the usual meaning of the key while editing a command line, and/or make it
available for keystroke aliases.  For additional details see NormalKey.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.9. PopFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PopFile = Key (F7, Ctrl-Tab):  Opens the filename completion window.  You may
not be able to use Ctrl-Tab, because not all systems recognize it as a
keystroke.  See ClearKeyMap if you need to remove the default mapping of
Ctrl-Tab to this function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.10. PrevFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PrevFile = Key (F8, Shift-Tab):  Gets the previous matching filename.  See
ClearKeyMap if you need to remove the default mapping of Shift-Tab to this
function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.11. PrevHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PrevHistory = Key (Ctrl-Up):  Recalls the previous command from the command
history.  Also see Scrolling and History Keystrokes and the SwapScrollKeys
directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.2.12. SaveHistory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SaveHistory = Key (Ctrl-K):  Saves the command line in the command history list
without executing it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3. History and @SELECT Window Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives apply only to the command history window, the directory
history window, and %@SELECT windows.  The History and @SELECT window keys are:

        DirWinOpen          Opens the directory history window
        HistWinBegin        Moves to the first line of the history window
        HistWinDel          Deletes a line from within the history window
        HistWinEdit         Moves a line from the history window to the prompt
        HistWinEnd          Moves to the last line of the history window
        HistWinExec         Executes the selected line in the history window
        HistWinOpen         Opens the command history window
        NormalHWinKey       Deassigns a history window key


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.1. DirWinOpen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DirWinOpen = Key (F6):  Opens the directory history window while at the command
line.  Also see Scrolling and History Keystrokes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.2. HistWinBegin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinBegin = Key (Ctrl-PgUp):  Moves to the first line of the history when in
the history window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.3. HistWinDel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinDel = Key (Ctrl-D):  Deletes a line from within the history window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.4. HistWinEdit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinEdit = Key (Ctrl-Enter):  Moves a line from the history window to the
prompt for editing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.5. HistWinEnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinEnd = Key (Ctrl-PgDn):  Moves to the last line of the history when in
the history window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.6. HistWinExec ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinExec = Key (Enter):  Executes the selected line in the history window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.7. HistWinOpen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HistWinOpen = Key (Ctrl-PgUp):  Brings up the history window while at the
command line.  Also see Scrolling and History Keystrokes and the SwapScrollKeys
directive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.3.8. NormalHWinKey ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NormalHWinKey = Key:  Deassigns a history window key in order to disable the
usual meaning of the key within the history window. For additional details see
NormalKey.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4. LIST Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives are effective only inside the LIST command.  The LIST keys
are:

        ListExit            Exits the current file
        ListFind            Prompts and searches for a string
        ListHex             Toggles hexadecimal display mode
        ListHighBit         Toggles LIST's "strip high bit" option
        ListInfo            Displays information about the current file
        ListNext            Finds the next matching string
        ListPrint           Prints the file on LPT1
        ListWrap            Toggles LIST's wrap option
        NormalListKey       Deassigns a LIST key


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.1. ListExit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListExit = Key (Esc):  Exits the current file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.2. ListFind ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListFind = Key (F):  Prompts and searches for a string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.3. ListHex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListHex = Key (X):  Toggles hexadecimal display mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.4. ListHighBit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListHighBit = Key (H):  Toggles LIST's "strip high bit" option, which can aid
in displaying files from certain word processors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.5. ListInfo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListInfo = Key (I):  Displays information about the current file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.6. ListNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListNext = Key (N):  Finds the next matching string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.7. ListPrint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListPrint = Key (P):  Prints the file on the printer you select in the popup
dialog, or through the default print queue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.8. ListWrap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ListWrap = Key (W):  Toggles LIST's wrap option on and off. The wrap option
wraps text at the right margin.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.4.9. NormalListKey ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NormalListKey = Key:  Deassigns a LIST key in order to disable the usual
meaning of the key within LIST.  For additional details see NormalKey.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.5. Scrollback Buffer Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives control the keys used to manipulate the scrollback buffer.
For additional information see Scrolling and History Keystrokes and the
SwapScrollKeys directive.  The scrollback buffer keys are:

        ScrollUp            Scroll the buffer up one line
        ScrollDown          Scroll the buffer down one line
        ScrollPgUp          Scroll the buffer up one page
        ScrollPgDn          Scroll the buffer down one page


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.5.1. ScrollUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScrollUp = Key (Up):  Scrolls the Take Command scrollback buffer up one line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.5.2. ScrollDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScrollDown = Key (Down):  Scrolls the Take Command scrollback buffer down one
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.5.3. ScrollPageUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScrollPgUp = Key (PgUp):  Scrolls the Take Command scrollback buffer up one
page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.4.5.4. ScrollPageDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ScrollPgDn = Key (PgDn):  Scrolls the Take Command scrollback buffer down one
page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.5. Advanced Directives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These directives are generally used for unusual circumstances, or for
diagnosing problems. Most often they are not needed in normal use.  They cannot
be entered via the configuration notebook; you must enter them manually (see
TCMDOS2.INI for details).

The only advanced directive available at this time is:

        ClearKeyMap         Clear default key mappings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.5.1. ClearKeyMap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ClearKeyMap:  Clears all current key mappings. ClearKeyMap is a special
directive which has no value or "=" after it.  Use ClearKeyMap to make one of
the keys in the default map (Tab, Shift-Tab, Ctrl-Tab, or Ctrl-Bksp) available
for a keystroke alias.  ClearKeyMap should appear before any other key mapping
directives.  If you want to clear some but not all of the default mappings, use
ClearKeyMap, then recreate the mappings you want to retain (e.g., with
"NextFile=Tab", etc.).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Error Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section lists error messages generated by Take Command, and includes a
recommended course of action for most errors.  If you are unable to resolve the
problem, look through your Introduction and Installation Guide for any
additional troubleshooting recommendations, then contact JP Software for
technical support.

Error messages relating to files are generally reports of errors returned by
OS/2.  You may find some of these messages (for example, "Access denied") vague
enough that they are not always helpful.  Take Command includes the file name
in file error messages, but is often unable to determine a more accurate
explanation of these errors.  The message shown is the best information
available based on the error codes returned by OS/2.

The following list includes all error messages, in alphabetical order:

Access denied:  You tried to write to or erase a read-only file, rename a file
or directory to an existing name, create a directory that already exists,
remove a read-only directory or a directory with files or subdirectories still
in it, or access a file in use by another program.

Alias loop:  An alias refers back to itself either directly or indirectly
(i.e., a = b = a), or aliases are nested more than 16 deep.  Correct your alias
list.

Bad disk unit:  Generally caused by a disk drive hardware failure.

Batch file missing:  Take Command can't find the batch (.BTM or .CMD) file it
was running. It was either deleted, renamed, moved, or the disk was changed.
Correct the problem and rerun the file.

Can't COPY or MOVE file to itself:  You cannot COPY or MOVE a file to itself.
Take Command performs full path and filename expansion before copying to ensure
that files aren't inadvertently destroyed.

Can't create:  Take Command can't create the specified file.  The disk may be
full or write protected, or the file already exists and is read-only, or the
root directory is full.

Can't delete:  Take Command can't delete the specified file or directory.  The
disk is probably write protected.

Can't get directory:  Take Command can't read the directory.  The disk drive is
probably not ready.

Can't make directory entry:  Take Command can't create the filename in the
directory.  This is usually caused by a full root directory. Create a
subdirectory and move some of the files to it.

Can't open:  Take Command can't open the specified file. Either the file
doesn't exist or the disk directory or File Allocation Table is damaged.

Can't remove current directory:  You attempted to remove the current directory,
which OS/2 does not allow.  Change to the parent directory and try again.

Command line too long:  A single command exceeded 1023 characters, or the
entire command line exceeded 2047 characters, during alias and variable
expansion.  Reduce the complexity of the command or use a batch file.  Also
check for an alias which refers back to itself either directly or indirectly.

Command only valid in batch file:  You have tried to use a batch file command,
like DO or GOSUB, from the command line or in an alias.  A few commands can
only be used in batch files (see the individual commands for details).

Contents lost before copy:  COPY was appending files, and found one of the
source files is the same as the target.  That source file is skipped, and
appending continues with the next file.

Data error:  OS/2 can't read or write properly to the device. On a floppy
drive, this error is usually caused by a defective floppy disk, dirty disk
drive heads, or a misalignment between the heads on your drive and the drive on
which the disk was created. On a hard drive, this error may indicate a drive
that is too hot or too cold, or a hardware problem.  Retry the operation; if it
fails again, correct the hardware or diskette problem.

Directory stack empty:  POPD or DIRS can't find any entries in the directory
stack.

Disk is write protected:  The disk cannot be written to. Check the disk and
remove the write-protect tab or close the write- protect window if necessary.

Drive not ready -- close door:  The floppy disk drive door is open.  Close the
door and try again.

Environment already saved:  You have already saved the environment with a
previous SETLOCAL command.  You cannot nest SETLOCAL / ENDLOCAL pairs.

Error in command-line directive:  You used the //iniline option to place an
.INI directive on the startup command line, but the directive is in error.  A
more specific error message follows.

Error on line [nnnn] of [filename]:  There is an error in your TCMDOS2.INI
file. The following message explains the error in more detail.  Correct the
line in error and restart Take Command for your change to take effect.

Error reading:  OS/2 experienced an I/O error when reading from a device.  This
is usually caused by a bad disk, a device not ready, or a hardware error.

Error writing:  OS/2 experienced an I/O error when writing to a device.  This
is usually caused by a full disk, a bad disk, a device not ready, or a hardware
error.

Exceeded batch nesting limit:  You have attempted to nest batch files more than
10 levels deep.

File Allocation Table bad:  OS/2 can't access the FAT on the specified disk.
This can be caused by a bad disk, a hardware error, or an unusual software
interaction.

File exists:  The requested output file already exists, and Take Command won't
overwrite it.

File not found:  Take Command couldn't find the specified file.  Check the
spelling and path name.

General failure:  This is usually a hardware problem, particularly a disk drive
failure or a device not properly connected to a serial or parallel port.  Try
to correct the problem, or reboot and try again.  Also see Data error above;
the problems described there can sometimes cause a general failure rather than
a data error.

Infinite COPY or MOVE loop:  You tried to COPY or MOVE a directory to one of
its own subdirectories and used the /S switch, so the command would run
forever.  Correct the command and try again.

Insufficient disk space:  COPY or MOVE ran out of room on the destination
drive.  Remove some files and retry the operation.

Invalid character value:  You gave an invalid value for a character directive
in the TCMDOS2.INI file.

Invalid choice value:  You gave an invalid value for a "choice" directive (one
that accepts a choice from a list, like "Yes" or "No") in the TCMDOS2.INI file.

Invalid color:  You gave an invalid value for a color directive in the
TCMDOS2.INI file.

Invalid date:  An invalid date was entered.  Check the syntax and reenter.

Invalid directive name:  Take Command can't recognize the name of a directive
in your TCMDOS2.INI file.

Invalid drive:  A bad or non-existent disk drive was specified.

Invalid key name:  You tried to make an invalid key substitution in the
TCMDOS2.INI file, or you used an invalid key name in a keystroke alias or
command.  Correct the error and retry the operation.

Invalid numeric value:  You gave an invalid value for a numeric directive in
the TCMDOS2.INI file.

Invalid parameter:  Take Command didn't recognize a parameter.  Check the
syntax and spelling of the command you entered.

Invalid path:  The specified path does not exist. Check the disk specification
and/or spelling.

Invalid path or file name:  You used an invalid path or filename in a directive
in the TCMDOS2.INI file.

Invalid time:  An invalid time was entered.  Check the syntax and reenter.

Keystroke substitution table full:  Take Command ran out of room to store
keystroke substitutions entered in the TCMDOS2.INI file.  Reduce the number of
key substitutions or contact JP Software for assistance.

Label not found:  A GOTO or GOSUB referred to a non-existent label. Check your
batch file.

Missing ENDTEXT:  A TEXT command is missing a matching ENDTEXT.  Check the
batch file.

Missing GOSUB:  Take Command cannot perform the RETURN command in a batch file.
You tried to do a RETURN without a GOSUB, or your batch file has been
corrupted.

Missing SETLOCAL:  An ENDLOCAL was used without a matching SETLOCAL.

No aliases defined:  You tried to display aliases but no aliases have been
defined.

No closing quote:  Take Command couldn't find a second matching back quote [`]
or double-quote ["] on the command line.

No expression:  The expression passed to the %@EVAL variable function is empty.
Correct the expression and retry the operation.

No shared memory found:  The SHRALIAS command could not find any global alias
list, history list, or directory history list to retain, because you executed
the command from a session with local lists.  Start Take Command with at least
one global list, then invoke SHRALIAS.

Not an alias:  The specified alias is not in the alias list.

Not in environment:  The specified variable is not in the environment.

Not ready:  The specified device can't be accessed.

Not same device:  This error usually appears in RENAME. You cannot rename a
file to a different disk drive.

Out of memory:  Take Command or OS/2 had insufficient memory to execute the
last command.  Try to free some memory by closing other sessions.  If the error
persists, contact JP Software for assistance.

Out of paper:  OS/2 detected an out-of-paper condition on one of the printers
(LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3).  Check your printer and add paper if necessary.

Overflow:  An arithmetic overflow occurred in the %@EVAL variable function.
Check the values being passed to %@EVAL. %@EVAL can handle 16 digits to the
left of the decimal point and 8 to the right.

Read error:  OS/2 encountered a disk read error; usually caused by a bad or
unformatted disk.

Sector not found:  Disk error, usually caused by a bad or unformatted disk.

Seek error:  OS/2 can't seek to the proper location on the disk.  This is
generally caused by a bad disk or drive.

SHRALIAS already loaded:  You used the SHRALIAS command to load SHRALIAS.EXE,
but it was already loaded.  This message is informational and generally does
not indicate an error condition.

SHRALIAS not loaded:  You used the SHRALIAS /U command to unload SHRALIAS.EXE,
but it was never loaded.  This message is informational and may not indicate an
error condition.

Sharing violation:  You tried to access a file in use by another program.  Wait
for the file to become available, or change your method of operation so that
another program does not have the file open while you are trying to use it.

String area overflow:  Take Command ran out of room to store the text from
string directives in the TCMDOS2.INI file.  Reduce the complexity of the
TCMDOS2.INI file or contact JP Software for assistance.

Syntax error:  A command or variable function was entered in an improper
format.  Check the syntax and correct the error.

Too many open files:  OS/2 has run out of file handles.

Unbalanced parentheses:  The number of left and right parentheses did not match
in an expression passed to the %@EVAL variable function.  Correct the
expression and retry the operation.

Unknown command:  A command was entered that Take Command didn't recognize and
couldn't find in the current search path.  Check the spelling or PATH
specification.  You can handle unknown commands with the UNKNOWN_CMD alias (see
ALIAS).

Variable loop:  A nested environment variable refers to itself, or variables
are nested more than 16 deep.  Correct the error and retry the command.

Write error:  OS/2 encountered a disk write error; usually caused by a bad or
unformatted disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Reference Tables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The tables in this section are based on U.S. English conventions.  Your system
may differ if it is configured for a different country or language.  See your
operating system documentation for more information about country and language
support.

To represent the text you type, computers must translate each letter to and
from a number.  The code used by all PC-compatible computers for this
translation is called ASCII.  Function keys, cursor keys, and Alt keys generate
scan codes indicating which key was pressed, but not ASCII codes.  The tables
in this section cover both kinds of codes.

For more information, see:

            ASCII Table
            Key Codes and Scan Codes Table
            Key Codes and Scan Codes Explanation
            ANSI Reference


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. ASCII Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                      Control Characters

    Dec  Hex  Chr  Nam  Ctl   Γöé   Dec  Hex  Chr  Nam  Ctl
    ---  ---  ---  ---  ---   Γöé   ---  ---  ---  ---  ---
    000   00       NUL   ^@   Γöé   016   10      DLE   ^P
    001   01   
   SOH   ^A   Γöé   017   11      DC1   ^Q
    002   02      STX   ^B   Γöé   018   12      DC2   ^R
    003   03      ETX   ^C   Γöé   019   13      DC3   ^S
    004   04      EOT   ^D   Γöé   020   14      DC4   ^T
    005   05      ENQ   ^E   Γöé   021   15      NAK   ^U
    006   06      ACK   ^F   Γöé   022   16      SYN   ^V
    007   07       BEL   ^G   Γöé   023   17      ETB   ^W
    008   08      BS    ^H   Γöé   024   18      CAN   ^X
    009   09       HT    ^I   Γöé   025   19      EM    ^Y
    010   0A       LF    ^J   Γöé   026   1A      SUB   ^Z
    011   0B      VT    ^K   Γöé   027   1B      ESC   ^[
    012   0C      FF    ^L   Γöé   028   1C      FS    ^\
    013   0D       CR    ^M   Γöé   029   1D      GS    ^]
    014   0E      SO    ^N   Γöé   030   1E      RS    ^^
    015   0F      SI    ^O   Γöé   031   1F      US    ^_

                  Punctuation, Digits, Upper Case

  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr
  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  ---
  032   20      Γöé  048   30   0  Γöé  064   40   @  Γöé  080   50   P
  033   21   !  Γöé  049   31   1  Γöé  065   41   A  Γöé  081   51   Q
  034   22   "  Γöé  050   32   2  Γöé  066   42   B  Γöé  082   52   R
  035   23   #  Γöé  051   33   3  Γöé  067   43   C  Γöé  083   53   S
  036   24   $  Γöé  052   34   4  Γöé  068   44   D  Γöé  084   54   T
  037   25   %  Γöé  053   35   5  Γöé  069   45   E  Γöé  085   55   U
  038   26   &  Γöé  054   36   6  Γöé  070   46   F  Γöé  086   56   V
  039   27   '  Γöé  055   37   7  Γöé  071   47   G  Γöé  087   57   W
  040   28   (  Γöé  056   38   8  Γöé  072   48   H  Γöé  088   58   X
  041   29   )  Γöé  057   39   9  Γöé  073   49   I  Γöé  089   59   Y
  042   2A   *  Γöé  058   3A   :  Γöé  074   4A   J  Γöé  090   5A   Z
  043   2B   +  Γöé  059   3B   ;  Γöé  075   4B   K  Γöé  091   5B   [
  044   2C   ,  Γöé  060   3C   <  Γöé  076   4C   L  Γöé  092   5C   \
  045   2D   -  Γöé  061   3D   =  Γöé  077   4D   M  Γöé  093   5D   ]
  046   2E   .  Γöé  062   3E   >  Γöé  078   4E   N  Γöé  094   5E   ^
  047   2F   /  Γöé  063   3F   ?  Γöé  079   4F   O  Γöé  095   5F   _

                   Lower Case, Miscellaneous

                 Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr
                 ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  ---
                 096   60   `  Γöé  112   70   p
                 097   61   a  Γöé  113   71   q
                 098   62   b  Γöé  114   72   r
                 099   63   c  Γöé  115   73   s
                 100   64   d  Γöé  116   74   t
                 101   65   e  Γöé  117   75   u
                 102   66   f  Γöé  118   76   v
                 103   67   g  Γöé  119   77   w
                 104   68   h  Γöé  120   78   x
                 105   69   i  Γöé  121   79   y
                 106   6A   j  Γöé  122   7A   z
                 107   6B   k  Γöé  123   7B   {
                 108   6C   l  Γöé  124   7C   |
                 109   6D   m  Γöé  125   7D   }
                 110   6E   n  Γöé  126   7E   ~
                 111   6F   o  Γöé  127   7F   

                International; Graphics Characters 1

  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr
  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  ---
  128   80   А  │  144   90   Р  │  160   A0   а  │  176   B0   ░
  129   81   Б  │  145   91   С  │  161   A1   б  │  177   B1   ▒
  130   82   В  │  146   92   Т  │  162   A2   в  │  178   B2   ▓
  131   83   Г  │  147   93   У  │  163   A3   г  │  179   B3   │
  132   84   Д  │  148   94   Ф  │  164   A4   д  │  180   B4   ┤
  133   85   Е  │  149   95   Х  │  165   A5   е  │  181   B5   ╡
  134   86   Ж  │  150   96   Ц  │  166   A6   ж  │  182   B6   ╢
  135   87   З  │  151   97   Ч  │  167   A7   з  │  183   B7   ╖
  136   88   И  │  152   98   Ш  │  168   A8   и  │  184   B8   ╕
  137   89   Й  │  153   99   Щ  │  169   A9   й  │  185   B9   ╣
  138   8A   К  │  154   9A   Ъ  │  170   AA   к  │  186   BA   ║
  139   8B   Л  │  155   9B   Ы  │  171   AB   л  │  187   BB   ╗
  140   8C   М  │  156   9C   Ь  │  172   AC   м  │  188   BC   ╝
  141   8D   Н  │  157   9D   Э  │  173   AD   н  │  189   BD   ╜
  142   8E   О  │  158   9E   Ю  │  174   AE   о  │  190   BE   ╛
  143   8F   П  │  159   9F   Я  │  175   AF   п  │  191   BF   ┐

                  Graphics Characters 2; Symbols

  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr Γöé  Dec  Hex  Chr
  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  --- Γöé  ---  ---  ---
  192   C0   └  │  208   D0   ╨  │  224   E0   р  │  240   F0   Ё
  193   C1   ┴  │  209   D1   ╤  │  225   E1   с  │  241   F1   ё
  194   C2   ┬  │  210   D2   ╥  │  226   E2   т  │  242   F2   Є
  195   C3   ├  │  211   D3   ╙  │  227   E3   у  │  243   F3   є
  196   C4   ─  │  212   D4   ╘  │  228   E4   ф  │  244   F4   Ї
  197   C5   ┼  │  213   D5   ╒  │  229   E5   х  │  245   F5   ї
  198   C6   ╞  │  214   D6   ╓  │  230   E6   ц  │  246   F6   Ў
  199   C7   ╟  │  215   D7   ╫  │  231   E7   ч  │  247   F7   ў
  200   C8   ╚  │  216   D8   ╪  │  232   E8   ш  │  248   F8   °
  201   C9   ╔  │  217   D9   ┘  │  233   E9   щ  │  249   F9   ∙
  202   CA   ╩  │  218   DA   ┌  │  234   EA   ъ  │  250   FA   ·
  203   CB   ╦  │  219   DB   █  │  235   EB   ы  │  251   FB   √
  204   CC   ╠  │  220   DC   ▄  │  236   EC   ь  │  252   FC   №
  205   CD   ═  │  221   DD   ▌  │  237   ED   э  │  253   FD   ¤
  206   CE   ╬  │  222   DE   ▐  │  238   EE   ю  │  254   FE   ■
  207   CF   ╧  │  223   DF   ▀  │  239   EF   я  │  255   FF


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. Key Codes and Scan Codes Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(For more details on key codes and scan codes, see the Key Codes and Scan Codes
Explanation.)

Key names prefaced by np are on the numeric keypad.  Those prefaced by cp are
on the cursor keypad between the main typing keys and the number keypad.  The
numeric keypad values are valid if Num Lock is turned off.  If you need to
specify a number key from the numeric keypad, use the scan code shown for the
keypad and the ASCII code shown for the corresponding typewriter key.  For
example, the keypad "7" has a scan code of 71 (the np Home scan code) and an
ASCII code of 54 (the ASCII code for "7").

The chart is blank for key combinations that do not have scan codes or ASCII
codes, like Ctrl-1 or Alt-PgUp.


                        Top Two Keyboard Rows

                             Shift  Shift  Ctrl   Ctrl   Alt
               Scan   ASCII  Scan   ASCII  Scan   ASCII  Scan
     Key       Code   Code   Code   Code   Code   Code   Code

     Esc       1      27     1      27     1      27     1
     1  !      2      49     2      33                   120
     2  @      3      50     3      64     3      0      121
     3  #      4      51     4      35                   122
     4  $      5      52     5      36                   123
     5  %      6      53     6      37                   124
     6  ^      7      54     7      94     7      30     125
     7  &      8      55     8      38                   126
     8  *      9      56     9      42                   127
     9  (      10     57     10     40                   128
     0  )      11     48     11     41                   129
     -  _      12     45     12     95     12     31     130
     =  +      13     61     13     43                   131
     Backspace 14     8      14     8      14     127    14
     Tab       15     9      15     0      148    0      165
     Q         16     113    16     81     16     17     16
     W         17     119    17     87     17     23     17
     E         18     101    18     69     18     5      18
     R         19     114    19     82     19     18     19
     T         20     116    20     84     20     20     20
     Y         21     121    21     89     21     25     21
     U         22     117    22     85     22     21     22
     I         23     105    23     73     23     9      23
     O         24     111    24     79     24     15     24
     P         25     112    25     80     25     16     25
     [  {      26     91     26     123    26     27     26
     ]  }      27     93     27     125    27     29     27
     Enter     28     13     28     13     28     10     28


                       Bottom Two Keyboard Rows

                             Shift  Shift  Ctrl   Ctrl   Alt
               Scan   ASCII  Scan   ASCII  Scan   ASCII  Scan
     Key       Code   Code   Code   Code   Code   Code   Code

     A         30     97     30     65     30     1      30
     S         31     115    31     83     31     19     31
     D         32     100    32     68     32     4      32
     F         33     102    33     70     33     6      33
     G         34     103    34     71     34     7      34
     H         35     104    35     72     35     8      35
     J         36     106    36     74     36     10     36
     K         37     107    37     75     37     11     37
     L         38     108    38     76     38     12     38
     ; :       39     59     39     58                   39
     '  "      40     39     40     34                   40
     `  ~      41     96     41     126                  41
     \  |      43     92     43     124    43     28     43
     Z         44     122    44     90     44     26     44
     X         45     120    45     88     45     24     45
     C         46     99     46     67     46     3      46
     V         47     118    47     86     47     22     47
     B         48     98     48     66     48     2      48
     N         49     110    49     78     49     14     49
     M         50     109    50     77     50     13     50
     ,  <      51     44     51     60                   51
     .  >      52     46     52     62                   52
     /  ?      53     47     53     63                   53
     Space     57     32     57     32     57     32     57


                      Key Pads and Function Keys

                             Shift  Shift  Ctrl   Ctrl   Alt
               Scan   ASCII  Scan   ASCII  Scan   ASCII  Scan
     Key       Code   Code   Code   Code   Code   Code   Code


     F1        59     0      84     0      94     0      104
     F2        60     0      85     0      95     0      105
     F3        61     0      86     0      96     0      106
     F4        62     0      87     0      97     0      107
     F5        63     0      88     0      98     0      108
     F6        64     0      89     0      99     0      109
     F7        65     0      90     0      100    0      110
     F8        66     0      91     0      101    0      111
     F9        67     0      92     0      102    0      112
     F10       68     0      93     0      103    0      113
     F11       133    0      135    0      137    0      139
     F12       134    0      136    0      138    0      140
     np *      55     42     55     42     150    0      55
     np Home   71     0      71     55     119    0
     cp Home   71     224    71     224    119    224    151
     np Up     72     0      72     56     141    0
     cp Up     72     224    72     224    141    224    152
     np PgUp   73     0      73     57     132    0
     cp PgUp   73     224    73     224    132    224    153
     np Minus  74     45     74     45     142    0      74
     np Left   75     0      75     52     115    0
     cp Left   75     224    75     224    115    224    155
     np 5      76     0      76     53     143    0
     np Right  77     0      77     54     116    0
     cp Right  77     224    77     224    116    224    157
     np Plus   78     43     78     43     144    0      78
     np End    79     0      79     49     117    0
     cp End    79     224    79     224    117    224    159
     np Down   80     0      80     50     145    0
     cp Down   80     224    80     224    145    224    160
     np PgDn   81     0      81     51     118    0
     cp PgDn   81     224    81     224    118    224    161
     np Ins    82     0      82     48     146    0
     cp Ins    82     224    82     224    146    224    162
     np Del    83     0      83     46     147    0
     cp Del    83     224    83     224    147    224    163
     np /      224    47     224    47     149    0      164
     np Enter  224    13     224    13     224    10     166


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3. Key Codes and Scan Codes Explanation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Key Codes and Scan Codes Explanation

(This section explains how key codes and scan codes work.  For a reference
chart, see the Key Codes and Scan Codes Table.)

When you press a single key or a key combination, OS/2 translates your
keystroke into two numbers: a scan code, representing the actual key that was
pressed, and an ASCII code, representing the ASCII value for that key.  OS/2
returns these numbers the next time a program requests keyboard input.  This
section explains how key codes work; for information on using them with Take
Command see the TCMDOS2.INI file key mapping directives, keystroke aliases, and
INKEY.

Most Take Command commands that use the numeric key codes listed here also use
key names, which are usually more convenient to use than the numeric codes.
See Keys and Key Names for more information on key names.

As PCs have evolved, the structure of keyboard codes has evolved somewhat
haphazardly with them, resulting in a bewildering array of possible key codes.
We'll give you a basic explanation of how key codes work. For a more in-depth
discussion, refer to a BIOS or PC hardware reference manual.

The nuances of how your keyboard behaves depends on the keyboard manufacturer,
the computer manufacturer who provides the built-in BIOS, and your operating
system.  As a result, we can't guarantee the accuracy of the information in the
tables for every system, but the discussion and reference table should be
accurate for most systems.  Our discussion is based on the 101-key "enhanced"
keyboard commonly used on 286, 386, 486, and Pentium computers, but virtually
all of it is applicable to the 84-key keyboards on older systems.  The primary
difference is that older keyboards lack a separate cursor pad and only have 10
function keys.

All keys have a scan code, but not all have an ASCII code.  For example,
function keys and cursor keys are not part of the ASCII character set and have
no ASCII value, but they do have a scan code.  Some keys have more than one
ASCII code.  The A, for example, has ASCII code 97 (lower case "a") if you
press it by itself.  If you press it along with Shift, the ASCII code changes
to 65 (upper case "A"). If you press Ctrl and A the ASCII code changes to 1. In
all these cases, the scan code (30) is unchanged because you are pressing the
same physical key.

Things are different if you press Alt-A.  Alt keystrokes have no ASCII code, so
OS/2 returns an ASCII code of 0, along with the A key's scan code of 30.  This
allows a program to detect all the possible variations of A, based on the
combination of ASCII code and scan code.

Some keys generate more than one scan code depending on whether Shift, Ctrl, or
Alt is pressed.  This allows a program to differentiate between two different
keystrokes on the same key, neither of which has a corresponding ASCII value.
For example, F1 has no ASCII value so it returns an ASCII code of 0, and the F1
scan code of 59.  Shift-F1 also returns an ASCII code 0; if it also returned a
scan code of 59, a program couldn't distinguish it from F1.  The operating
system translates scan codes for keys like Shift-F1 (and Ctrl-F1 and Alt-F1) so
that each variation returns a different scan code along with an ASCII code of
0.

On the 101-key keyboard there's one more variation:  non-ASCII keys on the
cursor keypad (such as up-arrow) return the same scan code as the corresponding
key on the numeric keypad, for compatibility reasons.  If they also returned an
ASCII code of 0, a program couldn't tell which key was pressed.  Therefore,
these keys return an ASCII code of 224 rather than 0.  This means that older
programs, which only look for an ASCII 0 to indicate a non-ASCII keystroke like
up-arrow, may not detect these cursor pad keys properly.

The number of different codes returned by any given key varies from one (for
the spacebar) to four, depending on the key, the design of your keyboard, and
the operating system.  Some keys, like Alt, Ctrl, and Shift by themselves or in
combination with each other, plus Print Screen, SysReq, Scroll Lock, Pause,
Break, Num Lock, and Caps Lock keys, do not have any code representations at
all.  The same is true of keystrokes with more than one modifying key, like
Ctrl-Shift-A. The operating system may perform special actions automatically
when you press these keys (for example, it switches into Caps Lock mode when
you press Caps Lock), but it does not report the keystrokes to whatever program
is running.  Programs which detect such keystrokes access the keyboard hardware
directly, a subject which is beyond the scope of this manual.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4. ANSI Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Take Command for OS/2's ANSI support allows you to manipulate the cursor,
screen color, and other display attributes through sequences of special
characters embedded in the text you display on the screen.  These sequences are
called "ANSI commands".

This section is a quick-reference to the ANSI commands supported by Take
Command for OS/2.  These sequences are typically displayed by internal
commands, or by character-mode applications started under Take Command's TTY
application support (see Starting Character-Mode Applications).

ANSI support within Take Command for OS/2 can be enabled or disabled with the
ANSI directive in TCMDOS2.INI, the corresponding option on the Display page of
the configuration notebook, or the SETDOS /A command.  You can test whether
ANSI support is enabled with the _ANSI internal variable.

An ANSI command string consists of three parts:

        ESC[                The ASCII character ESC, followed by a left
                            bracket.  These two characters must be present in
                            all ANSI strings.
        parameters          Optional parameters for the command.  If there are
                            multiple parameters they are separated by
                            semicolons.
        cmd                 A single-letter command.  The case of the letter IS
                            meaningful.

 For example, to position the cursor to row 7, column 12 the ANSI command is:

          ESC[7;12H

 To transmit ANSI commands to the screen with Take Command for OS/2, you can
 use the ECHO command.  The ESC character can be generated by inserting it into
 the string directly (if you are putting the string in a batch file and your
 editor will insert such a character), or by using Take command's internal
 "escape" character (caret, [^]) followed by a lower-case "e".  For example,
 the sequence shown above could be transmitted from a batch file with either of
 these commands (the first uses an ESC character directly; the second uses ^e):

          echo 2H
          echo ^e[7;12H

 You can also include ANSI commands in your prompt, using $e to transmit the
 ESC character.  You can NOT use PROMPT to transmit ANSI commands to the screen
 from a batch file (see PROMPT).

 Commands

        ESC[rowsA               Cursor up
        ESC[rowsB               Cursor down
        ESC[colsC               Cursor right
        ESC[colsD               Cursor left
        ESC[row;colH            Set cursor position (top left is row 1, column
                                1)
        ESC[2J                  Clear screen
        ESC[K                   Clear from cursor to end of line
        ESC[row;colf            Set cursor position, same as "H" command
        ESC[attr;attr;...m      Set display attributes; see table of attribute
                                values below
        ESC[s                   Save cursor position (may not be nested)
        ESC[u                   Restore cursor position after a save

 Display Attributes

        1           High intensity (bright) foreground color
        2           Normal intensity
        30-37       Set the foreground color:
                      30=Black  31=Red    32=Green  33=Yellow
                      34=Blue   35=Magenta  36=Cyan   37=White
        40-47       Set the background color, same values as above but
                    substitute 40 for 30 etc.

 Settings are cumulative, so (for example) to set bright red foreground you
 must first set red, then set high intensity:

          echo ^e[31;1m

 Examples

 Set the display to bright cyan on blue, and clear the screen:

          echo ^e[44;36;1m^e[2J

 Set up a prompt which saves the cursor position, displays the date and time on
 the top line in bright white on magenta, and then restores the cursor position
 and sets the color to bright cyan on blue, and displays the standard prompt:

          prompt $e[s$e[1;1f$e[45;37;1m$e[K$d $t$e[u$e[44;36;1m$p$g


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can contact JP Software at any of the following addresses.  Our normal
business hours are 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM weekdays, Eastern US time.

By mail:

        JP Software Inc.
        P.O. Box 1470
        East Arlington, MA 02174
        USA

 By telephone / fax:

        Voice           [phone]
        Fax             [phone]
        Order Line      [phone] (orders only, USA only)

 Electronically:

        CompuServe      Sales / Customer Service:  75020,244
                        Technical Support:  GO JPSOFT or GO PCVENB (section
                        10), User ID 75300,1215

        Internet        Sales / Customer Service:  [e-mail]
                        Technical Support:  [e-mail]

        BBS Support     Via Channel 1 BBS, Boston, 617-354-3230 at 2,400 -
                        14,400 baud; 617-349-1300 at 28,800 baud; no parity, 8
                        data bits, 1 stop bit.

 Technical support is available via public electronic support conferences,
 private electronic mail, telephone, fax, and mail.

 Often the best way to contact us for support is in one of the following public
 electronic support conferences.  The numbers in parentheses indicate the usual
 delay, in business days, to receive a reply to a message.

 CompuServe / ZiffNet:  Primary support is via the JP Software section of the
 CompuServe PCVENB forum (GO JPSOFT or GO PCVENB, section 10, "JP Software") (1
 day).

 Bulletin Boards:  Primary support is via the Channel 1 BBS, Boston, MA (1 - 3
 days; see above for access details).  Messages may be left in any of the
 "4DOS" conferences; check the online list for exact conference numbers.
 Support is also available from many local BBSes via the "4DOS" conferences on
 the RIME, ILink, and FidoNet BBS Networks (3-5 days).

 Before contacting us for support, please check the manuals and other
 documentation for answers to your question.  If you can't find what you need,
 try the Index.  If you're having trouble getting Take Command for OS/2 to run
 properly, either alone or with your particular hardware or software, see the
 Introduction and Installation Guide, and the APPNOTES.DOC file.  Also look
 through the README.DOC and UPDATxxx.DOC files, as they may contain updates to
 the manual or other important information ("xxx" is the version number).

 If you do need to contact us for support, it helps if you can give us some
 basic information:

    *   What exactly did you do?  A concise description of what steps you must
        take to make the problem appear is much more useful than a long
        analysis of what might be happening.

    *   What went wrong?  At what point did the failure occur?  If you saw an
        error message or other important or unusual information on the screen,
        what exactly did it say?

    *   Briefly, what techniques did you use to try to resolve the problem?
        What results did you get?

    *   What computer and operating system version are you using?

    *   Are you running a network?  If so, which one, and which version?

    *   What are the contents of any startup files you use (such as CONFIG.SYS,
        4TCTART, TCEXIT, and TCMDOS2.INI ), any batch files they call, and any
        alias or environment variable files they load?

    *   Can you repeat the problem or does it occur randomly?  If it's random,
        does it seem related to the programs you're using when the problem
        occurs?